Table of Contents 
Introduction 4 
Instrument Cluster 10 
Warning and control lights 10 
Gauges 15 
Entertainment Systems 19 
AM/FM stereo cassette with CD 19 
AM/FM stereo with CD 27 
Rear seat entertainment system 41 
Climate Controls 57 
Manual heating and air conditioning 57 
Electronic automatic temperature control 60 
Lights 71 
Headlamps 71 
Turn signal control 73 
Bulb replacement 75 
Interior lamps 76 
Driver Controls 80 
Windshield wiper/washer control 80 
Steering wheel adjustment 82 
Power windows 85 
Mirrors 87 
Speed control 89 
Message center 93 
Locks and Security 105 
Keys 105 
Locks 105 
Anti-theft system 106 
1
Table of Contents 
Seating and Safety Restraints 117 
Seating 117 
Safety restraints 128 
Air bags 140 
Child restraints 144 
Driving 152 
Starting 152 
Brakes 156 
Transmission operation 160 
Vehicle loading 177 
Trailer towing 180 
Recreational towing 184 
Roadside Emergencies 185 
Getting roadside assistance 185 
Hazard flasher switch 186 
Fuel pump shut-off switch 186 
Fuses and relays 187 
Changing tires 192 
Jump starting 197 
Wrecker towing 202 
Customer Assistance 204 
The dispute settlement board 206 
Utilizing the mediation/arbitration 209 
Getting assistance outside the U.S. and Canada 210 
Ordering additional owner’s literature 211 
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 212 
2
Table of Contents 
Cleaning 213 
Underbody preservation 217 
Maintenance and Specifications 219 
Hood 220 
Engine compartment 221 
Engine oil 222 
Battery 225 
Fuel information 233 
Air filter(s) 248 
Part numbers 254 
Refill capacities 254 
Lubricant specifications 257 
Engine data 259 
Vehicle dimensions 260 
Accessories 263 
Index 266 
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical 
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval 
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written 
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without 
notice and without incurring obligation. 
Copyright © 2002 Ford Motor Company 
3
Introduction 
The following warning may be required by California law: 
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning 
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and 
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to 
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other 
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and 
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known 
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other 
reproductive harm. 
CONGRATULATIONS 
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get 
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more 
you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and 
pleasure you will derive from driving it. 
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the 
following website: 
• In the United States: www.ford.com 
• In Canada: www.ford.ca 
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au 
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx 
Additional owner information is given in separate publications. 
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available 
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your 
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe 
options before they are generally available. 
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is 
an integral part of the vehicle. 
Fuel pump shut-off switch In the event of an accident the 
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the 
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g. 
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump 
shut-off switch in the Roadside emergencies chapter. 
4
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION 
Warning symbols in this guide 
Introduction 
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury and prevent possible 
damage to others, your vehicle and its equipment? In this guide, answers 
to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning 
triangle symbol. These comments should be read and observed. 
Warning symbols on your vehicle 
When you see this symbol, it is 
imperative that you consult the 
relevant section of this guide before 
touching or attempting adjustment 
of any kind. 
Protecting the environment 
We must all play our part in 
protecting the environment. Correct 
vehicle usage and the authorized 
disposal of waste cleaning and 
lubrication materials are significant 
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this 
guide with the tree symbol. 
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE 
There are no particular guidelines for breaking-in your vehicle. During 
the first 1 600 km (1 000 miles) of driving, vary speeds frequently. This is 
recommended to give the moving parts a chance to break in. 
5
Introduction 
SPECIAL NOTICES 
Emission warranty 
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper 
Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 7.3L 
Power Stroke Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible 
for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a 
detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to 
the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s 
Guide. 
Special instructions 
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic 
controls. 
By operating other electronic equipment (e.g. mobile telephone 
without exterior aerial) electromagnetic fields can occur which 
can cause malfunctions of the vehicle electronics. Therefore you should 
observe the instructions of the equipment manufacturers. 
Please read the section Air bag in the Seating and safety 
restraints chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and 
instructions could result in personal injury. 
Front seat mounted rear-facing child or baby seats should 
NEVER be used in front of a passenger side air bag. 
6
Introduction 
Notice to owners of diesel-powered vehicles 
Read the 7.3 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s 
Guide Supplement for information regarding correct operation and 
maintenance of your diesel-powered light truck. 
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles 
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than 
other types of vehicles. 
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully. 
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type, 
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an 
accident. 
Snowplowing 
The Excursion is not recommended for snowplow installation. Ford 
makes no representation as to the suitability of the Excursion for 
snowplowing, in particular regarding the potential for exceeding vehicle 
weight limits, airbag (SRS) deployment sensitivity, vehicle crash integrity, 
or powertrain durability. The Snowplow Package Option is not available. 
Middle East/North Africa vehicle specific information 
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with 
features and options that are different from the ones that are described 
in this Owner Guide; therefore, a supplement has been supplied that 
complements this book. By referring to the pages in the provided 
supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations 
and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this Owner 
Guide for all other required information and warnings. 
7
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle. 
Vehicle Symbol Glossary 
Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide 
Fasten Safety Belt Air Bag-Front 
Air Bag-Side Child Seat 
Child Seat Installation 
Warning 
Child Seat Tether 
Anchorage 
Brake System Anti-Lock Brake System 
Brake Fluid - 
Non-Petroleum Based 
Traction Control 
AdvanceTrac Master Lighting Switch 
Hazard Warning Flasher Fog Lamps-Front 
Fuse Compartment Fuel Pump Reset 
Windshield Wash/Wipe 
Windshield 
Defrost/Demist 
Rear Window 
Defrost/Demist 
Power Windows 
Front/Rear 
Introduction 
8
Vehicle Symbol Glossary 
Power Window Lockout 
Child Safety Door 
Lock/Unlock 
Interior Luggage 
Compartment Release 
Symbol 
Panic Alarm 
Engine Oil Engine Coolant 
Engine Coolant 
Temperature 
Do Not Open When Hot 
Battery 
Avoid Smoking, Flames, 
or Sparks 
Battery Acid Explosive Gas 
Fan Warning Power Steering Fluid 
Maintain Correct Fluid 
Level 
MAX 
MIN Emission System 
Engine Air Filter 
Passenger Compartment 
Air Filter 
Jack Check fuel cap 
Low tire warning 
Introduction 
9
Instrument Cluster 
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES 
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may 
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may 
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions. 
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the 
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, have 
the respective system inspected immediately. 
Service engine soon 
Illuminates briefly to ensure the 
system is functional. If it comes on 
after the engine is started, one of 
the engine’s emission control 
systems may be malfunctioning. The light may illuminate without a 
driveability concern being noted. The vehicle will usually be drivable and 
will not require towing. 
Light turns on solid: 
Temporary malfunctions may cause the light to illuminate. Examples are: 
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. 
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel. 
3. The fuel cap may not have been properly installed and securely 
tightened. 
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with 
high quality fuel of the recommended octane and/or properly installing and 
securely tightening the fuel cap. After three driving cycles without these or 
any other temporary malfunctions present, the light should turn off. (A 
driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed 
city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is required. 
If the light remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available 
opportunity. 
10
Instrument Cluster 
Light is blinking: 
Engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter. 
You should drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and 
deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced at the first available 
opportunity. 
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures 
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior 
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire. 
Check fuel cap (if equipped) 
Illuminates when the fuel cap is not 
installed correctly. Check the fuel 
cap for proper installation. When 
the fuel filler cap is properly 
re-installed, the light(s) will turn off 
after a period of normal driving. 
Continuing to operate the vehicle with the check fuel cap light on, or a 
mis-installed fuel cap can activate the Service Engine Soon/Check 
Engine warning light. 
It may take a long period of time for the system to detect an 
improperly installed fuel filler cap. 
For more information, refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and 
specifications chapter. 
Check gage 
Illuminates when the engine coolant 
CHECK 
temperature is high, the engine oil 
pressure is low or the fuel gauge is 
GAGE 
at or near empty. Refer to Engine 
coolant temperature gauge, Engine oil pressure gauge or Fuel gauge 
in this chapter for more information. 
Brake system warning 
To confirm the brake system warning 
light is functional, it will momentarily 
illuminate when the ignition is turned 
to the ON position (alternatively for 
some vehicles when the ignition is moved from the ON position to START 
position, the light will momentarily illuminate prior to reaching the START 
11
position). It also illuminates if the parking brake is engaged. If the brake 
system warning light does not illuminate as described, seek service 
immediately. Illumination after the parking brake is released indicates low 
brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction and the brake system 
should be serviced immediately by a qualified technician. 
Refer to Brakes in the Driving chapter for more information. 
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 
To confirm the anti-lock brake system 
(ABS) warning light is functional it 
will momentarily illuminate when the 
ABS 
ignition is turned to the ON position 
(alternatively for some vehicles when 
the ignition is moved from the ON position to the START position, the light 
will momentarily illuminate just prior to reaching the START position). If 
the light remains on, continues to flash or fails to illuminate, have the ABS 
serviced immediately. If the ABS light remains on, it means the anti-lock 
brake system has malfunctioned and is disabled, however, the normal brake 
system will still function unless the brake warning light also remains 
illuminated and parking brake is off. Refer to Brakes in the Driving 
chapter for more information. 
Safety belt 
Illuminates to remind you to fasten 
your safety belts. For more 
information, refer to the Seating 
and safety restraints chapter. 
Air bag readiness 
Illuminates to confirm that the air 
bags (front or side) are operational. 
If the light fails to illuminate, 
continues to flash or remains on, 
have the system serviced immediately. 
Charging system 
Illuminates when the battery is not 
charging properly. 
Instrument Cluster 
12
Low fuel 
Illuminates when the fuel level in 
the fuel tank is at, or near, empty 
(refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter 
for more information). 
Speed control 
Illuminates when the speed control 
is activated. 
Instrument Cluster 
Transmission control indicator light (TCIL) 
Illuminates when the overdrive 
function of the transmission has 
been turned OFF using the 
OVERDRIVE 
Transmission Control Switch (TCS). 
Refer to the Driving chapter for 
transmission function and operation. 
If the light does not come on or if the light flashes steadily, have your 
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, damage to the transmission could 
occur. 
Turn signals 
Illuminates when the turn signals or 
the hazard lights are turned on. If 
the lights stay on continuously or 
flash faster, check for a burned-out bulb. 
High beams 
Illuminates when the high beam 
headlamps are turned on. 
13
Instrument Cluster 
Door ajar 
Illuminates when any door is open 
(or not fully closed). 
SecuriLock anti-theft system 
Illuminates when the anti-theft 
alarm system is armed. If the light 
fails to illuminate, continues to flash 
or remains on, have the system serviced. 
Refer to SecuriLock passive anti-theft system in the Locks and 
Security chapter. 
Four wheel drive indicator 
Illuminates when the four-wheel 
drive is engaged. If the light 
4x4 
continues to flash have the system 
serviced. 
Four wheel drive low 
Illuminates when four-wheel drive 
low is engaged. If the light continues 
LOW 
to flash have the system serviced. 
RANGE 
Safety belt warning chime 
Sounds to remind you to fasten your safety belts. 
BeltMinder chime 
Sounds intermittently to remind you to fasten your safety belts. 
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) warning chime 
Sounds when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system (front 
or side airbags) has been detected. Have the supplemental restraint 
system inspected immediately. 
Headlamps on warning chime 
Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the key is removed 
from the ignition and the driver’s door is opened. 
14
Instrument Cluster 
Key-in-ignition warning chime 
Sounds when the key is left in the ignition and the driver’s door is 
opened. 
Parking brake ON warning chime 
Sounds when the parking brake is set, the engine is running and the 
vehicle is driven more than 5 Km (3 mph). 
GAUGES 
Engine coolant temperature gauge 
Indicates the temperature of the 
engine coolant. At normal operating 
temperature, the needle remains 
within the normal area (the area 
between the “H” and “C”). If it 
enters the red section, the engine is 
overheating. Stop the vehicle as 
soon as safely possible, switch off 
the engine immediately and let the 
engine cool. Refer to Engine 
coolant in the Maintenance and 
specifications chapter. 
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is 
running or hot. Steam and scalding liquid from a hot cooling 
system can burn you badly. 
This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant, not the 
coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level the gauge indication 
will not be accurate. 
15
Instrument Cluster 
Engine oil pressure gauge 
Indicates engine oil pressure. At 
normal operating temperature, the 
needle will be in the normal range 
(the area between the “L” and “H”); 
if the needle goes below the normal 
range, stop the vehicle as soon as 
safely possible and switch off the 
engine immediately. Check the oil 
level. Add oil if needed (refer to 
Engine oil in the Maintenance 
and specifications chapter). If the 
oil level is correct, have your vehicle 
checked at your dealership or by a qualified technician. 
Transmission fluid temperature gauge 
If the gauge is in the: 
White area (normal) - the 
transmission fluid is within the 
normal operating temperature 
(between “H” and “C”). 
Yellow area (warning) — the 
transmission fluid is higher than 
normal operating temperature. This 
can be caused by special operation 
conditions (i.e. towing or off road 
use). Refer to Special Operating 
Conditions in the scheduled 
maintenance guide for instructions. 
Operating the transmission for 
extended periods of time with the 
gauge in the yellow area may cause 
internal transmission damage. 
Altering the severity of the driving conditions is recommended to lower 
the transmission temperature into the normal range. 
16
Red area (over temperature) — 
the transmission fluid is overheating. 
Stop the vehicle to allow the 
temperature to return to normal 
range. 
Instrument Cluster 
If the gauge is operating in the Yellow or Red area, stop the vehicle and 
verify the airflow is not restricted such as snow or debris blocking airflow 
through the grill. If the gauge continues to show high temperatures, see 
your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. 
Fuel gauge 
Displays approximately how much 
fuel is in the fuel tank. The fuel 
gauge may vary slightly when the 
vehicle is in motion or on a grade. 
When refueling the vehicle from 
empty indication, the amount of fuel 
that can be added will be less than 
the advertised capacity due to the 
reserve fuel. 
The FUEL DOOR icon and arrow 
indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located. 
17
Speedometer 
Indicates the current vehicle speed. 
Odometer 
Registers the total kilometers 
(miles) of the vehicle. 
Trip odometer 
Registers the kilometers (miles) of 
individual journeys. Press and 
release the reset button (this 
represents the trip mode). Press 
and hold the button for three 
seconds to reset. 
Tachometer 
Indicates the engine speed in 
revolutions per minute. 
Driving with your tachometer 
pointer continuously at the top of 
the scale may damage the engine. 
P RNDD 2 
Instrument Cluster 
18
Entertainment Systems 
PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO/CASSETTE/SINGLE CD 
DISC 
FM 1 
AMC 
BL RF 
EJ TAPE 
CD 
DOLBY B NR 
ST 
SCAN BASS TREB SEL BAL 
VOL PUSH ON 
AM FM 
SEEK 
TUNE 
REW FF 
FADE 
EJ 
MUTE 
AUTO 
CLK 
SIDE 1-2 COMP SHUFFLE 
1 2 3 4 5 6 
Your vehicle is equipped with a delayed accessory feature. This feature 
enables the audio playing media to continue playing up to 10 minutes 
after the ignition has been turned off, or until a door is opened. 
Volume/power control 
Press the control to turn the audio 
system on or off. 
Audio power can also be turned on 
by pressing the AM/FM select 
control or the TAPE/CD select 
control. 
Turn control to raise or lower 
volume. 
VOL - PUSH ON 
VOL - PUSH ON 
If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, 
the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the 
ignition switch is turned back on. 
19
Bass adjust 
The bass adjust control allows you 
to increase or decrease the audio 
system’s bass output. 
Press the BASS control then press: 
• to decrease the bass output 
and 
• to increase the bass output. 
Treble adjust 
The treble adjust control allows you 
to increase or decrease the audio 
system’s treble output. 
Press the TREB control then press: 
• to decrease the treble output 
and 
• to increase the treble output. 
Speaker balance adjust 
Speaker sound distribution can be 
adjusted between the right and left 
speakers. 
Press the BAL control then press: 
• to shift sound to the left and 
• to shift sound to the right. 
Speaker fade adjust 
Speaker sound can be adjusted 
between the front and rear 
speakers. 
Press the FADE control then press: 
• to shift the sound to the 
front and 
• to shift the sound to the rear. 
BASS TREB 
BASS TREB 
BAL FADE 
BAL FADE 
Entertainment Systems 
20
Entertainment Systems 
Seek function 
The seek function control works in radio, tape or CD mode. 
Seek function in radio mode 
• Press to find the next 
listenable station down the 
frequency band. 
• Press to find the next listenable station up the frequency band. 
Seek function in tape mode 
• Press to listen to the previous selection on the tape. 
• Press to listen to the next selection on the tape. 
Seek function in CD mode 
• Press to seek to the previous 
track of the disc. If a selection 
has been playing for three 
seconds or more and you press , the CD will replay that selection 
from the beginning. 
• Press to seek forward to the next track of the disc. After the last 
track has been completed, the first track of the current disc will 
automatically replay. 
Scan function 
The scan function works in radio, 
tape or CD mode. 
SCAN 
Scan function in radio mode 
Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations 
on the frequency band. Press the control again to stop the scan mode. 
Scan function in tape mode 
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the 
tape. (The tape scans in a forward direction. At the end of the tape’s 
first side, direction automatically reverses to the opposite side of the 
tape.) To stop on a particular selection, press the control again. 
Scan function in CD mode 
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the 
CD. (The CD scans in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first 
track at the end of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press the 
control again. 
21
Entertainment Systems 
AM/FM select 
The AM/FM select control works in 
radio, tape and CD modes. 
AM FM 
AM/FM select in radio mode 
This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the 
control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations. 
AM/FM select in tape mode 
Press this control to stop tape play and begin radio play. 
AM/FM select in CD mode 
Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio play. 
Radio station memory preset 
The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These 
controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve 
FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2). 
Setting memory preset stations 
1. Select the frequency band with 
the AM/FM select control. 
AM FM 
2. Select a station. Refer to Tune 
adjust or Seek function for more information on selecting a station. 
3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the sound returns, 
indicating the station is held in memory of the control you selected. 
Autoset memory preset 
Autoset allows you to set strong radio stations without losing your 
original manually set preset stations. This feature is helpful on trips 
when you travel between cities with different radio stations. 
22
Entertainment Systems 
Starting autoset memory preset 
1. Select a frequency using the AM/FM select controls. 
2. Press the control. 
3. When the first six strong stations 
are filled, the station stored in 
memory preset control 1 will start 
playing. 
If there are less than six strong 
stations available on the frequency 
band, the remaining memory preset 
controls will all store the last strong station available. 
These stations are temporarily stored in the memory preset controls 
(until deactivated) and are accessed in the same manner as your original 
presets. 
To deactivate autoset and return to your audio system’s manually set 
memory stations, press the AUTO control again. 
Setting the clock 
To set the hour, press and hold the 
CLK control and press SEEK: 
• to decrease hours and 
• to increase hours. 
To set the minute, press and hold 
the CLK control and press TUNE: 
AUTO 
CLK 
AUTO 
CLK 
AUTO 
CLK 
23
• Entertainment Systems 
to decrease minutes and 
• to increase minutes. 
If your vehicle has a separate clock, (other than the digital radio 
display), the CLK control will not function in the above manner. 
The CLK control will allow you to 
switch between media display mode 
(radio station, stereo information, 
AUTO 
etc.) and clock display mode (time). 
When in clock mode, the media 
information will display for 10 
CLK 
seconds, when the radio is turned 
on, and then revert to clock 
information. Any time that the 
media is changed, (new radio station, etc.), the media information will 
again display for 10 seconds before reverting back to the clock. In media 
mode, the media information will always be displayed. 
Tune adjust 
The tune control works in radio mode. 
Tune adjust in radio mode 
• Press to move to the next 
frequency down the band 
(whether or not a listenable 
station is located there). Hold the control to move through the 
frequencies quickly. 
• Press to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not 
a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement. 
Tape/CD select 
• To begin tape play (with a tape 
TAPE CD 
loaded into the audio system) 
while in the radio or CD mode, 
press the TAPE control. Press the 
button during rewind or fast forward to stop the rewind or fast 
forward function. 
24
• Entertainment Systems 
To begin CD play (if CD is 
loaded), press the CD control. 
The first track of the disc will 
begin playing. If returning from 
radio or tape mode, CD play will begin where it stopped last. 
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm (4.75 
in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, 
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not 
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular 
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs 
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted 
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to 
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be 
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive 
labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your 
dealer for further information. 
Rewind 
The rewind control works in tape 
and CD modes. 
• In tape mode, radio play will 
continue until rewind is stopped 
(with the TAPE control) or the beginning of the tape is reached. 
• In CD mode, pressing the REW control rewinds the CD within the 
current track. 
Fast forward 
The fast forward control works in 
tape and CD modes. 
• In the tape mode, tape direction 
will automatically reverse when 
the end of the tape is reached. 
• In CD mode, pressing the FF control fast forwards the CD within the 
current track. 
TAPE CD 
REW 
1 
FF 
2 
25
Tape direction select 
Press to play the alternate side of 
the tape. 
Eject function 
Press the EJ control to stop and 
eject a tape. 
Press the EJ control to stop and 
eject a CD. 
SIDE 1-2 
3 
EJ 
EJ 
Dolby noise reduction 
Dolby noise reduction operates in 
tape mode. Dolby noise reduction 
reduces the amount of hiss and 
4 
static during tape playback. 
Press the control to activate (and deactivate) the Dolby noise 
reduction. 
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolby 
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and the double-D 
symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing 
Corporation. 
Compression adjust 
Compression adjust brings soft and 
loud CD passages together for a 
COMP 
more consistent listening level. 
5 
Press the COMP control to activate 
and deactivate compression adjust. 
Entertainment Systems 
26
Entertainment Systems 
Shuffle feature 
The shuffle feature operates in CD 
mode and plays all tracks in random 
SHUFFLE 
order. 
6 
Press the SHUFFLE control to start 
this feature. Random order play will continue until the SHUFFLE control 
is pressed again. 
Mute mode 
Press the MUTE control to mute the 
playing media. Press the MUTE 
control again to return to the 
EJ 
playing media. 
MUTE 
PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO IN DASH SIX CD RADIO 
SCAN DISC 
SHUF COMP 
MUTE 
TUNE 
SEEK REW FF 
LOAD EJ 
BASS BAL 
SEL 
TREB FADE 
PUSH ON 
AM CD 1 2 3 4 5 6 MENU 
FM 
Your vehicle is equipped with a delayed accessory feature. This feature 
enables the audio playing media to continue playing up to 10 minutes 
after the ignition has been turned off, or until a door is opened. 
27
Volume/power control 
Press the control to turn the audio 
system on or off. Turn the control to 
raise or lower volume. 
If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, 
the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the 
ignition switch is turned back on. 
Speed sensitive volume 
With this feature, radio volume changes automatically and slightly with 
vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise. 
The recommended level for speed sensitive volume is from level 1 
through level 3. Level 0 turns the speed sensitive volume off and level 7 
is the maximum setting. 
To engage the speed sensitive 
volume feature, press and hold the 
volume control for five seconds 
(with the radio on), then press: 
• to increase volume 
compensation. 
• to decrease or shut off the 
volume compensation. 
The selected level will appear in the 
display. 
Bass adjust 
The bass adjust control allows you 
to increase or decrease the audio 
system’s bass output. 
Press the BASS control. Use the 
SEL control to increase or decrease 
the amount of bass. 
PUSH ON 
PUSH ON 
SEL 
SEL 
BASS 
TREB 
+ 
Entertainment Systems 
28
Entertainment Systems 
Treble adjust 
The treble adjust control allows you 
to increase or decrease the audio 
system’s treble output. 
Press the TREB control. Use the 
SEL control to increase or decrease 
the amount of treble. 
Speaker balance adjust 
Speaker sound distribution can be 
adjusted between the right and left 
speakers. 
Press the BAL control. Use the SEL 
control to adjust the sound between 
the left and right speakers. 
Speaker fade adjust 
Speaker sound can be adjusted 
between the front and rear 
speakers. 
Press the FADE control. Use the 
SEL control to adjust the sound 
between the front and rear speakers. 
Seek function 
The seek function works in radio or CD mode. 
Seek function in radio mode 
• Press to find the next 
listenable station down the 
frequency band. SEEK DOWN 
will display. 
• Press to find the next listenable station up the frequency band. 
SEEK UP will display. 
SEL 
BASS 
TREB 
+ 
BAL 
FADE 
+ SEL 
BAL 
FADE 
+ SEL 
29
Entertainment Systems 
Seek function in CD mode 
• Press to seek to the previous 
track of the current disc. If the 
beginning of the disc is reached, 
the CD player seeks to the 
beginning of the last track on the current disc and begins playing. 
• Press to seek forward to the next track of the current disc. After 
the last track has been completed, the first track of the current disc 
will automatically replay. 
Scan function 
The scan function works in radio or 
CD mode. 
Scan function in radio mode 
Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations 
on the frequency band. Press the SCAN control again to stop the scan 
mode. 
Scan function in CD mode 
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the 
CD. (The CD scans in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first 
track at the end of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press the 
control again. 
AM/FM select 
The AM/FM select control works in 
radio and CD modes. 
AM CD 
FM 
AM/FM select in radio mode 
This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the 
control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations. 
AM/FM select in CD mode 
Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio play. 
Radio station memory preset 
The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These 
controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve 
FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2). 
30
Entertainment Systems 
Setting memory preset stations 
1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM select control. Press the 
AM/FM control to toggle between AM, FM1, or FM2. 
2. Press the SEEK control to access the next listenable station up or 
down the frequency band. Press the TUNE control to go up or down the 
listening band in individual increments. 
3. Select a station. Refer to Seek function for more information on 
selecting a station. 
4. Press and hold a memory preset control. The playing media will mute 
momentarily. When the sound returns, the station is held in memory on 
the control you selected. The display will read SAVED. 
Autostore 
Autostore allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without 
losing your original manually set preset stations. This feature is helpful 
on trips when you travel between cities with different radio stations. 
Starting autostore 
1. Press and momentarily hold the AM/FM control. 
2. AUTOSET will flash in the display 
AM as the frequency band is scrolled 
FM 
CD 
through. 
3. When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in 
memory preset control 1 will start playing. 
If there are fewer than six strong stations available on the frequency 
band, the remaining memory preset controls will all store the last strong 
station available. 
To deactivate autoset and return to your audio system’s manually set 
memory stations, press the AM/FM control again. 
31
Setting the clock 
Press the MENU control until 
SELECT HOUR or SELECT 
MINUTE is displayed. (The menu 
mode must be engaged to enable 
clock mode). 
Use the SEL control to manually set 
the time. 
• Press to increase 
hours/minutes. 
• Press to decrease 
hours/minutes. 
Press the MENU control again to disengage the clock mode. 
Tune/disc adjust 
The tune control works in radio or CD mode. 
Tune adjust in radio mode 
• Press to move to the next 
frequency down the band 
(whether or not a listenable 
station is located there). Hold the control to move through the 
frequencies quickly. 
• Press to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not 
a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement. 
Disc adjust for CD mode 
• Press to select the previous 
disc. (Play will begin on the first 
track of the disc unless shuffle 
mode is engaged.) Refer to Shuffle feature for more information. Hold 
the control to continue reversing through the discs. 
• Press to select the next disc. Hold the control to fast-forward 
through the remaining discs. 
SEL 
DISC 
TUNE 
DISC 
TUNE 
Entertainment Systems 
32
Entertainment Systems 
CD select 
CD mode may be entered by 
pressing the CD control and the 
AM FM 
CD 
LOAD control. Load the CD into the 
audio system. The first track of the 
disc will begin playing. After that, CD play will begin where it stopped 
last. 
If an alternative CD is desired, press the corresponding preset control 
(1–6) of a loaded CD, or press the TUNE control to access the other 
loaded CDs. 
NO CD will display if the CD control is activated when there is not a CD 
present in the audio system. 
NO CD will illuminate in the display if the CD control and a present 
number (that is currently empty) are pressed. The system will play the 
next available disc. 
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm (4.75 
in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, 
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not 
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular 
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs 
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted 
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to 
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be 
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive 
labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your 
dealer for further information. 
Display description 
Six circles are always lit in the digital display. These signify the six CD 
slots in the audio system. When a disc is loaded into a particular slot 
(1–6), the number inside that specific circle lights. If the circle is empty, 
there is no CD in that particular slot. 
Rewind 
The rewind control works in CD 
modes. 
REW FF 
Press and hold the REW control 
until the desired selection is reached. If the beginning of the disc is 
reached, the CD will begin play at the first track. Release the control to 
disengage rewind mode. 
33
When in rewind mode, your audio system will automatically lower the 
volume level of the playing media. 
Fast forward 
The fast forward control works in 
REW FF 
CD modes. 
Press and hold the FF control until 
the desired selection is reached. If the end of the disc is reached, the CD 
will return to the first track. Release the control to disengage fast 
forward mode. 
When in fast forward mode, your audio system will automatically lower 
the volume level of the playing media. 
Load 
The load feature allows you to load 
LOAD 
single CDs into the player internal 
to the radio. 
This six disc CD player is equipped with a CD door. Compact 
discs should only be inserted into the player after the door has 
been opened by the player. Do not attempt to force the door 
open. Compact discs should only be loaded by pressing the LOAD 
control. 
Press the LOAD control. (You can choose which slot will be loaded by 
pressing the desired preset number. If you do not choose a slot, the 
system will choose the next available one.) Wait until the CD door opens. 
Load the CD into the player. LOADING CD# is displayed. When the CD 
has been loaded, the door will close and the CD will begin to play. For 
example, to load a CD into slot 2, press the LOAD control and then press 
preset 2. 
Auto load 
This feature allows you to autoload 
LOAD 
up to 6 discs into the multi disc CD 
player internal to the radio. 
Press and hold the LOAD control until AUTOLOAD # is displayed. The 
CD door will open. Load the desired discs, one at a time. The CD is 
loaded into position and the audio system will display CD#. Each time 
the CD door opens, INSERT CD# is displayed. The door will close and 
the player will move to the next slot after each disc has been loaded. 
The process is repeated until all 6 slots are full. The audio system plays 
Entertainment Systems 
34
Entertainment Systems 
the last CD loaded and the display is updated. If some slots are already 
full and autoload is activated, the system will fill all empty slots. 
Eject 
Press the EJ control to stop and 
eject a CD. You can choose which 
EJ 
CD will be ejected by pressing the 
EJ control and the desired preset number (1–6). For example, to eject 
CD 2, press the EJ control and then press the preset 2 control. If you do 
not choose a specific CD, the player will eject the current CD. 
If a CD is ejected and not removed from the door of the CD player, the 
player will automatically reload the CD. This feature may be used when 
the ignition is ON or OFF. 
Auto eject 
Press and momentarily hold the EJ 
control to engage auto eject. All CDs 
EJ 
which are present in the player will 
be ejected one at a time. If a CD is ejected and not removed from the 
door of the CD player, the player will automatically reload the CD. This 
feature may be used when the ignition is ON or OFF. 
Shuffle feature 
Press the SHUF control until the 
desired shuffle mode is displayed. 
The audio system will then engage 
the desired shuffle mode. 
When engaged, the shuffle feature has two different modes: SHUFFLE 
DISC and SHUFFLE TRK. 
SHUFFLE DISC randomly plays tracks from all the discs presently in the 
audio system. 
SHUFFLE TRK plays all the tracks on the current disc in random order. 
Compression feature 
The compression feature operates in CD mode and brings soft and loud 
CD passages together for a more consistent listening level. 
Press the COMP control until COMP 
ON is displayed. 
35
Entertainment Systems 
Menu mode 
The MENU control allows you to 
access many different features 
within your audio system. There are 
three sets of menus available 
depending upon which mode or feature is activated. 
While in FM mode, two menus are available. If RDS is turned OFF, you 
can access the following: 
• SELECT HOURS — Refer to Setting the clock. 
• SELECT MINUTES — Refer to Setting the clock. 
• RDS OFF — Refer to Radio data system feature. 
If RDS is turned ON, you can access the following: 
• TRAFFIC ON/OFF-Refer to Traffic announcements. 
• FIND type-Refer to Program type. 
• SHOW (NAME, TYPE, NONE)- Refer to Radio data system feature. 
• RDS ON— Refer to Radio data system feature. 
• SELECT HOURS — Refer to Setting the clock. 
• SELECT MINUTES —Refer to Setting the clock. 
When in CD mode, you can access: SELECT HOURS, SELECT MINUTES 
or COMP ON/OFF. 
SELECT HOURS, SELECT MINUTES— Allows you to adjust the hours 
and minutes. Refer to Setting the clock. 
TRAFFIC ON/OFF— Traffic announcements can be programmed as local 
or distant. Refer to Traffic announcements. 
RDS ON/OFF— This feature allows your audio system to receive text 
information from RDS-equipped FM radio stations. Refer to Radio Data 
System feature. 
FIND type — Allows you to select your desired FM program type and 
search for that selection. 
SHOW — Allows you to select from NAME (displays the name of the 
radio station), TYPE (displays the RDS program type: rock, jazz, etc.), or 
NONE (deactivates the RDS display). 
36
Entertainment Systems 
Traffic announcements 
This feature allows you to hear 
traffic announcements. When in this 
mode, traffic announcements will 
MENU + SEL 
interrupt radio and CD play. 
When in FM mode and RDS is 
activated, press the MENU until TRAFFIC OFF displays. Press the SEL 
control to engage the feature. The display will read TRAFFIC ON. 
This feature also allows you to control the volume of traffic 
announcements. With the display reading TRAFFIC ON, adjust the 
volume using the volume control to the desired level. The volume level 
will show at the bottom of the display. Interrupting traffic 
announcements will be at the selected volume level. 
To disengage the feature, press the MENU control until TRAFFIC ON 
displays. Press the SEL control. The display will read TRAFFIC OFF. 
RDS traffic seek feature 
When in traffic mode, you can use the SEEK feature to seek up or down 
the listenable traffic capable frequencies. 
With the RDS activated, press MENU until TRAFFIC ON is displayed. 
Press and hold the SEEK control until the desired selection is reached. 
The feature disengages when the control is released. 
RDS traffic scan feature 
When in traffic mode, you can use the SCAN feature to scan up the 
frequency band for listenable traffic capable frequencies. 
With the RDS activated, press the MENU control until TRAFFIC ON is 
displayed. Press the SCAN control. SCAN TRAFFIC will display. The 
audio system will scan to all traffic capable frequencies. If no valid 
stations are found after one pass, the scan function is cancelled and NOT 
FOUND displays. 
Traffic announcements are not available in most U.S. markets. 
Radio data system (RDS) feature 
This feature allows your audio 
system to receive text information 
from RDS-equipped FM radio 
MENU + SEL 
stations. 
37
To activate RDS: 
• When in FM mode, press the MENU control until RDS OFF displays. 
• Press the SEL control to engage this feature (RDS ON). 
RDS features: 
Once the RDS feature is on, press the MENU control to scroll through 
the following selections: 
Traffic announcements 
This feature allows you to hear traffic announcements while in CD mode. 
These announcements are broadcast by traffic capable RDS stations. 
When in this mode, traffic announcements will interrupt radio and CD 
play. 
• Press the MENU control until TRAFFIC is displayed. 
• Press the SEL control to engage the feature. The display will read 
TRAFFIC ON. 
This feature also allows you to control the volume of traffic 
announcements. With the display reading TRAFFIC ON, adjust the 
volume using the volume control to the desired level. The volume level 
will show at the bottom of the display. Interrupting traffic 
announcements will be at the selected volume level. 
To disengage the feature, press the MENU control until TRAFFIC ON 
displays. Press the SEL control. The display will read TRAFFIC OFF. 
Traffic announcements are not available in most U.S. markets. 
Program type 
This feature allows you to search for RDS stations selectively by their 
program type. 
Press the MENU control until FIND 
program type is displayed. 
MENU + SEL 
Use the SEL control to select the 
program type. With the feature on, 
use the SEEK or SCAN control to 
find the desired program type from the following selections: 
• Classic 
• Country 
• Info 
• Jazz 
Entertainment Systems 
38
• Oldies 
• R  B 
• Religious 
• Rock 
• Soft 
• Top 40 
Show 
This feature allows you to select the 
type of RDS broadcast information 
the radio will regularly show in the 
display. 
Entertainment Systems 
MENU + SEL 
With RDS activated, press the 
MENU control until SHOW is 
displayed. 
MENU + SEL 
Use the SEL control to select TYPE 
(displays the RDS program type: 
rock, jazz, etc), NAME (displays the name of the radio station) or NONE 
(deactivates the RDS display). 
Mute mode 
Press the control to mute the 
playing media. Press the control 
again to return to the playing media. 
REAR SEAT CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED) 
The Rear Seat Controls (RSC) allow 
VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK 
the rear seat passengers to operate 
the radio, tape, CD, or CD changer 
(if equipped). 
39
REW FF SIDE 1-2 COMP SHUFFLE 
1 2 3 4 5 6 
To turn on the rear seat controls, press the memory preset controls 3 
and 5 at the same time. The will appear in the radio display. 
Pressing 3 and 5 at the same time again will turn the rear seat controls 
off. 
If there is a discrepancy between the rear seat and the front audio 
controls, (i.e, both trying to listen to the same playing media), the front 
audio system will receive the desired selection. 
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME 
Press the + control to increase 
volume. 
VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK 
Press the — control to decrease 
volume. 
From the RSC controls, the speaker 
volume can not be set higher than 
the current volume radio setting. Once in headphone mode, the RSC 
volume controls will only change volume in the headphones to a desired 
level and will have no effect on the front speakers (muting the speakers 
will not mute the headphones). 
USING HEADPHONES/PERSONAL AUDIO SYSTEM 
The Personal Audio System allows 
VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK 
the rear seat passengers to listen to 
one media source (radio, tape, CD, 
or CD changer if equipped) while 
the front seat passengers listen to 
another. However, front and rear seat passengers can not listen to two 
different radio stations simultaneously. 
Plug a 3.5 mm headphone (not included) into either one of the two 
jacks. Press the / control to operate the headphones. 
The rear speakers will cut out once the speaker on/off control is pressed. 
A soft audible sound may be heard from the rear speakers. The front 
Entertainment Systems 
40
Entertainment Systems 
speaker will remain playing for the front passengers. Press the / 
control again to deactivate the headphones (Personal Audio System). 
MEDIA SELECT 
Push the MEDIA control to toggle 
between AM, FM1, FM2, tape, CD, 
or CD changer (if equipped). 
MEMORY PRESET CONTROL 
Push the MEM control successively 
to allow rear seat passengers to 
scroll through the six memory 
presets in AM, FM1, or FM2. 
Push the MEM control in CD 
changer mode (if equipped) to 
advance to the next disc. 
SEEK FUNCTION 
• Press to find the next 
listenable station down the 
frequency band. 
• Press to find the next 
listenable station up the 
frequency band. 
VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK 
VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK 
VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK 
In tape mode, use the SEEK function to access the next or 
previous selection. 
In CD or CD changer mode (if equipped), use the SEEK function to 
access the next or the previous selection. 
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT DVD SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) 
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Rear Seat Entertainment DVD 
System which allows you to watch DVDs, play music CDs and to plug in 
and play video game systems. Please review this material to become 
familiar with the system features and safety information. 
41
Entertainment Systems 
DVD player controls 
V 
L 
7 8 9 1 2 
R AUX 
DISP 
MENU 
NEXT 
PREV 
REV FWD 
ENTER 
+ 
DIM 
- 
6 5 4 3 
1. MAIN control 
• NEXT — Press to access the next track on the CD, the next chapter 
on the DVD, or to go up in cursor mode. 
• PREV — Press to access the previous track on the CD, the previous 
chapter on the DVD, or to go down in cursor mode. 
• REV — Press to reverse in CD and DVD play modes or to move the 
cursor left in the menu active mode. 
• FWD —Press to advance in CD and DVD play modes or to move the 
cursor right in the menu active mode. 
2. PLAY/PAUSE control 
Press to playback or pause the DVD. 
3. DIM control 
Adjust to increase (+) or decrease (-) the amount of brightness on the 
screen. 
4. ENTER control 
Press to select the function pointed to within the active menu. May also 
be used by some user interactive discs during movie play. 
5. MENU control 
Press to bring up the disc menu. 
6. AUX control 
Press to switch DVD player from play mode to auxiliary mode. 
42
Entertainment Systems 
7. Auxiliary jacks 
Insert lines for standard video game players. 
8. STOP/EJECT control 
Press once to stop DVD play. Press again to eject the DVD. 
9. DISPLAY (DISP) control 
Press to enable on screen display of player menu and user display 
adjustments. 
DVD control features 
Menu control 
Press the MENU control to enter 
into MENU mode. This allows you to 
move and choose within the DVD 
generated menu structure. Once in 
MENU mode: 
• Press the NEXT control to move 
the cursor one position upward 
• Press the PREV control to move 
the cursor one position downward 
• Press the REV control to move 
the cursor left one position 
NEXT 
PREV 
REV FWD 
NEXT 
PREV 
REV FWD 
NEXT 
PREV 
REV FWD 
43
• Press the FWD control to move 
the cursor right one position 
NEXT 
PREV 
REV FWD 
Next/Previous control 
The NEXT (up) and PREV (down) 
controls allow you to access the 
NEXT 
next or previous track on a CD or 
REV FWD 
chapter on a DVD. When pressed, 
PREV 
the playing audio will mute 
momentarily while the next chapter 
is accessed. Press and hold to advance or reverse multiple tracks or 
chapters. 
REV/ FWD control 
Press the REV/FWD control during 
playback mode to reverse or 
NEXT 
advance at a normal speed. Press 
REV FWD 
the REV/FWD control again to 
PREV 
disengage the reverse/advance 
action and return to normal 
playback mode 
Enter control 
The ENTER control allows you to 
select items when in MENU mode. 
ENTER 
Press the ENTER control to select 
the desired highlighted item. 
CD play mode 
Press NEXT during CD play to 
advance to the next track. If you 
NEXT 
press NEXT during the last track, 
REV FWD 
the system will wrap around to the 
PREV 
first track and begin play. 
Slow play mode 
To enter slow play mode, press the 
PLAY/PAUSE control. Once the 
system is in pause mode, press the 
Entertainment Systems 
44
FWD or REV control for slow motion playback. Three different speeds 
are available depending on how long the control is held. Press the 
control once for slow motion playback. Press the control again to 
disengage slow motion playback. Press the control a third time to return 
to normal playback mode. 
User menu mode 
To adjust the display setting, press 
DISP once and the player menu will 
appear. Press DISP again to adjust 
the display setting. Use the arrow controls and the ENTER controls to 
select the various screen settings. (Available screen selections are 16x9, 
Normal, 4x3 and Zoom). 
The DVD player will read the disc type and configure the display 
accordingly. Some movies have a wide screen movie format to fit a 
normal 4x3 screen. In this case, the movie will have black bars on the 
top and bottom. When shown on the screen, it may appear as a small 
screen within the wide screen. It may be desirable to view this type of 
movie in zoom mode. To enter zoom mode, press DISP once for the 
player menu and again to adjust the display setting. Select zoom from 
the screen settings by using the arrow and ENTER controls. 
Remote control 
+ 
1 2 
DISP 
MNU ENT 
- 
8 
1. REWIND control 
Press to reverse the direction of the DVD movie. 
DISP 
REV FWD 
VOL SEEK 
MODE MEMORY 
3 
4 
5 
6 
7 
Entertainment Systems 
45
Entertainment Systems 
2. FAST FORWARD control 
Press to advance the direction of the DVD movie. 
3. PLAY/STOP control 
Press to play or stop the DVD movie. 
4. SEEK control 
Press to reverse or advance the chapter of the DVD or the track of the 
CD. 
5. DISPLAY (DISP) control 
Press to enable on screen display of player menu and user display 
adjustments. Once the display is on, use SEEK to choose the desired 
screen setting. 
6. ENTER (ENT) MEMORY control 
In DVD playback mode, press the control to select a designated item in 
menu mode. 
In stop mode, press the control to select the next memory preset. 
7. MNU/MODE control 
In DVD playback mode, press to access the disc menu. 
In stop mode, press to change to rear seat mode (i.e. AM, FM, CD . . . ) 
8. VOLUME control 
Press to increase (+) or decrease (-) volume level. 
Battery replacement 
Batteries are supplied with the 
remote control unit. Since all 
batteries have a limited shelf life, 
replace them when the unit fails to 
control the DVD player. There is a 
LED indicator light on the remote 
control that will illuminate when any 
control is pressed. 
Slide the battery cover off as shown on the remote control to access the 
batteries. 
The remote control unit uses two AAA batteries. 
46
Entertainment Systems 
Rear seat controls 
The DVD system controls allow the 
rear seat passengers to operate the 
radio, tape, CD, DVD or CD DJ (if 
equipped). 
Press the / control to activate 
the rear controls. will appear in the radio display. 
Adjusting the volume from the rear seat controls 
The volume control allows the rear 
seat passengers to adjust the 
volume level of the desired 
selection. 
Press the + control to increase the volume. 
Press the - control to decrease the volume. 
When in single play mode, the speaker volume cannot be set higher than 
the current volume radio setting. When in headphone mode, the rear 
seat controls can change the volume setting to any desired level. 
Mode select 
Press the control to toggle between 
AM, FM1, FM2, TAPE, CD, CDDJ, 
DVD and AUX modes (if equipped). 
When selected, the media source 
will illuminate in the radio display. 
• AM 
AM radio frequency band 
• FM1, FM2 
FM radio frequency bands 
• TAPE 
cassette tape (if equipped) 
• CD 
single cd player (if equipped) 
• CDDJ 
VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK 
VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK 
VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK 
47
Entertainment Systems 
compact disc changer (if equipped) 
• DVD/AUX 
DVD player / Auxiliary line input 
Memory preset control 
In radio mode, press the MEMORY 
control successively to scroll 
through the memory presets in AM, 
FM1 or FM2. 
VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK 
In CDDJ mode (if equipped), press the MEMORY control to select the 
next disc in the compact disc changer. Play will begin with the first 
track. 
Seek function 
The SEEK control has varying 
functions depending on which mode 
VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK 
is enabled. 
In radio mode (AM, FM1, FM2): 
Press the control to find the next station down the frequency band. 
Press the control to find the next station up the frequency band. 
In tape mode (if equipped), press the control to access the previous 
selection or for the next selection. 
In CD mode (if equipped), press the control to access the previous 
track or for the next track. 
In CDDJ mode (if equipped), press the control to access the 
previous track or to select the next track of the current disc. 
In AUX/DVD mode, the SEEK control is not operational. 
48
Entertainment Systems 
Using headphones/Personal Audio Feature 
Single play mode will allow all 
VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK 
passengers to listen to the same 
media source through all speakers. 
The Personal Audio Feature allows 
the front seat passengers to listen to 
one source (radio, TAPE, CD, CDDJ, DVD, or AUX) while the rear seat 
passengers listen to another. 
To activate from the rear seat controls, press the / control and 
plug a 3.5mm headphone into the headphone jack. With the headphones 
ON, the rear speakers will not operate. In this mode, the headphones are 
enabled. The rear seat passengers have control over the desired volume 
levels. 
Press the MODE control to toggle to the desired media source. 
Use the SEEK, VOLUME and MEM controls to make any desired 
adjustments. 
Press the / control again to engage the rear speakers and 
deactivate the Personal Audio Feature. In this mode, you can adjust the 
audio output to all system speakers — front and rear together. The rear 
seat passengers can not raise the volume of the system above the level 
on the front radio bezel. 
Parental control 
Your Entertainment System allows you to have control over the rear seat 
controls. The DVD system is automatically activated when the ignition is 
ON. This enables rear seat passengers to utilize the Rear Seat Controls 
(RSC). Once the headphone mode is activated, the symbol will 
appear in the radio display. 
Press the memory preset controls 3 
and 5 simultaneously on the front 
audio controls to disable the rear 
seat controls. They will remain disabled until the front seat passengers 
“enable” them again by simultaneously pressing the 3 and 5 preset 
controls. The settings of the front seat controls will always override 
those of the rear seat controls. 
Press the memory preset controls 2 
1 2 3 4 5 6 
and 4 simultaneously to toggle 
between single play and the 
Personal Audio Feature. 
49
Entertainment Systems 
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) flip-down screen 
The screen rotates down to view and up into housing to store when not 
in use. Be sure the screen is latched into the housing when being stored. 
1. 7.0” (diagonal) active matrix liquid crystal display (LCD) screen. 
2. Screen housing. 
3. Dimmer switch. Toggle to increase/decrease the brightness of the 
screen. 
Playback and format 
• The DVD player of your Rear Seat Entertainment DVD System can 
only be used in the “playback” mode. (The DVD player does not offer 
a record feature.) 
• The system plays standard CDs or DVDs. 
• The DVD player is only capable of playback of DVDs and CDs. The 
player is not compatible with CDR/RW media. 
Rear Seat Entertainment DVD System protection circuits 
High temperature sensor circuit 
• Excessively high temperatures may cause damage to the DVD player. 
• When the temperature of the DVD player becomes too hot, the high 
temperature sensor circuit stops machine operation. DVD/CD will 
illuminate in the radio display. 
50
Entertainment Systems 
General operating tips 
• When the engine is not running, use the system sparingly otherwise it 
will run the battery down. 
• When the ignition is turned to OFF, the Rear Seat Entertainment DVD 
System is also turned OFF. When the ignition is turned ON, the 
system will begin playback from the last selected media source when 
the play control is pressed. 
• To disable the DVD player, simultaneously press the 3 and 5 memory 
presets on the radio face. To enable the DVD player again, press the 3 
and 5 presets simultaneously. 
• The DVD player is only capable of reading the bottom side of a disc. 
When inserting a single sided disc, the label should be up. For a 
multi-sided disc, the desired play side should be down when the disc 
is inserted into the player. 
• The DVD player is only capable of playback of DVDs and CDs. The 
player is not compatible with CDR/RW media. 
• DVDs are formatted by regions. This DVD system can only play region 
1 DVDs (DVDs manufactured in U.S and Canada). 
This unit is designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm (4.75 
in) audio compact discs and DVDs only. Due to technical 
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact 
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford DVD/CD 
players. Irregular shaped discs, discs with a scratch protection 
film attached, and discs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels 
should not be inserted into the player. The label may peel and 
cause the disc to become jammed. It is recommended that 
homemade discs be identified with permanent felt tip marker 
rather than adhesive labels. Ball point pens may damage discs. 
Please contact your dealer for further information. 
Inserting a CD/DVD 
Inserting a CD/DVD into the DVD player automatically turns the power 
ON and playback should begin. 
The counter is automatically reset to 0:00:00. 
Ensure that the overhead screen is down for viewing. 
Removing a CD/DVD 
1. Press the STOP/EJECT control to stop playback. 
2. Press the STOP/EJECT control again to eject the CD/DVD. 
51
Entertainment Systems 
If the CD/DVD is not removed within the allotted time, the system will 
pull the CD/DVD back into the system for safety purposes. If the 
CD/DVD will not eject from the system, press and hold the EJECT 
control for approximately 2 seconds. The disc should eject whether the 
vehicle ignition is ON or OFF. 
Playing a video game/auxiliary device 
1. Connect the video line from your video game device to the YELLOW 
auxiliary input jack. 
2. Connect the left and right audio lines to the WHITE and RED auxiliary 
input jacks respectively. 
3. Press the MODE control until DVD/CD AUX (no disc in player) or 
DVD/CD play (disc in player) illuminates in the radio display. If a disc is 
in the system, playback should begin. To enable the aux inputs, press the 
STOP control or press the AUX control on the DVD player. 
On-screen indicators 
Each time a control is pressed, the operational status of the DVD player 
is shown on the screen. The following are some possible indicators: 
1. CD track 
2. DVD chapter 
3. SYSTEM COUNTER — displays current viewing time of desired media. 
(HOURS:MINUTES:SECONDS) 
4. DVD/ CD STATUS (PLAY/FF/REW/PAUSE) 
5. AUDIO OUTPUT (not changeable) 
52
Entertainment Systems 
6. Subtitles (specific language type - English or Spanish, dependent of 
disc capability and ON/OFF selection.) 
7. Camera angle (of picture) - Adjustable with cursor controls and 
ENTER control. 
Safety information 
Read all of the safety and operating instructions before operating the 
system and retain for future reference. 
Do not attempt to service, repair or modify the Rear Seat Entertainment 
DVD System. See your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. 
Do not insert foreign objects into the DVD compartment. 
The front glass on the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down 
screen may break when hit with a hard surface. If the glass 
breaks, do not touch the liquid crystalline material. In case of contact 
with skin, wash immediately with soap and water. 
Do not expose the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen 
to direct sunlight or intensive ultraviolet rays for extensive 
periods of time. Ultraviolet rays deteriorate the liquid crystal. 
Be sure to review User Manuals for video games and video game 
equipment when used as auxiliary inputs for your Rear Seat 
Entertainment DVD System. 
Do not operate video games or video equipment if the power cords 
and/or cables are broken, split or damaged. Carefully place cords and/or 
cables where they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation 
of seats and/or compartments. 
Disconnect video games and video equipment power cords and/or cables 
when not in use. 
Avoid touching auxiliary input jacks with your fingers. Do not blow on 
them or allow them to get wet or dirty. 
Do not clean any part of the DVD layer with benzene, paint thinner or 
any other solvent. 
Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Compliance 
Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln Mercury could void 
user’s authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested 
and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant 
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide 
53
Entertainment Systems 
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential 
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio 
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the 
instructions, may cause harmful interference and radio communications. 
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a 
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference 
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the 
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an 
experienced radio/TV technician for help. 
Care and service of the DVD player 
Environmental extremes 
DVD players that are subjected to harsh environmental conditions may 
be damaged or perform at less than maximum capability. To avoid these 
outcomes, whenever possible avoid exposing your DVD player to: 
• extremely hot or cold temperatures. 
• direct sunlight. 
• high humidity. 
• a dusty environment. 
• locations where strong magnetic fields are generated. 
Temperature extremes 
When the vehicle is parked under direct sunlight or in an extremely cold 
place for a long period of time, wait until the cabin temperature of the 
vehicle is at normal temperature before operating the system. 
Humidity and moisture condensation 
Moisture in the air will condense in the DVD player under extremely humid 
conditions or when moving from a cold place to a warm one. If moisture 
condensation occurs, do not insert a CD or DVD into the player. If one is 
already in the player, remove it. Turn the DVD player ON to dry the 
moisture before inserting a DVD. This could take an hour or more. 
Cleaning the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen 
Clean the display screen by applying a small amount of water or any 
ammonia-based household glass cleaner directly to a soft cloth. Rub the 
screen gently until the dust, dirt or fingerprints are removed. Do not 
spray the screen directly with water or glass cleaning solvents. Overspray 
from these fluids could drip down into the internal electronics of the 
screen and cause damage. Do not apply excessive pressure while 
cleaning the screen. 
54
Entertainment Systems 
Foreign substances 
Exercise care to prevent dirt and foreign objects from entering the DVD 
player compartment. Be especially careful not to spill liquids of any kind 
onto the media controls or into the videocassette player. If liquid is 
accidentally spilled onto the system, immediately turn the system OFF 
and consult a qualified service technician. 
Cleaning compact discs 
Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean 
discs only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe from the center out to 
the edge. Do not use circular motion. 
Cleaning the DVD player 
Clean the exterior of the DVD player with a damp cloth. Do not use CD 
cleaning kits or CDs intended to clean the interior of your DVD player. 
Use of these products may damage your system. 
CLEANING COMPACT DISCS 
Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean 
discs only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe from the center out to 
the edge. Do not use circular motion. 
CD AND CD CHANGER CARE 
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface. 
• Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended 
periods of time. 
• Do not insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer 
magazine. 
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm (4.75 
in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, 
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not 
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular 
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs 
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted 
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to 
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be 
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive 
labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your 
dealer for further information. 
CLEANING CASSETTE PLAYER (IF EQUIPPED) 
Clean the tape player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after 10 to 
12 hours of play in order to maintain the best sound and operation. 
55
Entertainment Systems 
CASSETTE AND CASSETTE PLAYER CARE 
• Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less. 
• Do not expose tapes to direct sunlight, high humidity, extreme heat or 
extreme cold. Allow tapes that may have been exposed to extreme 
temperatures to reach a moderate temperature before playing. 
• Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole 
and turning the hub. 
• Remove loose labels before inserting tapes. 
• Do not leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not 
being played. 
RADIO FREQUENCY INFORMATION 
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio 
and Telecommunications Commission(CRTC) establish the frequencies AM 
and FM stations may use for their broadcasts. Allowable frequencies are: 
AM 530, 540–1600, 1610 kHz 
FM 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz 
Not all frequencies are used in a given area. 
RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS 
Three factors can affect radio reception: 
• Distance/strength. The further an FM signal travels, the weaker it is. 
The listenable range of the average FM station is approximately 40 km 
(24 miles). This range can be affected by “signal modulation.” Signal 
modulation is a process radio stations use to increase their 
strength/volume relative to other stations. 
• Terrain. Hills, mountains and tall buildings between your vehicle’s 
antenna and the radio station signal can cause FM reception problems. 
Static can be caused on AM stations by power lines, electric fences, 
traffic lights and thunderstorms. Moving away from an interfering 
structure (out of its “shadow”) returns your reception to normal. 
• Station overload. Weak signals are sometimes captured by stronger 
signals when you pass a broadcast tower. A stronger signal may 
temporarily overtake a weaker signal and play while the weak station 
frequency is displayed. 
The audio system automatically switches to single channel reception if it 
will improve the reception of a station normally received in stereo. 
AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTIES AND SERVICE 
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. 
If service is necessary, see your dealer or a qualified technician. 
56
Climate Controls 
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 
Fan speed control 
Controls the volume of air circulated 
in the vehicle. 
Temperature control knob 
Controls the temperature of the 
airflow inside the vehicle. 
Mode Selector Control 
Controls the direction of the airflow 
to the inside of the vehicle. 
OFF 
A/C 
MAX 
A/C 
OFF 
A/C 
MAX 
A/C 
The air conditioning compressor can operate in all modes except 
and . However, the air conditioning will only function if the outside 
temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher. 
Since the air conditioner removes considerable moisture from the air 
during operation, it is normal if clear water drips on the ground under 
the air conditioner drain while the system is working and even after you 
have stopped the vehicle. 
• MAX A/C – Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. MAX A/C is 
noisier than A/C but more economical and will cool the inside of the 
vehicle faster. Airflow will be from the instrument panel registers. This 
mode can also be used to prevent undesirable odors from entering the 
vehicle. 
• A/C – Uses outside air to cool the vehicle. It is quieter than MAX A/C 
but not as economical. Airflow will be from the instrument panel 
registers. 
57
• Climate Controls 
(Panel) – Distributes outside air through the instrument panel 
registers. However, the air will not be cooled below the outside 
temperature because the air conditioning does not operate in this 
mode. 
• OFF – Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate. For short 
periods of time only, use this mode to prevent undesirable odors from 
entering the vehicle. 
• (Panel and floor) – Distributes outside air through the 
instrument panel registers and the floor ducts. Heating and air 
conditioning capabilities are provided in this mode. For added 
customer comfort, when the temperature control knob is anywhere in 
between the full hot and full cold positions, the air distributed through 
the floor ducts will be slightly warmer than the air sent to the 
instrument panel registers. 
• (Floor) – Distributes outside air through the floor ducts. 
However, the air will not be cooled below the outside temperature 
because the air conditioning does not operate in this mode. 
• (Floor and defrost) – Distributes outside air through the 
windshield defroster ducts and the floor ducts. Heating and air 
conditioning capabilities are provided in this mode. For added 
customer comfort, the air distributed through the floor ducts will be 
slightly warmer than the air sent to the windshield defroster ducts. If 
the temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher, the air conditioner will 
automatically dehumidify the air to reduce fogging. 
• (Defrost) – Distributes outside air through the windshield 
defroster ducts. It can be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield. 
If the temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher, the air conditioner 
will automatically dehumidify the air to reduce fogging. 
Operating tips 
• In humid weather conditions, place the climate control system in 
Defrost mode before driving. This will reduce fogging on your 
windshield. Once the windshield has been cleared, operate the climate 
control system as desired. 
• To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in cold weather 
conditions, don’t drive with the climate control system in the OFF or 
MAX A/C position. 
• To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in warm weather 
conditions, don’t drive with the climate control system in the OFF 
position. 
58
• Climate Controls 
Under normal weather conditions, your vehicle’s climate control 
system should be left in any position other than the MAX A/C or OFF 
when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe” 
through the outside air inlet duct. 
• Under snowy or dirty weather conditions, your vehicle’s climate 
control system should be left in the OFF position when the vehicle is 
parked. This allows the climate control system to be free from 
contamination of outside pollutants. 
• If your vehicle has been parked with the windows closed during warm 
weather conditions, the air conditioner will perform more efficiently in 
cooling the vehicle if driven for two or three minutes with the 
windows open. This will force most of the hot, stale air out of the 
vehicle. Once the vehicle has been “aired out”, operate the climate 
control system as desired. 
• Do not put objects under the front seat which may interfere with the 
airflow to the rear seats (if equipped). 
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area (at the 
bottom of the windshield and underneath the hood). 
• Do not place objects over the defroster outlets. These objects can 
block airflow and reduce visibility through your windshield. Avoid 
placing small objects on top of the instrument panel. These objects 
may fall down into the defroster outlets and block airflow, in addition 
to, damaging the climate control system. 
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather conditions: 
1. Select the position that distributes air through the Panel and Floor. 
2. Set the temperature control to full heat. 
3. Set the fan speed to full fan. 
4. Direct the outer panel vents towards the side windows. 
5. To increase airflow to the outer panel vents, close the central panel 
vents. 
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these 
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop. 
59
Climate Controls 
ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (EATC) 
SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) 
1. A/C control 
2. Windshield defrost control 
3. Recirculated air control 
4. Fan speed control 
5. Windshield and floor control 
6. Floor control 
7. Panel and floor control 
8. Panel control 
9. OFF control 
10. AUTO control 
11. External temperature control 
12. Temperature control 
The EATC system will maintain a selected temperature and automatically 
control airflow. You can override automatic operation with any of the 
override controls, the fan speed control or the steering wheel controls (if 
equipped). 
60
Turning the EATC on 
Climate Controls 
Press AUTO, any of the override controls or the fan speed control. The 
EATC will only operate when the vehicle is running. 
Turning the EATC system off 
Press OFF. 
Automatic operation 
Press AUTO and select the desired temperature. The selected 
temperature and the word AUTO will appear in the display window. The 
EATC system will either heat or cool to achieve the selected 
temperature. The system will automatically determine fan speed, airflow 
location and if outside air or recirculated air is required. 
When in AUTO and weather conditions require heat, the EATC system 
directs the majority of the airflow to the floor area. The system will allow 
some airflow through the windshield defroster ducts to reduce window 
fogging. However, if the engine is not warm enough to provide heat, the 
fan will be at a low speed and the airflow will be directed to the 
windshield. In approximately 31⁄2 minutes or less, the fan speed will start 
to increase and the airflow location will change to the floor. 
If unusual conditions exist (i.e.-window fogging, etc.), the manual 
override controls allow you to select airflow locations and the fan control 
allows you to adjust fan speed as necessary. 
61
Climate Controls 
Temperature selection 
The display window indicates the 
selected temperature, function 
(AUTO, A/C, ) or one of the 
manual override controls) and 
manual control of fan speed ( ). 
To control the temperature, select any temperature between 16°C (60°F) 
and 32°C (90°F) by pressing the blue (cooler) or red (warmer) controls. 
Temperature conversion 
Press AUTO and at the same time (for one second) to switch 
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. 
62
Fan speed ( ) 
Climate Controls 
When AUTO is pressed, fan speed is adjusted automatically for existing 
conditions. You can override fan speed at any time. To control fan speed 
manually, press the fan control to cancel the automatic fan speed 
operation. Press the control up for higher fan speed or down for lower 
fan speed. The display will show ( ) and a a bar graph to indicate 
manual fan speed operation and relative speed. 
To return to automatic fan operation, press AUTO. 
A/C control 
Used to manually enable or disable 
the operation of the air conditioning 
in all modes except . In all 
modes, the air conditioning will only 
function if the outside temperature 
is about 6°C (43°F) or higher. When 
manual A/C is selected, A/C will be 
displayed in the display window. 
In , if the outside temperature 
is about 6°C (43°F) or higher, the air conditioner will automatically 
dehumidify the air to reduce window fogging. However, A/C will not be 
displayed in the display window. 
The air conditioning compressor can operate in all modes except OFF. 
However, the air conditioning will only function if the outside 
temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher. 
Since the air conditioner removes considerable moisture from the air 
during operation, it is normal if clear water drips on the ground under 
the air conditioner drain while the system is working and even after you 
have stopped the vehicle. 
63
Climate Controls 
When AUTO is selected, the A/C operates automatically for existing 
conditions and A/C will be displayed in the display window. If A/C is 
selected while in AUTO operation, A/C will not be displayed in the 
display window and the EATC system will remain in AUTO operation. 
However, the EATC system will operate without the use of the air 
conditioning. To return to automatic air conditioning operation, press 
AUTO. 
Recirculation control 
Used to manually enable or disable 
the operation of the recirculated air 
operation in all modes except . 
The use of recirculated air when the 
air conditioning is operating helps to 
reduce the amount of time to cool 
down the interior of the vehicle in 
very hot conditions. Recirculated air 
may also help to keep undesired 
outside odors from reaching the vehicle interior. It is recommended to 
allow the EATC system to automatically control the selection of outside 
or recirculated air. 
The recirculation control cannot be selected in the , as interior 
fogging may occur. 
When AUTO is selected, the recirculated air feature operates 
automatically for existing conditions. However, will not be 
displayed in the display window. If is pressed again, will 
not be displayed in the display window and the EATC system will remain 
in AUTO operation. To return to automatic recirculated air operation, 
press AUTO. 
Do not leave the EATC system in recirculated air operation for extended 
periods of time while the system is in a heating mode or in cold/damp 
conditions as this may cause interior fogging of the front, side and rear 
windows. 
64
Manual override controls 
EXT TEMP 
AUTO OFF 
Climate Controls 
A/C 
F 
AUTO 
The manual override controls allow you to manually determine where 
airflow is directed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO. 
When a manual override control is selected, the EATC system will turn 
off the AUTO indicator in the display window and display those 
indicators of all of the operating controls. 
• - Distributes outside or recirculated air through the instrument 
panel registers. Heating and air conditioning capabilities are provided 
in this mode. The air will be heated or cooled based on the 
temperature selection. For added customer comfort, the system will 
allow some airflow through the floor ducts in this mode. 
• - Distributes outside or recirculated air through the instrument 
panel registers and the floor ducts. Heating and air conditioning 
capabilities are provided in this mode. For added customer comfort, 
when the temperature control is anywhere between full hot and full 
cold positions, the air distributed through the floor ducts will be 
slightly warmer than the air sent to the instrument panel registers. 
• - Distributes outside or recirculated air through the floor ducts. 
Heating and air conditioning capabilities are provided in this mode. 
The air will be heated or cooled based on the temperature selection. 
• - Distributes outside or recirculated air through the windshield 
defroster ducts and the floor ducts. Heating and air conditioning 
capabilities are provided in this mode. The air will be heated or cooled 
based on the temperature selection. For added customer comfort, the 
air distributed through the floor ducts will be slightly warmer than the 
air sent to the windshield defroster ducts. 
• - Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster ducts. 
This mode can be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield. If the 
outside air is about 6°C (43°F) or higher, the air conditioner will 
65
Climate Controls 
automatically dehumidify the air to reduce fogging. (Note that A/C will 
not be displayed in the display window.) Recirculation and A/C 
override controls cannot be selected. For added customer comfort, the 
system will allow some airflow through the floor ducts in this mode. 
Turning the EATC off 
OFF — Outside air is shut out. The fan, heating, and air conditioning will 
not operate. The outside temperature will still display when selected 
with the ignition in the ON position. 
Displaying outside temperature 
Press EXT TEMP to display the 
outside air temperature. It will be 
displayed until EXT TEMP is 
pressed again. 
If the temperature or fan speed is adjusted or if AUTO or modes 
are selected while the outside temperature is being displayed, the vehicle 
interior temperature will be displayed for four seconds. After four 
seconds have passed, the outside temperature will return to the display 
window. 
If the outside temperature is displayed while the EATC system is in the 
OFF mode and then is turned on, the outside temperature will return to 
the display window. 
The outside temperature reading is most accurate when the vehicle is 
moving. Higher readings may be obtained when the vehicle is not 
moving. The readings that you get may not agree with temperatures 
given on the radio due to differences in vehicle and station location. 
Operating tips 
• In humid weather conditions, place the climate control system in 
or rear defrost before driving. This will reduce fogging on your 
windshield. Once the windshield has been cleared, operate the climate 
control system as desired. 
• To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in cold weather 
conditions, don’t drive with the climate control system in the OFF 
position or . 
66
• Climate Controls 
To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in warm weather 
conditions, don’t drive with the climate control system in the OFF 
position. 
• Under normal weather conditions, your vehicle’s climate control 
system should be left in any position other than OFF or when 
the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe” through the 
outside air inlet duct. 
• Under snowy or dirty weather conditions, your vehicle’s climate 
control system should be left in the OFF position when the vehicle is 
parked. This allows the climate control system to be free from 
contamination of outside pollutants. 
• If your vehicle has been parked with the windows closed during warm 
weather conditions, the air conditioner will perform more efficiently in 
cooling the vehicle if driven for two or three minutes with the 
windows open. This will force most of the hot, stale air out of the 
vehicle. Once the vehicle has been “aired out”, operate the climate 
control system as desired. 
• Don’t put objects under the front seat that will interfere with the 
airflow to the rear seats. 
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the area 
(at the bottom of the windshield and underneath the hood). 
• Do not place objects over the defroster outlets. These objects can 
block airflow and reduce your ability to see through your windshield. 
Avoid placing small objects on top of the instrument panel. These 
objects may fall down into the defroster outlets and block airflow, in 
addition to damaging the climate control system. 
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather conditions: 
1. Select 
2. Set the temperature control to full heat 
3. Select A/C 
4. Set the fan speed to HI 
5. Direct the outer panel vents towards to side windows 
6. To increase airflow to the outer panel vents, close the central panel 
vents. 
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel, as these 
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop. 
67
AUXILIARY A/C-HEATER CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED) 
Depending upon the equipment package of your vehicle, your vehicle 
may be equipped with auxiliary climate controls. The auxiliary climate 
control feature provides increased capacity to quickly heat or cool the 
vehicle. 
Your auxiliary climate controls are located in the overhead console of the 
first row seating and in the headliner of the second row seating. The 
auxiliary climate controls are dependent on the main climate control 
system. If the main climate control system is in the OFF position, the 
auxiliary climate controls will not work. In addition, if the main climate 
control system is operating at a full cool temperature (MAX A/C 
or ), the auxiliary temperature control becomes non-functional and 
also operates at a full cool temperature. 
The auxiliary unit can be controlled either by the front seat using the 
front auxiliary control or by the rear seat passenger using the rear 
auxiliary control, but not both. To control the auxiliary unit using the 
rear control, the front control must be in the REAR position. 
Front auxiliary control 
Your auxiliary A/C controls are 
located in the overhead console. 
Turn the fan speed control to the 
desired speed. 
Turn the temperature control to 
regulate the air temperature. 
COOL WARM PANEL FLOOR 
OFF REAR 
HI 
OFF REAR 
HI 
COOL WARM 
Climate Controls 
68
Climate Controls 
Turn the mode selector control to 
determine the airflow location. 
When FLOOR is selected, airflow 
will be directed through the floor 
register in the third row passenger 
seating. When PANEL is selected, 
airflow is directed through the overhead registers of the second and 
third row seating. To blend airflow between each location, select any 
position between PANEL and FLOOR. 
Rear auxiliary climate controls 
The rear auxiliary climate controls 
are located in the headliner of the 
second row seating. To control the 
auxiliary unit using the rear 
auxiliary climate control, the front 
auxiliary climate control must be in 
the REAR position. 
Turn the fan speed control to the 
desired speed. 
Turn the temperature control to 
regulate the air temperature. 
PANEL FLOOR 
OFF LO 
HI 
COOL WARM PANEL FLOOR 
OFF LO 
HI 
COOL WARM 
69
Climate Controls 
Turn the mode selector control to 
determine the airflow location. 
When FLOOR is selected, airflow 
will be directed through the floor 
register in the third row passenger 
seating. When PANEL is selected, 
airflow is directed through the overhead registers of the second and 
third row seating. To blend airflow between each location, select any 
position between PANEL and FLOOR. 
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER 
The rear defroster control is located 
on the instrument panel. 
Press the rear defroster control to 
clear the rear window of thin ice 
and fog. 
• A small LED will illuminate when 
the rear defroster is activated. 
PANEL FLOOR 
The ignition must be in the ON position to operate the rear window 
defroster. 
The defroster turns off automatically after 10 minutes or when the 
ignition is turned to the OFF position. To manually turn off the defroster 
before 10 minutes have passed, push the control again. 
Activating the rear window defroster will also activate the heated mirrors 
(if equipped). For more information refer to Heated outside mirrors in 
the Driver controls chapter. 
70
HEADLAMP CONTROL 
Rotate the headlamp control to the 
first position to turn on the parking 
lamps. 
Rotate to the second position to 
turn on the headlamps. 
A 
Autolamp control (if equipped) 
The autolamp system provides light 
sensitive automatic on-off control of 
A 
the exterior lights normally 
controlled by the headlamp control. 
The autolamp system also keeps the 
lights on for approximately 20 
seconds after the ignition switch is 
turned to OFF. 
To change the delay time of the autolamp feature, do the following: 
1. Start with the ignition in OFF and the autolamps selected. 
2. Deselect the autolamps. 
3. Put the ignition in RUN. 
4. Put the ignition in OFF. 
5. Select the autolamps. Steps 2 through 5 must be performed within a 
10 second period. At this point, the headlamps and parking lamps will 
turn on. 
6. Deselect the autolamps after the desired autolamp delay time 
(maximum of 3 minutes). At this point, the headlamps and parking 
lamps will turn off. 
Lights 
71
Foglamp control (if equipped) 
The headlamp control also operates 
the foglamps. The foglamps can be 
turned on only when the headlamp 
control is in the and 
position and the high beams are not 
turned on. 
Pull headlamp control towards you 
to turn foglamps on. The foglamp indicator light will illuminate if the 
ignition is in the RUN position. 
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped) 
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output. 
To activate: 
• the ignition must be in the ON position and 
• the headlamp control is in the OFF or Parking lamps position. 
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during 
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system 
does not activate with your tail lamps and generally may not provide 
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your 
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision. 
High beams 
Push the lever toward the 
instrument panel to activate. Pull 
the lever towards you to deactivate. 
Flash to pass 
Pull toward you slightly to activate 
and release to deactivate. 
A 
Lights 
72
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL 
Use to adjust the brightness of the 
instrument panel and all applicable 
switches in the vehicle during 
headlamp and parklamp operation. 
Move the control to the full upright 
position, past detent, to turn on the 
interior lamps. 
Move the control to the full down position, past detent, to prevent the 
interior lights from illuminating when the doors are opened. 
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS 
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant. 
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps 
should be checked by a qualified service technician. 
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 
• Push down to activate the left 
turn signal. 
• Push up to activate the right turn 
signal. 
• In DRL equipped vehicles, use of 
the turn signals will shut off the 
highbeams in daytime driving. 
INTERIOR LAMPS 
Dome/Map lamps (if equipped) 
The map lamps and controls are 
located on the dome lamp. Press the 
controls on either side of each map 
lamp to activate the lamps. 
Lights 
73
Lights 
Rear courtesy/reading lamps 
• Second row courtesy/reading lamp 
• Third row courtesy/reading lamp 
The courtesy lamps light when: 
• any door is opened. 
• the instrument panel dimmer switch is held up until the courtesy 
lamps come on. 
• any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is OFF. 
The reading lamps can be turned on by pressing the rocker control. 
Rear dome lamp 
The dome lamp lights when: 
• any door is opened (and switch is 
in middle position). 
• the instrument panel dimmer 
switch is held up until the 
courtesy lamps come on. 
• any of the remote entry controls 
are pressed and the ignition is OFF (and switch is in the middle 
position). 
With the ignition key in the ACC or ON position, the rear dome lamp can 
be turned ON or OFF by sliding the control. 
74
Lights 
BULBS 
Replacing exterior bulbs 
Check the operation of the following lamps frequently: 
• Headlamps 
• High-mount brakelamp 
• Brakelamps 
• Turn signal lamps 
• License plate lamp 
• Tail lamps 
• Back-up lamps 
Do not remove lamp bulbs unless they can be replaced immediately with 
new ones. If a bulb is removed for an extended period of time, 
contaminants may enter the lamp housings and affect lamp performance. 
Using the right bulbs 
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must 
be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an “E” for 
Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe 
visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the 
lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time. 
Function Number of 
bulbs 
Trade number 
Headlamps 2 9007 
Park/turn lamp 2 3157 AK 
Sidemarker lamp 2 194 
Foglamp 2 899 
Tail/stop lamp 2 3157 K 
Backup lamp 2 3156K 
High-mount brakelamp 3 912 
Rear dome lamp 1 921 
Map/dome lamp 2 578 
Second row reading lamp 2 578 
Third row reading lamp 2 211-2 
License lamp 2 168 
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted. 
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer 
75
Lights 
Interior bulbs 
Check the operation of the following interior bulbs frequently: 
• dome lamps 
• map lamps 
• second row reading lamps 
• third row reading lamp 
For bulb replacement, see a qualified service technician or your dealer. 
Replacing headlamp bulbs 
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position. 
2. Open the hood. 
3. Disconnect the electrical 
connector from the bulb by pulling 
rearward. 
4. Remove bulb retainer ring by 
turning it counterclockwise about 1⁄4 
turn, then slide the ring off the 
plastic base. 
5. Without turning, carefully pull 
bulb out of headlamp assembly. 
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of 
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do 
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to 
break the next time the headlamps are operated. 
6. Insert the glass end of the new bulb into the headlamp assembly. 
When the grooves in the plastic base are aligned, push the bulb into the 
lamp assembly until the plastic base contacts the rear of the lamp 
assembly. 
7. Install bulb retaining ring over the plastic base and lock the ring into 
the socket by turning it clockwise until you feel a “stop.” 
8. Connect the electrical connector into the rear of the plastic base until 
it “snaps.” 
76
Replacing front parking/turn signal bulbs 
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position. 
2. Open the hood. 
3. Remove the two screws and 
carefully disengage parking 
lamp/turn signal assembly from the 
vehicle. 
4. Rotate bulb socket 
counterclockwise about 1⁄4 turn and 
remove from lamp assembly. 
5. Carefully pull bulb straight out of 
the socket and push in the new 
bulb. 
6. Install the bulb socket in lamp 
assembly by turning clockwise. 
7. Align the lamp assembly on the 
vehicle. 
8. Install two screws on parking 
lamp/turn signal assembly. 
Lights 
77
Lights 
Replacing foglamp bulbs 
1. Rotate the foglamp bulb 
counterclockwise and remove from 
foglamp (the rear side of the 
foglamp is shown). 
2. Disconnect the electrical 
connector from the foglamp bulb. 
Install the new bulb in reverse order. 
Replacing tail lamp/turn/backup lamp bulbs 
The tail lamp/turn/backup lamp 
bulbs are located in the same 
portion of the tail lamp assembly, 
one just below the other. Follow the 
same steps to replace either bulb: 
1. Remove the four screws and the 
lamp assembly from vehicle. 
2. Rotate bulb socket 
counterclockwise about 1⁄4 turn and 
remove from lamp assembly. 
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight 
out of the socket and push in the 
new bulb. 
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp 
assembly by turning clockwise. 
5. Install the lamp assembly and 
secure with four screws. 
78
Replacing high-mount brakelamp bulbs 
To remove the brakelamp assembly: 
1. Remove the two screws and lamp 
assembly from vehicle. 
2. Remove the bulb socket from 
lamp assembly by rotating it 45 
degrees. 
3. Carefully pull bulb straight out of 
socket and push in the new bulb. 
Lights 
To install the brakelamp assembly: 
1. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate 45 degrees. 
2. Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle and secure with two screws. 
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs 
The license plate bulbs are located 
behind the rear bumper. To change 
the license plate lamp bulbs: 
1. Reach behind the rear bumper to 
locate the bulb socket. 
2. Twist the socket counterclockwise 
and remove. 
3. Pull out the old bulb from socket 
and push in the new bulb. 
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp 
assembly by turning it clockwise. 
79
Driver Controls 
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER CONTROLS 
Rotate the windshield wiper control 
to the desired interval, low or high 
speed position. 
The bars of varying length are for 
intermittent wipers. When in this 
position rotate the control upward 
for fast intervals and downward for 
slow intervals. 
Push (tap) the end of the stalk 
briefly for a single swipe (no wash). 
Push and hold the end of the stalk 
to activate washer. The wash cycle 
will continue for up to ten seconds 
or until released. After release, 
there will be three clearing wipes. 
Speed dependent wipers 
When the windshield wiper control is set on the intermittent settings, 
speed-sensitive front wipers automatically adjust as the vehicle’s speed 
changes. 
Rear window wiper/washer controls 
For rear wiper operation, rotate the 
rear window wiper and washer 
control to the desired position. 
Select: 
INT 1 — 3.5 second interval rear 
wiper. 
INT 2 — 10.5 second interval rear 
wiper. 
OFF — Rear wiper and washer off. 
For rear wash cycle, rotate (and hold as desired) the rear wiper/washer 
control to either position. 
From either position, the control will automatically return to the INT2 or 
OFF position. 
80
Driver Controls 
Windshield wiper blades 
Check the wiper blades for wear at least twice a year or when they seem 
less effective. Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments 
used by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades. 
Checking the wiper blades 
If the wiper blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and 
wiper blades using undiluted windshield wiper solution or a mild 
detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clean water. To avoid damaging the 
blades, do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner or other solvents. 
Changing the wiper blades 
To replace the wiper blades: 
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the 
windshield and lock into the service 
position. 
2. Turn the blade at an angle from 
the wiper arm. Push the lock pin 
manually to release the blade and 
pull the wiper blade down toward 
the windshield to remove it from the 
arm. 
3. Attach the new wiper to the 
wiper arm and press it into place 
until a click is heard. 
Rear window wiper blade 
Refer to Windshield wiper blades in this section for more information 
on rear wiper blades. 
81
Driver Controls 
TILT STEERING WHEEL 
Pull the tilt steering control toward 
you to move the steering wheel up 
or down. Hold the control while 
adjusting the wheel to the desired 
position, then release the control to 
lock the steering wheel in position. 
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving. 
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR 
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the 
visor mirror lamps. 
OVERHEAD CONSOLE 
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to 
your option package. 
82
Forward storage bin (if equipped) 
Press the release control to open 
the storage compartment. The door 
will open slightly and can be moved 
to full open. 
The storage compartment may be 
used to secure sunglasses or a 
similar object. 
Driver Controls 
Installing a garage door opener (if equipped) 
The storage compartment can be converted to accommodate a variety of 
aftermarket garage door openers: 
• Place Velcro hook onto back side 
of aftermarket transmitter 
opposite of actuator control. 
• Place transmitter into storage 
compartment, control down. 
• Place the provided height 
adaptors onto the back of the 
storage bin door as needed. 
• Press the storage compartment door to activate the transmitter. 
Power quarter rear windows (if equipped) 
Press the portion of the VENT 
control to open the power rear 
quarter windows. 
Press the portion of the VENT 
control to close the power rear 
quarter windows. 
VENT VENT 
MODE E/M 
RESET 
AUXILIARY POWER POINT 
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang 
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. 
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered 
by your warranty. 
83
The power point is an additional power source for electrical accessories. 
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter. Use 
the powerpoint. 
The maximum current draw of any single power point is 20 Amps. 
Exceeding this limit may result in a blown fuse. 
There are up to four auxiliary power points in the following locations: 
• Located on the instrument panel. 
• Located on the back side of the 
center console (Accessible from 
the second row seats). 
• Located in the left side storage 
compartment in the third row 
seating position. 
POWER POINT 
Driver Controls 
84
• Located on the right trim panel in 
the rear cargo area. 
Driver Controls 
POWER WINDOWS 
Press and hold the rocker switches to open and close windows. 
• Press the top portion of the 
rocker switch to close. 
• Press the bottom portion of the 
rocker switch to open. 
AUTO 
85
Driver Controls 
Express down 
• Press AUTO completely down and 
release quickly. The driver’s 
window will open fully. Depress 
again to stop window operation. 
One touch down can be deactivated 
during operation by pushing down 
on the top part of the driver power 
window control. 
AUTO 
Window lock 
The window lock feature allows only 
the driver to operate the power 
windows. 
To lock out all the window controls 
except for the driver’s press the left 
side of the control. Press the right 
side to restore the window controls. 
Accessory delay (if equipped) 
With accessory delay, the window switches may be used for up to ten 
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until 
any door is opened. 
MIRRORS 
Automatic dimming inside rear view mirror (if equipped) 
Your vehicle is equipped with inside rear view mirror with an 
auto-dimming function. The electronic day/night mirror will change from 
the normal state to the non-glare state when bright lights (glare) reach 
the mirror. When the mirror detects bright light from front or behind, it 
will automatically adjust to minimize glare. 
86
Driver Controls 
Press the control located on the 
bottom of the mirror to turn the 
mirror on or off. The mirror will 
automatically return to the normal 
state whenever the vehicle is placed 
in R (reverse)(when the mirror is 
on) to ensure a bright clear view 
when backing up. 
Do not clean the housing or glass of 
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel 
or other petroleum-based cleaning 
products. 
Power side view mirrors (if equipped) 
The ignition can be in any position to adjust the power side view mirrors. 
To adjust your mirrors: 
1. Select L to adjust the left mirror 
or R to adjust the right mirror. 
2. Move the control in the direction 
you wish to tilt the mirror. 
MIRRORS 
L R 
MIRRORS 
L R 
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place. 
4. Adjust spotter mirrors (if equipped) manually. 
87
Driver Controls 
Heated outside mirrors R (if equipped) 
Both mirrors are heated 
automatically to remove ice, mist 
and fog when the rear window 
defrost is activated. 
Do not remove ice from the 
mirrors with a scraper or 
attempt to readjust the mirror 
glass if it is frozen in place. 
These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors. 
Signal mirrors (if equipped) 
When the turn signal is activated, 
the appropriate mirror will show a 
blinking red arrow. 
The arrow provides an additional 
warning to other drivers that your 
vehicle is about to turn. Driver and 
passengers seated inside the vehicle 
cannot see the arrow. 
Fold-away mirrors 
Fold the side mirrors in carefully when driving through a narrow space, 
like an automatic car wash. 
The telescoping feature (if equipped) allows the mirror to extend 
approximately 76 mm (3 inches). 
88
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS 
The accelerator and brake pedal 
should only be adjusted when the 
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift 
lever is in the P(Park) position. 
Press and hold the rocker control to 
adjust accelerator and brake pedal 
toward you or away from you. 
The adjustment allows for approximately 76 mm (3 inches) of maximum 
travel. 
Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on pedals 
or while the vehicle is moving. 
SPEED CONTROL 
To turn speed control on 
• Press ON. 
Vehicle speed cannot be controlled 
until the vehicle is traveling at or 
above 48 km/h (30 mph). 
Do not shift the gearshift lever 
into N (Neutral) with the speed 
control on. 
Do not use the speed 
control in heavy traffic or 
on roads that are winding, 
slippery, or unpaved. 
Driver Controls 
89
Driver Controls 
To turn speed control off 
• Press OFF or 
• Turn off the vehicle ignition. 
Once speed control is switched off, 
the previously programmed set 
speed will be erased. 
To set a speed 
• Press SET ACCEL. For speed 
control to operate, the speed 
control must be ON and the 
vehicle speed must be greater 
than 48 km/h (30 mph). 
If you drive up or down a steep hill, your vehicle speed may vary 
momentarily slower or faster than the set speed. This is normal. 
Speed control cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it increases above the 
set speed on a downhill. If your vehicle speed is faster than the set 
speed while driving on a downhill, you may want to shift to the next 
lower gear or apply the brakes to reduce your vehicle speed. 
If your vehicle slows down more than 16 km/h (10 mph) below your set 
speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage. This is normal. 
Pressing RES will re-engage it. 
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that 
are winding, slippery, or unpaved. 
90
To set a higher set speed 
• Press and hold SET ACCEL. 
Release the control when the 
desired vehicle speed is reached 
or 
• Press and release SET ACCEL to 
operate the Tap-Up function. 
Each press will increase the set 
speed by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) or 
• Accelerate with your accelerator 
pedal. When the desired vehicle 
speed is reached, press and release SET ACCEL. 
You can accelerate with the accelerator pedal at any time during speed 
control usage. Releasing the accelerator pedal will return your vehicle to 
the previously programmed set speed. 
To set a lower set speed 
• Press and hold COAST. Release 
the control when the desired 
speed is reached or 
• Press and release COAST to 
operate the Tap-Down function. 
Each press will decrease the set 
speed by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) or 
• Depress the brake pedal. When 
the desired vehicle speed is 
reached, press SET ACCEL. 
Driver Controls 
91
Driver Controls 
To disengage speed control 
• Depress the brake pedal. 
Disengaging the speed control will 
not erase the previously 
programmed set speed. 
Pressing OFF will erase the 
previously programmed set speed. 
To return to a previously set speed 
• Press RES/RESUME. For 
RES/RESUME to operate, the 
vehicle speed must be faster than 
48 km/h (30 mph). 
92
Driver Controls 
Indicator light 
This light comes on when either the 
SET ACCEL or RES controls are 
pressed. The vehicle speed must be 
at or above 48 km/h (30 mph). It turns off when the speed control OFF 
control is pressed, the brake is applied, or the ignition is turned to the 
OFF position. 
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED) 
These controls allow you to operate some radio and climate control 
features. 
Radio control features 
• Press BAND/MODE to select AM, 
FM1, FM2, TAPE or CD (if 
equipped). 
In Radio mode: 
• Press MEM/NEXT to select a 
preset station from memory. 
In Tape mode: 
• Press MEM/NEXT to listen to the 
next selection on the tape. 
In CD mode: 
• Press MEM/NEXT to listen to the 
next track on the disc. 
CRUISE 
NEXT 
MODE 
In any mode: 
• Press VOL up or down to adjust the volume. 
Climate control features 
• Press TEMP up or down to adjust temperature. 
• Press FAN up or down to adjust fan speed. 
TRIP COMPUTER (IF EQUIPPED) 
The trip computer tells you about the condition of your vehicle through 
a constant monitor of vehicle systems. You may select display features on 
the trip computer for a display of status. 
The appearance of your vehicle’s trip computer may differ depending on 
your vehicle’s option package, but the functions are the same. 
93
Driver Controls 
The trip computer only operates with the ignition in the ON position. 
Trip computer features follow: 
Selectable features 
English/metric display 
Press this control to change the trip 
computer display between metric 
and English units. 
MODE E/M 
RESET 
Mode control 
Each press of the MODE control will 
display a different feature as follows: 
Average fuel economy. The display 
will indicate the vehicle’s average 
fuel economy in liters/100 km (or 
miles/gallon) since the average fuel 
economy was last reset. 
If you calculate your average fuel 
economy by dividing liters of fuel 
used by 100 kilometers traveled 
(miles traveled by gallons used), your figure may be different than 
displayed for the following reasons: 
• your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up 
• differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at 
service stations 
MODE E/M 
RESET 
• variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another 
• rounding of the displayed values to the nearest liter (gallon) 
To reset the average fuel economy: 
1. Press the MODE control repeatedly until average fuel economy is 
displayed (this is the only resettable display). 
94
2. Press the E/M and MODE 
controls simultaneously. The display 
will illuminate the “AVG” indicator. 
While the indicator is lit, release 
both controls to reset the average 
fuel economy. 
Driver Controls 
MODE E/M 
RESET 
Fuel range. This displays the approximate number of kilometers (miles) 
left to drive before the fuel tank is empty. The indicated distance to 
empty may be inaccurate: 
• with sustained, drastic changes in fuel economy (such as trailer 
towing), but will eventually recover. 
• if the vehicle is started while parked on an incline. 
• if less than 30 liters (8 gallons) of fuel is added to the fuel tank. 
The fuel range function will flash for five seconds at the following 
distances based on fuel remaining and fuel economy calculations: 
• 80 km (50 miles) 
• 40 km (25 miles) 
• 16 km (10 miles) 
Outside air temperature (if equipped) 
The temperature can be displayed in 
Centigrade or Fahrenheit by 
pressing the E/M control. 
If the outside temperature falls 
MODE E/M 
below 3°C (38°F), the display will 
alternate from “ICE” to the outside 
RESET 
temperature at a two second rate 
for one minute. 
Off. In this mode the display is off. 
Compass 
The compass display is contained in the overhead console. The vehicle 
heading is displayed as one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW. 
The compass heading is displayed in average fuel economy modes, fuel 
range modes and temperature modes. 
95
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large 
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic 
or metallic objects placed in or on the vehicle may also affect compass 
accuracy. Adjustments may need to be made to the zone and calibration 
of the compass. 
Compass zone adjustment 
1. Determine which magnetic zone 
you are in for your geographic 
location by referring to the zone 
map. 
2. Locate the trip computer on the 
overhead console. 
3. Turn ignition to the ON position. 
4. Press and hold both trip 
computer controls. After 
approximately four seconds, the trip 
computer will enter zone setting 
MODE E/M 
mode. Zone setting mode is 
indicated when the display lights the 
RESET 
“ZONE” indicator. 
5. Release both controls. 
Subsequent pressing of either 
control will increment the zone. 
Press the control repeatedly until 
the correct zone setting for your geographic location is displayed on the 
trip computer. 
6. To exit the zone setting mode and save the displayed zone in memory, 
release both controls for greater than five seconds. 
Compass calibration adjustment 
Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and 
high voltage lines. 
For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air 
conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut. 
1. Locate the trip computer located in the overhead console. 
2. Start the vehicle. 
Driver Controls 
96
Driver Controls 
3. Press and hold both trip 
computer controls. After 
approximately eight seconds, the 
trip computer will enter CAL mode. 
CAL mode is indicated when the 
MODE E/M 
display lights the “CAL” indicator. 
RESET 
4. Release both controls. The display 
will return to normal, except that 
the CAL indicator will remain lit 
until the compass is sucessfully 
calibrated. 
5. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle (less than 5 km/h [3 mph]) until 
the CAL indicator turns off. It may take up to five circles to complete 
calibration. 
6. The compass is now calibrated. 
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (IF EQUIPPED) 
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver, located on the driver’s visor, 
provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held transmitters 
with a single built-in device. This feature will learn the radio frequency 
codes of most current transmitters to operate garage doors, entry gate 
operators, security systems, entry door locks, and home or office lighting. 
When programming your HomeLink Universal Transceiver to a 
garage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of 
the way to prevent potential harm or damage. 
Do not use the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door 
opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. 
federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model 
manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot detect 
an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet current 
U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact HomeLink 
at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515. 
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for 
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink equipped vehicle 
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the 
programmed Homelink Universal Transceiver buttons be erased for 
security purposes, refer to Programming in this section. 
97
Driver Controls 
Programming 
Do not program the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with the 
vehicle parked in the garage. 
Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the 
ACC position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink. It is 
also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held 
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker 
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. 
1. Press and hold the two outside 
buttons releasing only when the red 
light begins to flash after 20 
seconds. Do not repeat step one to 
program additional hand-held 
transmitters to the remaining two 
HomeLink buttons. This will erase 
previously programmed hand-held 
transmitter signals into HomeLink. 
2. Position the end of your 
hand-held transmitter 5–14 cm (1–3 inches) away from the HomeLink 
Universal Transceiver surface (located on your visor) while keeping the 
red light in view. 
3. Simultaneously press and hold 
both the HomeLink and hand-held 
transmitter button. Do not release 
the buttons until step 4 has been 
completed. 
Some entry gates and garage door 
openers may require you to replace 
step 3 with procedures noted in the 
“Gate Operator and Canadian Programming” section for Canadian 
residents. 
4. The red light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Release both buttons 
when the red light flashes rapidly. (The rapid flashing light indicates 
acceptance of the hand-held transmitters’ radio frequency signals.) 
5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button and observe the red 
light. If the light is a constant red, programming is complete and your 
device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and 
released. Note: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, 
begin with step 2 in the “Programming” section — do not repeat step 1. 
If the red light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a 
98
Driver Controls 
continuous red, proceed with steps 6 through 8 to complete 
programming of a rolling code equipped device. 
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, 
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging 
antenna wire is attached to the unit). 
7. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and color 
of the button may vary by manufacturer.) 
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight. 
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and 
release the HomeLink button. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence 
again, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other 
rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to 
complete the programming. 
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To 
program additional HomeLink buttons begin with step 2 in the 
“Programming” section. For questions or comments, please contact 
HomeLink at www.homelink.com. or 1–800–355–3515. 
Gate Operator  Canadian Programming 
During programming, your 
hand-held transmitter may 
automatically stop transmitting — 
not allowing enough time for 
HomeLink to accept the signal 
from the hand-held transmitter. 
After completing steps 1 and 2 
outlined in the “Programming” 
section, replace step 3 with the following: 
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is 
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent 
overheating. 
• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button (note step 3 in the 
“Programming” section) while you press and release — every two 
seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency 
signal has been accepted by the HomeLink. The red indicator light 
will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink accepts the radio 
frequency signal. 
• Proceed with step 4 in the “Programming” section. 
99
Driver Controls 
Operating the HomeLink Universal Transceiver 
To operate, simply press and release 
the appropriate HomeLink button. 
Activation will now occur for the 
trained product (garage door, gate 
operator, security system, entry 
door lock, or home or office lighting 
etc.). For convenience, the 
hand-held transmitter of the device 
may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still 
programming difficulties, contact Homelink at www.homelink.com.or 
1–800–355–3515. 
Erasing HomeLink buttons 
To erase the three programmed 
buttons (individual buttons cannot 
be erased): 
• Press and hold the two outer 
HomeLink buttons until the red 
indicator light begins to 
flash-after 20 seconds. Release 
both buttons. Do not hold for 
longer that 30 seconds. 
HomeLink is now in the train (or 
learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with step 
2 in the “Programming” section. 
Reprogramming a single HomeLink button 
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously 
trained, follow these steps: 
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do NOT release the 
button. 
2. The red indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without 
releasing the HomeLink button, follow step 2 in the “Programming” 
section. 
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com 
or 1–800–355–3515. 
100
OVERDRIVE CONTROL 
Activating overdrive 
Driver Controls 
(Overdrive) is the normal drive position for the best fuel economy. 
The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through 
all available gears. 
Deactivating overdrive 
Press the Transmission Control 
Switch (TCS) located on the end of 
the gearshift lever. The 
Transmission Control Indicator Light 
(TCIL) (the word OFF) will 
illuminate on the end of the gearshift lever. The transmission will operate 
in all gears except overdrive. 
To return to normal overdrive mode, 
press the Transmission Control 
Switch again. The TCIL (the word 
OFF) will no longer be illuminated. 
When you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the transmission will 
automatically return to normal (Overdrive) mode. 
For additional information about the gearshift lever and the transmission 
control switch operation refer to the Automatic Transmission 
Operation section of the Driving chapter. 
CENTER CONSOLE 
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These 
include: 
• Utility compartment 
• Coin holder slots 
• Pen holder 
Use only soft cups in the 
cupholder. Hard objects can 
injure you in a collision. 
OVERDRIVE 
OVERDRIVE OFF 
101
• Driver Controls 
Utility compartment 
• Coin holder 
• Pen holder 
• Writing surface 
• Space for lap-top computer 
CARGO NET (IF EQUIPPED) 
The cargo net secures lightweight 
objects in the cargo area. Attach the 
net to the anchors provided. This 
net is not designed to restrain 
objects during a collision. 
TRIDOOR 
The TriDoor area is intended for cargo storage only, not for passengers. 
You can open and close the TriDoors from outside the vehicle only. You 
cannot open the liftgate or cargo doors from inside the vehicle. 
102
• To open the liftgate, unlock the 
liftgate (with the key, the key fob 
by pressing the UNLOCK button 
twice or power door locks) and 
pull up on the liftgate handle. 
• To open the cargo doors, open 
the liftgate, then open right cargo 
door first, using the handle on 
top of the door, then open the 
left cargo door using the handle 
on the side of the door. 
Driver Controls 
For wider loads, the cargo doors can 
be opened wider by unhooking the check straps from the door hinge. 
Make sure the check straps are reattached after loading and before 
closing the cargo doors.. 
• To close and lock the liftgate and cargo doors, close the left cargo 
door first, then the right cargo door, then pull down and close the 
liftgate. Lock the TriDoor with the key, key fob or the power door lock 
button. 
The cargo doors and liftgate should be closed before driving your 
vehicle. Leaving the liftgate and/or the cargo doors open could 
cause serious damage to the TriDoors and its components as well as 
allowing carbon monoxide to enter the vehicle. If you must drive with 
the cargo doors and liftgate window open, keep the vents open so 
outside air comes into the vehicle. 
LUGGAGE RACK 
Maximum load is 90 kg (200 lbs) on the roof rack structure, or 45 kg 
(100 lbs) on the roof panel slats, evenly distributed. If it is not possible 
to distribute the load, position it as far rearward as possible. Use 
adjustable tie down loops to secure the load. 
103
Driver Controls 
To adjust the cross-bar position: 
1. Release the latch at both ends of 
the cross-bar (both cross-bars are 
adjustable). 
2. Slide cross-bar to the desired 
location. 
3. Tighten the latch at both ends of 
the cross-bar. 
To remove the cross-bar assembly from the roof rack side rails: 
1. Loosen the latch at both ends of the cross-bar (both cross-bars are 
adjustable). 
2. Slide cross-bar to the end of the rail. 
3. Press down on the locking feature inside the side rail and slide the 
cross-bar over it. 
4. Slide the assemblies off the end. 
To adjust the tie-downs: 
Use the adjustable tie downs to secure loads to the luggage carrier. 
1. Completely loosen the slider 
knobs at each end of the cross rail. 
2. Lift the cross-bar and re-set it at 
the desired position. Ensure that 
both sides of the cross rails are 
even. 
NOTE: Siding the cross-bar on 
the roof can cause damage to 
the roof paint. 
3. Tighten the slider knobs at both 
ends of the cross-bar. 
104
Locks and Security 
KEYS 
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. In case of loss, replacement 
keys are available from your dealer. 
You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case 
you require it in an emergency. 
Refer to SecuriLock Passive Anti-Theft System for more information. 
POWER DOOR LOCKS 
Press control to unlock all doors. 
Press control to lock all doors. 
Smart locks 
This feature prevents you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if your 
key is still in the ignition. 
When you open the driver’s door and you lock the vehicle with the 
power door locks, all the doors will lock, then the driver’s door will 
automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the ignition. 
The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, using the 
manual lock button on the door, locking the driver’s door with a key, or 
by using the lock button on the remote entry transmitter (if equipped). 
105
Locks and Security 
Childproof door locks 
When these locks are set, the rear 
doors cannot be opened from the 
inside. The rear doors can be 
opened from the outside when the 
doors are unlocked. 
The childproof locks are located on 
rear edge of each rear door and 
must be set separately for each 
door. Setting the lock for one door 
will not automatically set the lock 
for both doors. 
Move lock control up to engage the 
childproof lock. Move control down 
to disengage childproof locks. 
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM 
The remote entry system allows you to: 
• unlock all vehicle doors without a key 
• lock all vehicle doors without a key 
• activate the panic alarm 
The remote entry LOCK and UNLOCK operate with the ignition in the 
ON or OFF position and the transmission in P (Park). 
If there is any potential remote keyless entry problem with your vehicle, 
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are brought to the dealership, 
to aid in troubleshooting. 
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of 
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device 
must accept any interference received, including interference that may 
cause undesired operation. 
106
Locks and Security 
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party 
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to 
operate the equipment. 
Unlocking the doors 
Press this control to unlock the 
driver door. The interior lamps and 
running board lamps (if equipped) 
will illuminate. 
Press the control a second time 
within three seconds to unlock all 
doors and liftgate. 
Locking the doors 
Press this control to lock all doors, 
liftgate or the driver’s door. If all 
doors are closed, the parking lamps 
will flash once. 
Press this control a second time 
within three seconds. The door(s) 
will lock again, the horn will chirp 
once and the parking lamps will 
flash once more. If any of the doors 
are ajar, the horn will make two 
quick chirps, reminding you to 
properly close all doors. 
Power door unlock disable feature (if equipped) 
This feature will help protect your 
vehicle from unauthorized entry. 
The UNLOCK function on the power 
door switch will not operate with 
the ignition OFF and twenty 
seconds after the doors are closed 
and electronically locked by the 
remote entry transmitter, key pad, or power door switch (if pressed 
while the door was open). 
107
Locks and Security 
The UNLOCK function will operate again after you unlock the vehicle 
using the remote entry transmitter or key pad, turn the ignition to ON, 
or open the door from inside of the vehicle. 
Power door unlock disable feature — activation/deactivation 
1. Turn the ignition key to ON. 
2. Press the UNLOCK button 3 times. 
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF. 
4. Press the UNLOCK button 3 times. 
5. Turn the ignition key to ON. The horn will chirp. 
6. Press the LOCK button 2 times. You should receive 2 horn chirps to 
indicate the system has been disabled, or 2 chirps followed by a honk to 
indicate the system has been enabled. 
Note: Pressing the power door LOCK button two times again will turn 
the feature ON if it was previously OFF, or OFF if it was previously ON. 
Every two consecutive presses of the LOCK button after successfully 
entering the configuration mode will change the enable/disable condition 
of the feature. 
7. Turn ignition to OFF to exit programming. The horn will chirp once to 
confirm the procedure is complete. 
Sounding a panic alarm 
Press this control to activate the 
alarm. 
To deactivate the alarm, press the 
control again or turn the ignition to 
ACC or ON. 
Panic alarm will only operate with 
the ignition in the OFF position. 
Replacing the battery 
The remote transmitter is powered by one coin type three-volt lithium 
battery CR2032 or equivalent. Typical operating range will allow you to 
be up to 10 meters (33 feet) away from your vehicle. A decrease in 
operating range can be caused by the following factors: 
• Weather conditions 
108
• Nearby radio towers 
Locks and Security 
• Structures around the vehicle 
• Other vehicles parked next to the vehicle 
To replace the battery: 
1. Twist a thin coin between the two 
halves of the transmitter near the 
key ring. DO NOT TAKE THE 
FRONT PART OF THE 
TRANSMITTER APART. 
2. Place the positive (+) side of new 
battery in the same orientation. 
Refer to the diagram inside the 
transmitter unit. 
3. Snap the two halves back 
together. 
Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to 
become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter should 
operate normally after battery replacement. 
Replacing lost transmitters 
If a remote transmitter has been lost 
and you would like to remove it 
from the vehicle’s memory, or you 
would like to purchase additional 
remote transmitters and have them 
programmed to your vehicle: 
• Take all your vehicle’s 
transmitters to your dealer for 
programming, or 
• Perform the programming 
procedure yourself. 
Programming remote transmitters 
It is necessary to have all (maximum of four — original and/or new) of 
your remote transmitters available prior to beginning this procedure. 
To program the transmitters yourself: 
109
• Locks and Security 
Ensure the vehicle is unlocked. 
• Place the key in the ignition and 
turn from 2 (LOCK) to 3 (OFF) 
and cycle between 3 (OFF) and 
4(ON) eight times in rapid 
succession (within 10 seconds) 
with the eighth turn ending in the 
4 (ON) position. The doors will 
lock to confirm that programming 
mode has been entered. 
3 
2 
1 
5 
4 
• Within 20 seconds, program a remote transmitter by pressing any 
button on a transmitter. The doors will lock/unlock to confirm that the 
remote transmitter has been programmed. (If more than 20 seconds 
pass before pressing a remote transmitter button, the programming 
mode will exit and the procedure will have to be repeated.) 
• Repeat the previous step to program additional remote transmitters. 
The doors will lock/unlock to confirm that each remote transmitter has 
been programmed. 
• When you have completed programming the remote transmitters, turn 
the ignition to 3 (OFF) or wait 20 seconds. Again the doors will 
lock/unlock to confirm programming has been completed. 
Illuminated entry 
The illuminated entry system will turn on the interior lights when the 
remote transmitter unlock control is pressed. 
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if the 
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or if the remote transmitter 
lock control is pressed, or after 25 seconds of illumination. 
The inside lights will not turn off if: 
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or 
• any door or liftgate is open. 
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the 
ignition has been turned to the OFF position, 10 minutes after if the 
dome lamp is off, and 30 minutes after if the dome lamp switch is left 
on. 
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 
With the keyless entry keypad, you can: 
• lock or unlock the vehicle doors without using the key. 
110
Locks and Security 
Your vehicle has a factory set 5 digit code that operates the keyless entry 
system. You can also program your own 5 digit personal entry code. The 
factory-set code is located: 
• on the owner’s wallet card in the glove compartment 
When pressing the controls on the keyless entry keypad, press the 
middle of the controls to ensure a good activation. 
Programming your own personal entry code 
To program your own code: 
1. Enter factory set code (keypad will illuminate for five seconds when a 
key is pressed). 
2. Press 1/2 control within five 
seconds of step 1. 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
3. Enter your personal 5 digit code. 
Enter each digit within five seconds 
of previous one. 
Do not set a code that includes five 
of the same number or presents 
them in sequential order. Thieves 
can easily figure out these types of codes. 
Your personal code does not replace the permanent code that the 
dealership gave you. You can use either code to unlock your vehicle. If a 
second personal code is entered, the module will erase it in favor of the 
new code. 
If you wish to erase your personal code, use the following instructions: 
1. Enter factory set code. 
2. Press 1/2 control within five 
seconds of step 1 and release. 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
3. Within five seconds of step 2, 
press and hold the 1/2 control for 
two seconds. 
The system will now only respond 
to the factory set code. 
Unlocking the doors with the keyless entry system 
To unlock the driver’s door, enter either the factory-set code or personal 
code (each digit pressed within five seconds of the prior digit). The 
interior lamps will illuminate. 
111
Locks and Security 
To unlock all doors, enter the 
factory-set code or personal code 
(driver door unlocks) and press the 
3/4 control within five seconds. 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
Locking the doors with the keyless entry system 
It is not necessary to first enter the 
factory or personal code prior to 
locking all doors. To lock all the 
doors: 
• Press the 7/8 and the 9/0 control 
at the same time. 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
Autolock 
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the following 
conditions are met: 
• all doors are closed, and 
• the brake is pressed before reaching 8 km/h (5 mph), and 
• the ignition is in the RUN position and the vehicle is traveling more 
than 8 km/h (5 mph). 
Relock 
The autolock feature repeats when the following conditions are met: 
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the RUN 
position, and 
• the brake is pressed before reaching 8 km/h (5 mph), and 
• the vehicle is travleing more than 8 km/h (5 mph). 
Deactivating/activating autolock 
There are 3 methods to enable/disable this feature. One through your 
dealer, the second with a power door unlock/lock sequence and the third 
with the keypad. 
Before following the activation or deactivation procedures, make sure 
that the anti-theft system is not armed, ignition is off, and all vehicle 
doors, liftgate and cargo doors are closed. 
112
Locks and Security 
Keyless entry key pad procedure 
1. Enter 5 digit entry code 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
2. Press and hold 7/8 control 
3. Press and release 3/4 control 
4. Release 7/8 control. 
The user should receive a horn 
chirp to indicate the system has 
been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has 
been enabled. 
Power door unlock/lock 
procedure 
You must complete steps 1-7 within 
30 seconds or the procedure will 
have to be repeated. If the 
procedure needs to be repeated, 
you must wait 30 seconds. 
1. Turn the ignition key to ON. 
2. Press the power door unlock control three times. 
3. Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. 
4. Press the power door unlock control three times. 
5. Turn the ignition back to ON. The horn will chirp. 
6. Press the unlock control, then press the lock control. The horn will 
chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one long 
chirp) if autolock was activated. 
7. Turn the ignition to OFF. The horn will chirp once to confirm the 
procedure is complete. 
Pressing the power door UNLOCK/LOCK button again will toggle the 
Autolock/Relock states. 
Turn ignition to OFF to exit programming. 
SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM 
SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization 
system. This system is designed to prevent the engine from being started 
unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. 
The SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is not compatible with 
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may 
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection. 
113
Locks and Security 
THEFT INDICATOR 
The theft indicator is located on top of the instrument panel. 
• When the ignition is in the OFF position, the indicator will flash once 
every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning as 
a theft deterrent. 
• When the ignition is in the ON position, the indicator will glow for 3 
seconds to indicate normal system functionality. 
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system, the indicator will flash 
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the ON position. If this 
occurs, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for service. 
Automatic arming 
The vehicle is armed immediately 
after switching the ignition to the 3 
(OFF) position. The THEFT light in 
3 
the instrument cluster will flash 
every two seconds when the vehicle 
is armed. 
2 
1 
5 
4 
Automatic disarming 
Switching the ignition to the 4 (ON) position with a coded key disarms 
the vehicle. The THEFT light will illuminate for three seconds and then 
go out. If the THEFT light stays on for an extended period of time or 
flashes rapidly, have the system serviced by your dealership or a 
qualified technician. 
Key information 
Your vehicle is supplied with two coded keys. Only a coded key will 
start your vehicle. Spare coded keys can be purchased from your 
dealership. Your dealership can program your key or you can “do it 
yourself.” Refer to Programming spare keys. 
Certain items may cause vehicle starting issues: 
Certain items may cause vehicle starting issues: 
• Large metallic objects 
114
• Locks and Security 
Electronic devices on the key chain that can be used to purchase 
gasoline or similar items 
• A second key on the same key ring as the coded key 
If any of these items are present, you need to keep these objects from 
touching the coded key while starting the engine. These objects and 
devices cannot damage the coded key, but can cause a momentary “no 
start” condition if they are too close to the key during engine start. If a 
problem occurs, turn ignition OFF and restart the engine with all other 
objects on the key ring held away from the ignition key. Check to make 
sure the coded key is an approved Ford coded key. 
If your keys are lost or stolen you will need to do the following: 
• Use your spare key to start the vehicle, or 
• Have your vehicle towed to a dealership or a locksmith. The key codes 
will need to be erased from your vehicle and new key codes will need 
to be re-coded. 
Replacing coded keys can be very costly and you may want to store an 
extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to prevent 
an unforeseen inconvenience. 
The correct coded key must be used for your vehicle. The use of the 
wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no start” condition. 
If an unprogrammed key is used in the ignition it will cause a “no 
start” condition. 
Programming spare keys 
A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only 
SecuriLock keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you 
will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already 
operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily 
accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure. 
If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must 
bring your vehicle to your dealership to have the spare coded key(s) 
programmed. 
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin. 
115
1. Insert the first previously 
programmed coded key into the 
ignition and turn the ignition from 1 
4 
(OFF) to 3 (ON) (maintain ignition 
3 
in 3 (ON) for at least one second, 
5 
but no more than ten seconds). 
2 
2. Turn ignition to 1 (OFF) then 2 
(ACC) and remove the first coded 
key from the ignition. 
1 
3. Within ten seconds of removing 
the first coded key, insert the second previously programmed coded 
key into the ignition and turn the ignition from 1 (OFF) to 3 (ON) 
(maintain ignition in 3 (ON) for at least one second but no more than 
ten seconds). 
4. Turn the ignition to 1 (OFF) then 2 (ACC) and remove the second 
coded key from the ignition. 
5. Within 10 seconds of removing the second coded key, insert the new 
unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition and turn the 
ignition from 1 (OFF) to 3 (ON) (maintain ignition in 3 (ON) for at least 
one second, but no more than ten seconds). This step will program your 
new key to a coded key. 
6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this 
procedure from step 1. 
If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine and the 
theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. 
If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicle’s engine 
and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat steps 1 
through 5. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your dealership to 
have the new spare key(s) programmed. 
Locks and Security 
116
SEATING 
Full bench seat (if equipped) 
• Lift the track release bar to move 
the seat forward or backward. 
Ensure that the seat is relatched 
into place. 
60/40 split bench seat (if equipped) 
• Lift the release bar to move the 
seat forward or backward. Ensure 
the seat is relatched into place. 
• Pull the seatback handle up to 
recline the seat. 
Seating and Safety Restraints 
117
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Captain’s chair (if equipped) 
• Lift the track release bar to move 
the seat forward or rearward. 
Make sure that the seat is 
relatched into place. 
• Pull the seatback handle up to 
recline the seat. 
Memory seats and adjustable pedals (if equipped) 
This system allows automatic 
positioning of the driver seat and 
adjustable pedals to three 
programmable positions. 
The memory seat control is located 
on the driver door. 
• To program position one, move 
the driver seat to the desired 
position using the seat controls. 
Press the SET control. The SET 
control indicator light will briefly illuminate. While the light is 
illuminated, press control 1. 
• To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control 
2. 
• To program position three, repeat the previous procedure but press 
controls 1 and 2 simultaneously. 
118
Seating and Safety Restraints 
A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in 
Park. A memory seat position may be programmed at any time. 
The memory seat positions are also recalled when you press your remote 
entry transmitter UNLOCK control. 
To program the memory seat to remote entry transmitter, refer to 
Remote entry system in the Controls and features chapter. 
Using the manual lumbar support 
Turn the lumbar support control 
toward the front of vehicle to move 
the lumbar support forward for 
more direct support. 
Turn the lumbar support control 
toward the rear of vehicle to move 
the lumbar support back for less 
direct support. 
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped) 
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is 
moving. 
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring 
people in a collision or sudden stop. 
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap 
belt snug and low across the hips. 
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the 
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the 
event of a collision. 
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion. 
119
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Press to raise or lower the front 
portion of the seat cushion. 
Press to raise or lower the rear 
portion of the seat cushion. 
Press the control to move the seat 
forward, backward, up or down. 
Manual seat memory feature 
The manual adjust seat and seatback may lose their memory positions 
and not latch in the desired place. To reset the memory position, move 
the seat to the most forward position then push the seatback rearward 
until the seatback locks. This should ensure that the seatback is 
realigned to the desired rest position. 
120
Heated seats (if equipped) 
To operate the heated seats: 
• Push control to activate. 
• Push again to deactivate. 
Seating and Safety Restraints 
The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated. 
REAR SEATS 
Head restraints 
Your vehicle’s seats are equipped with head restraints which adjust up 
and down. The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head 
motion in the event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head 
restraints, lift the head restraint so that it is located directly behind your 
head or as close to that position as possible. Refer to the following to 
raise and lower the head restraints. 
Push or pull the head restraint to 
the desired position. 
121
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Rear folding seats (if equipped) 
Folding down rear seats into load floor 
Ensure that no objects such as books, purses or briefcases are on the 
floor in front of the second row seats before folding them down and 
insure the seat is fully latched rearward. 
For assistance, refer to the label located on the seat side shield. 
1. Lift strap to release seat cushion. 
2. Lift seat cushion up and rotate 
forward. 
3. The headrest must be removed in 
order to fold the seatback down. 
Remove 2nd row seat headrest by 
pushing in both tabs while pulling 
up on headrest simultaneously. 
122
Seating and Safety Restraints 
4. Stow headrest into the green caps 
found on the top of the seat 
cushion. 
5. Lift the lower seat control and 
flip the seatback down. 
123
Seating and Safety Restraints 
6. For bench seats only, lift up flap 
on seatback to release closeout 
panel. 
7. For bench seats only, rotate panel 
to closeout the space between the 
seatback and the floor. 
Returning the seat to upright 
Insure the seat is pulled back to the locked position, whether the 
seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause 
injury during a sudden stop. 
1. For bench seats, rotate the closeout panel onto the seatback and 
secure with the retaining flap. 
2. Lift the lower seat control. 
3. Pull up on the seatback while 
lifting the handle to lift the seatback 
into the upright position. 
124
Seating and Safety Restraints 
4. Remove headrest from storage position and return to 2nd row 
seatback. Push down headrest completely to secure. 
Reclining the second row seatback 
Locate the release handle located on 
the outboard side of the seat 
cushion and lift gently to allow the 
seatback to be adjusted to the 
desired location. 
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the 
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the 
event of a collision. 
Third row seat (if equipped) 
The third row seat is equipped with combination lap and shoulder belts 
in the outboard seating positions and a manual adjust tongue lap belt in 
the center seating position. For information on the proper operation of 
the safety restraints, refer to Safety Restraints in this chapter. 
The third row seat may be removed from the vehicle for additional cargo 
space. 
Accessing the third row seat 
Your vehicle is equipped with an easy entry second row seat feature 
which allows ready access to the third row seat. You may enter the third 
row seat through either rear side door. 
To reduce the risk of personal injury, the second row seat should 
not be left in the forward, E-Z entry position while the vehicle is 
in motion. Please ensure that the seat is in the upright, fully latched 
rearward position before putting the vehicle in motion. Refer to the 
warning label on the seat side shield. 
125
Seating and Safety Restraints 
1. Rotate the upper seat control 
rearward while pushing the seatback 
toward the front of the vehicle. 
2. Push the seatback toward the 
front of the vehicle. This releases 
the seat track and the seat will 
move forward. 
3. After entering the 3rd row seat, 
pull back the 2nd row seatback until 
it latches at full rearward position. 
This will latch and lock the seatback and the seat track. 
Insure the seat is pulled back to the locked position, whether the 
seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause 
injury during a sudden stop. 
Folding down the third row seat 
Pull the seat release lever located 
on the lower right side of the 
seatback while pushing the seatback 
down into the seat cushion. The 
seatback will latch into place. 
Pull the seat release lever to return 
the seatback into the upright seating 
position. 
Removing the third row seat 
From the rear of the vehicle, with the liftgate window and cargo doors 
open: 
126
Seating and Safety Restraints 
1. Pull the seat release lever located 
on the lower right side of the 
seatback while pushing the seatback 
down onto the seat cushion. 
• The seatback will latch onto the 
cushion. 
2. Lift the seat release bar located 
at the center of the seat near the 
floor to release the floor latches. 
3. While pulling up on the release 
bar, lift the seat up and out of the floor tubs and roll seat rearward. 
4. With assistance, lift the seat out of the vehicle. 
Installing the third row seat 
Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether the seat is 
occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury 
during a sudden stop. 
When reinstalling a rear seat in your vehicle it must be placed in 
its original position. Improper installation of the seat will prevent 
correct use of the safety belts and could increase the risk of injury. 
Refer to the warning label on the seat belt. 
For proper latching, ensure that the 
floor tubs are clear of debris. 
From the rear of the vehicle, with 
the liftgate open: 
1. With assistance, lift the seat into 
the rear of the vehicle. Roll the seat 
forward and guide the front locators 
over the seat locator pins of the 
front floor tubs. 
• When the rear of the seat is 10–13 cm (4–5 in) above the rear pins, 
let the seat drop. This will ensure that the seat will properly latch into 
the floor. 
2. Push up on the seat to verify that it is latched into the floor. 
3. Verify that the safety belts can move freely on either side of the seat. 
127
Seating and Safety Restraints 
SAFETY RESTRAINTS 
Safety restraints precautions 
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap 
belt snug and low across the hips. 
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they 
can be properly restrained. 
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the 
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from 
injury in a collision. 
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always 
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is 
provided. 
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or 
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas 
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to 
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and 
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a 
safety belt properly. 
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely 
to die than a person wearing a safety belt. 
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt 
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that 
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the 
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2) 
Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder. 
3) Never use a single belt for more than one person. 
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back 
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints. 
128
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Combination lap and shoulder belts 
1. Insert the belt tongue into the 
proper buckle (the buckle closest to 
the direction the tongue is coming 
from) until you hear a snap and feel 
it latch. Make sure the tongue is 
securely fastened in the buckle. 
2. To unfasten, push the release 
button and remove the tongue from 
the buckle. 
The front and rear outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are 
combination lap and shoulder belts. The front passenger and rear seat 
outboard safety belts have two types of locking modes described below: 
Vehicle sensitive mode 
The vehicle sensitive mode is the normal retractor mode, allowing free 
shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in 
response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes 
suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of 
approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) or more, the combination safety belts will 
lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers. 
The safety belt system can also be made to lock manually by quickly 
pulling on the shoulder belt. 
Automatic locking mode 
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will 
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. 
The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt. 
129
Seating and Safety Restraints 
When to use the automatic locking mode 
• Any time a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front or 
outboard rear seating position (if equipped). Children 12 years old and 
under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever 
possible. Refer to Safety Restraints for Children or Safety Seats for 
Children later in this chapter. 
How to use the automatic locking mode 
• Buckle the combination lap and 
shoulder belt. 
• Grasp the shoulder portion and 
pull downward until the entire 
belt is extracted. 
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking 
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking 
mode. 
130
Seating and Safety Restraints 
How to disengage the automatic locking mode 
Ford recommends that all safety belt assemblies and attaching 
hardware should be inspected by a qualified technician after any 
collision. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also 
be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is 
noted. 
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract 
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the 
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. 
After any vehicle collision, the seat belt system at all outboard 
seating positions (except driver, which has no “automatic locking 
retractor” feature) must be checked by a qualified technician to verify 
that the “automatic locking retractor” feature for child seats is still 
functioning properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked for 
proper function. 
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if 
the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or 
any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked 
according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. 
Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could 
increase the risk of injury in collisions. 
Energy Management Feature 
• This vehicle has a seat belt system with an energy management 
feature at the front outboard seating position to help further reduce 
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision. 
• The front outboard seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is 
designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is 
designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest. 
131
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Safety belt replacement label 
The short plastic boot on the front 
safety belt at the passenger 
outboard anchor location covers a 
“Replace Belt” label on the safety 
belt. 
In the event of a collision, the 
colored label (REPLACE BELT) 
may become visible. If this occurs, 
the safety belt must be replaced. 
Whenever the yellow 
portion of the label is 
visible, the safety belt must be 
replaced. 
132
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Failure to follow these instructions will affect the performance of 
the safety belts and increase the risk of personal injury. 
Safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) 
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and 
front outboard passenger seating positions. 
The Seat Integrated Restraints (SIR) seat is equipped with a buckle 
pretensioner. Do NOT place objects between the seats, this could 
interfere with the functioning of the pretensioner. 
The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate only during certain 
frontal or near-frontal collisions with sufficient longitudinal deceleration. 
A safety belt pretensioner is a device which tightens the webbing of the 
lap and shoulder belts in such a way that they fit more snugly against 
the body. 
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt system (including 
retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the vehicle 
is involved in a collision that results in the activation of the safety belt 
pretensioners. Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this 
chapter. 
Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under the above 
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of 
a collision. 
Front and second row safety belt height adjustment 
Your vehicle has safety belt height 
adjustments for the driver, front 
passenger and second row outboard 
passengers. Adjust the height of the 
shoulder belt so the belt rests 
across the middle of your shoulder. 
To lower the shoulder belt height, 
push the button down and slide the 
height adjuster down. To raise the 
height of the shoulder belt, slide the 
height adjuster up. Pull down on the 
height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place. 
133
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests 
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety 
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and 
increase the risk of injury in a collision. 
Lap belts 
Adjusting the lap belt 
The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the 
hips, not across the waist. 
• 1st row and 3rd row (if equipped) center seating positions 
The lap belt does not adjust automatically. 
Insert the tongue into the correct 
buckle (the buckle closest to the 
direction the tongue is coming 
from). To lengthen the belt, turn the 
tongue at a right angle to the belt 
and pull across your lap until it 
reaches the buckle. To tighten the 
belt, pull the loose end of the belt 
through the tongue until it fits 
snugly across the hips. 
Shorten and fasten the belt when 
not in use. 
• 2nd row center seating position (if equipped) 
134
Seating and Safety Restraints 
The lap belt will adjust automatically. To fasten, grasp the tongue, and 
with a continuous motion, pull out enough webbing to buckle the tongue 
into the correct buckle. If you did not pull out enough webbing to reach 
the buckle, allow the tongue to retract fully before trying to pull it out 
again. 
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime 
The seat belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a 
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts. 
Conditions of operation 
If... Then... 
The driver’s safety belt is not 
The safety belt warning light 
buckled before the ignition 
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the 
switch is turned to the ON 
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds. 
position... 
The driver’s safety belt is 
buckled while the indicator 
light is illuminated and the 
warning chime is sounding... 
The safety belt warning light and 
warning chime turn off. 
The driver’s safety belt is 
buckled before the ignition 
switch is turned to the ON 
position... 
The safety belt warning light and 
indicator chime remain off. 
BeltMinder 
The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt 
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the 
driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently 
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the 
instrument cluster. 
135
Seating and Safety Restraints 
If... Then... 
The driver’s safety belt is not 
buckled before the vehicle has 
reached at least 5 km/h (3 
mph) and 1-2 minutes have 
elapsed since the ignition 
switch has been turned to 
ON... 
The BeltMinder feature is activated - 
the safety belt warning light 
illuminates and the warning chime 
sounds for 6 seconds every 30 
seconds, repeating for approximately 
5 minutes or until safety belt is 
buckled. 
The driver’s safety belt is 
buckled while the safety belt 
indicator light is illuminated 
and the safety belt warning 
chime is sounding... 
The BeltMinder feature will not 
activate. 
The driver’s safety belt is 
buckled before the ignition 
switch is turned to the ON 
position... 
The BeltMinder feature will not 
activate. 
The purpose of the BeltMinder is to remind occasional wearers to wear 
safety belts all of the time. 
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts: 
(All statistics based on U.S. data) 
Reasons given... Consider... 
“Crashes are rare events” 36 700 crashes occur every day. The 
more we drive, the more we are exposed 
to “rare” events, even for good drivers. 1 
in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a 
crash during our lifetime. 
“I’m not going far” 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles 
of home. 
“Belts are uncomfortable” We design our safety belts to enhance 
comfort. If you are uncomfortable - try 
different positions for the safety belt 
upper anchorage and seatback which 
should be as upright as possible; this can 
improve comfort. 
136
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Reasons given... Consider... 
“I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident. BeltMinder 
reminds us to take a few seconds to 
buckle up. 
“Seat belts don’t work” Safety belts, when used properly, reduce 
risk of death to front seat occupants by 
45% in cars, and by 60% in light 
trucks. 
“Traffic is light” Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in 
single-vehicle crashes, many when no 
other vehicles are around. 
“Belts wrinkle my clothes” Possibly, but a serious crash can do much 
more than wrinkle your clothes, 
particularly if you are unbelted. 
“The people I’m with don’t 
wear belts” 
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 
times more often in vehicles with TWO or 
MORE people. Children and younger 
brothers/sisters imitate behavior they see. 
“I have an air bag” Air bags offer greater protection when 
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags are 
not designed to inflate in rear and side 
crashes or rollovers. 
“I’d rather be thrown 
clear” 
Not a good idea. People who are ejected 
are 40 times more likely to DIE. Safety 
belts help prevent ejection, WE CAN’T 
“PICK OUR CRASH”. 
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt 
Minder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the risk of 
injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt 
Minder feature please follow the directions stated below. 
One time disable 
Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an 
ignition ON cycle, BeltMinder will be disabled for that ignition cycle only. 
137
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature 
Read steps 1 - 9 thoroughly before proceeding with the 
deactivation/activation programming procedure. 
The BeltMinder feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the 
following procedure: 
Before following the procedure, make sure that: 
• The parking brake is set 
• The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission) 
• The ignition switch is in the OFF position 
• All vehicle doors are closed 
• The driver’s safety belt is unbuckled 
• The parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position (If vehicle is equipped 
with Autolamps, this will not affect the procedure.) 
To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt 
Minder feature while driving the vehicle. 
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT 
START THE ENGINE) 
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1–2 
minutes) 
• Steps 3–5 must be completed within 60 seconds or the procedure will 
have to be repeated. 
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the 
safety belt unbuckled. This can be done before or during BeltMinder 
warning activation. 
4. Turn on the parklamps/headlamps, turn off the parklamps/headlamps. 
5. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the 
safety belt unbuckled. 
• After step 5 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three 
seconds. 
6. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off, 
buckle then unbuckle the safety belt. 
• This will disable BeltMinder if it is currently enabled, or enable 
BeltMinder if it is currently disabled. 
7. Confirmation of disabling BeltMinder is provided by flashing the safety 
belt warning light four times per second for three seconds. 
138
Seating and Safety Restraints 
8. Confirmation of enabling BeltMinder is provided by flashing the safety 
belt warning light four times per second for three seconds, followed by 
three seconds with the safety belt warning light off, then followed by 
flashing the safety belt warning light four times per second for three 
seconds again. 
9. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is 
complete. 
Safety belt extension assembly 
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 20 cm (8 
inch) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number 
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost. 
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety 
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on 
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too 
short for you when fully extended. 
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the 
torso. 
Safety belt maintenance 
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work 
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure 
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt 
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle 
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder 
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if 
equipped), child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if equipped), 
LATCH child seat tether anchors and lower anchors (if equipped), and 
attaching hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor 
Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles 
involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor 
and a qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and 
continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety 
belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and 
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. 
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt 
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe 
personal injuries in the event of a collision. 
Refer to Cleaning and maintaining the safety belts in the Cleaning 
chapter. 
139
Seating and Safety Restraints 
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) 
FM1 STST 
O 
DOLBY B NR 
BASSTREB BAL FADE AUTO 
SCAN EJ 
SET 
TAPECD 
VOL - PUSH ON 
SEEK 
TUNE 
DISCS 
AM 
FM 
REW FF SIDE 1-2 COMP SHUFFLE 
12 34 5 6 
18 
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module 
which records information about the air bag and sensor systems. In the 
event of a collision this module may save information related to the 
collision including information about the air bag system and impact 
severity. This information will assist Ford Motor Company in servicing 
the vehicle and in helping to better understand real world collisions and 
further improve the safety of future vehicles. 
Important supplemental restraint system (SRS) precautions 
The supplemental restraint system 
is designed to work with the safety 
belt to help protect the driver and 
right front passenger from certain 
upper body injuries. 
Air bags DO NOT inflate slowly or 
gently and the risk of injury from a 
deploying air bag is greatest close to 
the trim covering the air bag 
module. 
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always 
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is 
provided. 
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back 
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints. 
P 
A/C 
MAX 
A/C 
OFF 
40 
30 
20 
H 
H 10 
0 
50 60 
70 
80 
1 
2 
3 
90 4 
100 
40 
20 
60 
80 100 
120 
140 
160 
MPH 
DIESEL FUEL ONLY 
RPM x 1000 
km/h 
F 
ON 
OFF 
RES 
SET 
ACCEL 
COAST 
4X4 
2WD HIGH 
4X4 
LOW 
OFF 
140
Seating and Safety Restraints 
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) 
recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) 
between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag module. 
Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air 
bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. 
Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the air bag: 
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the 
pedals comfortably. 
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright 
position. 
Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing 
objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those 
objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing 
serious injury. 
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag 
supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or 
Lincoln Mercury dealer. 
The front passenger air bag is not designed to offer protection to 
an occupant in the center front seating position. 
Modifications to the front end of the vehicle, including frame, 
bumper, front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the 
performance of the air bag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Do not 
modify the front end of the vehicle. 
Additional equipment may affect the performance of the air bag 
sensors increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to the Body 
Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate installation 
of additional equipment. 
141
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Children and air bags 
For additional important safety 
information, read all information on 
safety restraints in this guide. 
Children must always be properly 
restrained. Accident statistics 
suggest that children are safer when 
properly restrained in the rear 
seating positions than in the front 
seating position. Failure to follow 
these instructions may increase the 
risk of injury in a collision. 
Air bags can kill or injure a 
child in a child seat. 
NEVER place a rear-facing child 
seat in front of an active air bag. If 
you must use a forward-facing 
child seat in the front seat, move 
the seat all the way back. 
How does the air bag supplemental restraint system work? 
The air bag SRS is designed to 
activate when the vehicle sustains 
longitudinal deceleration sufficient 
to cause the sensors to close an 
electrical circuit that initiates air 
bag inflation. 
The fact that the air bags did not 
inflate in a collision does not mean 
that something is wrong with the 
system. Rather, it means the forces 
were not of the type sufficient to 
cause activation. Air bags are designed to inflate in frontal and 
near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts unless 
the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration. 
142
Seating and Safety Restraints 
The air bags inflate and deflate 
rapidly upon activation. After air bag 
deployment, it is normal to notice a 
smoke-like, powdery residue or 
smell the burnt propellant. This may 
consist of cornstarch, talcum 
powder (to lubricate the bag) or 
sodium compounds (e.g., baking 
soda) that result from the 
combustion process that inflates the 
air bag. Small amounts of sodium 
hydroxide may be present which 
may irritate the skin and eyes, but 
none of the residue is toxic. 
While the system is designed to help 
reduce serious injuries, contact with 
a deploying air bag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary 
hearing loss. Because air bags must inflate rapidly and with considerable 
force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures, 
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who 
are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time 
of air bag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be 
properly restrained as far away from the air bag module as possible while 
maintaining vehicle control. 
The SRS consists of: 
• driver and passenger air bag modules (which include the inflators and 
air bags) 
• one or more impact and safing sensors 
• a readiness light and tone 
• a diagnostic module 
• and the electrical wiring which connects the components 
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the 
supplemental air bag electrical system warning (including the impact 
sensors), the system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the air 
bag back up power and the air bag ignitors. 
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not 
touch them after inflation. 
143
Seating and Safety Restraints 
If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function 
again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not 
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision. 
Determining if the system is operational 
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to 
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Air bag readiness section 
in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the air bag is 
not required. 
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: 
• The readiness light will either 
flash or stay lit. 
• The readiness light will not 
illuminate immediately after 
ignition is turned on. 
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat 
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired. 
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced at 
your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless serviced, 
the system may not function properly in the event of a collision. 
Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped vehicles (including 
pretensioners) 
For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, see your local 
dealership or qualified technician. Air bags MUST BE disposed of by 
qualified personnel. 
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN 
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety 
restraints for children. Also see Air bag supplemental restraint system 
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags. 
Important child restraint precautions 
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S. 
and Canada. If small children ride in your vehicle (generally children who 
are four years old or younger and who weigh 18 kg [40 lbs] or less), you 
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Check your 
local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the 
safety of children in your vehicle. 
144
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the 
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from 
injury in a collision. 
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or 
child restraint you might use. 
When possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear 
seat of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer 
when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front 
seating positions. 
Children and safety belts 
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. 
Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your 
child safety seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts. 
Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag precautions that 
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle. 
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can 
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or 
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child 
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt 
fit. 
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in 
your vehicle. 
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN 
Child and infant or child safety seats 
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the 
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the 
145
Seating and Safety Restraints 
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the 
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or 
collision. 
When installing a child safety seat: 
• Review and follow the information 
presented in the Air bag 
supplemental restraint system 
(SRS) section in this chapter. 
• Use the correct safety belt buckle 
for that seating position (the 
buckle closest to the direction the 
tongue is coming from). 
• Insert the belt tongue into the 
proper buckle until you hear a 
snap and feel it latch. Make sure 
the tongue is securely fastened in 
the buckle. 
• Keep the buckle release button 
pointing up and away from the 
safety seat, with the tongue 
between the child seat and the 
release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling. 
• Place seat back in upright position. 
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic 
locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating 
positions) (if equipped) section in this chapter. 
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether 
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position which is capable 
of providing a tether anchorage. For more information on top tether 
straps, refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps. in this 
chapter. 
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included 
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install 
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden 
stop or collision. 
146
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Installing child safety seats in combination lap and shoulder belt 
seating positions 
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a 
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must 
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the 
way back. 
1. Position the child safety seat in a 
seat with a combination lap and 
shoulder belt. 
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear 
seat whenever possible. 
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt 
and then grasp the shoulder belt 
and lap belt together. 
147
Seating and Safety Restraints 
3. While holding the shoulder and 
lap belt portions together, route the 
tongue through the child seat 
according to the child seat 
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure 
the belt webbing is not twisted. 
4. Insert the belt tongue into the 
proper buckle (the buckle closest to 
the direction the tongue is coming 
from) for that seating position until 
you hear a snap and feel the latch 
engage. Make sure the tongue is 
latched securely by pulling on it. 
5. To put the retractor in the 
automatic locking mode, grasp the 
shoulder portion of the belt and pull 
downward until all of the belt is 
pulled out and a click is heard. 
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it 
is in the automatic locking mode. 
148
Seating and Safety Restraints 
7. Pull the lap belt portion across 
the child seat toward the buckle and 
pull up on the shoulder belt while 
pushing down with your knee on the 
child seat. 
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to 
remove any slack in the belt. 
9. Before placing the child in the 
seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward 
and back to make sure the seat is 
securely held in place. To check 
this, grab the seat at the belt path 
and attempt to move it side to side 
and forward and back. There should 
be no more than one inch of 
movement for proper installation. 
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is 
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt 
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps 
two through nine. 
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use. 
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps 
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which 
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether 
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact 
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a 
tether strap. 
The second row seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether 
strap anchors located behind the seats as described below. 
The tether anchors in your vehicle are along the bottom of the seatback 
marked with the tether anchor symbol (shown with title). 
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions 
(shown from top view): 
149
Seating and Safety Restraints 
Attach the tether strap only 
to the appropriate tether 
anchor as shown. The tether strap 
may not work properly if attached 
somewhere other than the correct 
tether anchor. 
1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion. 
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat. 
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under 
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route 
the tether strap over the top of the seatback. 
3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position. 
• Second row 
Note: In the right outboard passenger seating position, use only one 
tether anchor. Do not use both. 
150
• Third row 
Seating and Safety Restraints 
• The anchors are located under 
the seat frame. 
4. Clip the tether strap to the 
anchor as shown. 
If the tether strap is clipped 
incorrectly, the child safety 
seat may not be retained properly 
in the event of a collision. 
5. Refer to the Installing child 
safety seats in combination lap and shoulder belt seating positions 
section of this chapter for further instructions to secure the child safety seat. 
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the 
manufacturer’s instructions. 
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child 
being injured in a collision greatly increases. 
151
STARTING 
Positions of the ignition 
1. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical 
accessories such as the radio to 
operate while the engine is not 
running. 
2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel, 
automatic transmission gearshift 
lever and allows key removal. 
3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all 
accessories without locking the 
steering wheel. This position also allows the automatic transmission shift 
lever to be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal 
being depressed. 
In the OFF position, the automatic transmission shift lever can 
be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal 
depressed. To avoid unwanted movement, always set the parking 
brake. 
4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key 
position when driving. 
5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine 
starts. 
Preparing to start your vehicle 
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This 
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard 
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio 
noise. 
When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator 
before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have 
difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the 
vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter. 
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high 
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk 
of fire or other damage. 
3 
1 
2 
5 
4 
Driving 
152
Driving 
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry 
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine 
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. 
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed 
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door 
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in 
this chapter for more instructions. 
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer 
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell 
exhaust fumes. 
Important safety precautions 
A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute 
(RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the 
engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have 
the vehicle checked. Do not allow the vehicle to idle for more than 10 
minutes at high engine RPM. 
Before starting the vehicle: 
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For 
more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the 
Seating and safety restraints chapter. 
2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off. 
3. Make sure the parking brake is 
set. 
4. Make sure the gearshift is in P 
(Park). 
153
5. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without 
turning the key to 5 (START). 
4 
If there is difficulty in turning the 
3 
key, firmly rotate the steering wheel 
left and right until the key turns 
freely. This condition may occur 
2 
when: 
• front wheels are turned 
1 
• front wheel is against the curb 
• steering wheel is turned when getting in or out of the vehicle 
5 
Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a 
light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced. 
• If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the light may not illuminate. 
Starting the engine 
Note: Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the 
engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter. 
1. Turn the key to 5 (START) 
without pressing the accelerator 
pedal and release as soon as the 
4 
engine starts. The key will return to 
3 
4 (ON). 
5 
2. If the temperature is above –12° 
2 
C (10° F) and the engine does not 
start within five seconds on the first 
try, turn the key to OFF, wait 10 
1 
seconds and try again. 
Driving 
154
Driving 
3. If the temperature is below -12° C (10° F) and the engine does not 
start in 15 seconds on the first try, turn the key OFF and wait 10 
seconds and try again. If the engine does not start in two attempts, press 
the accelerator pedal all the way to floor and hold. Turn the key to 
START position. 
4. When the engine starts, release the key, then release the accelerator 
pedal gradually as the engine speeds up. 
5. After idling for a few seconds, apply the brake, shift into gear and 
drive. 
Using the engine block heater (if equipped) 
An engine block heater warms the 
engine coolant, which improves 
starting, warms up the engine faster 
and allows the heater-defroster 
system to respond quickly. Use of an 
engine block heater is strongly 
recommended if you live in a region 
where temperatures reach -23°C 
(-10°F) or below. 
For best results, plug the heater in 
at least three hours before starting the vehicle. Using the heater for 
longer than three hours will not harm the engine, so the heater can be 
plugged in the night before starting the vehicle. 
To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater with 
ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater) 
adapters. 
Guarding against exhaust fumes 
Although odorless and colorless, carbon monoxide is present in exhaust 
fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects. 
If you ever smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, 
have your dealer inspect and fix your vehicle immediately. Do 
not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. These fumes are harmful and 
could kill you. 
155
Driving 
Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checked whenever: 
• the vehicle is raised for service. 
• the sound of the exhaust system changes. 
• the vehicle has been damaged in a collision. 
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and 
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to 
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other 
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and 
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known 
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other 
reproductive harm. 
Important ventilating information 
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped in an open area for 
long periods of time, open the windows at least 2.5 cm (one inch). 
Adjust the heating or air conditioning (if equipped) to bring in fresh air. 
Improve vehicle ventilation by keeping all air inlet vents clear of snow, 
leaves and other debris. 
BRAKES 
Your service brakes are self-adjusting. Refer to the scheduled 
maintenance guide for scheduled maintenance. 
Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate a 
performance concern with the vehicle’s brake system. In normal 
operation, automotive brake systems may emit occasional or intermittent 
squeal or groan noises when the brakes are applied. Such noises are 
usually heard during the first few brake applications in the morning; 
however, they may be heard at any time while braking and can be 
aggravated by environmental conditions such as cold, heat, moisture, 
road dust, salt or mud. If a “metal-to-metal,” “continuous grinding” or 
“continuous squeal” sound is present while braking, the brake linings 
may be worn-out and should be inspected by a qualified service 
technician. 
If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. 
Do not apply your brakes continuously, as they may overheat 
and become less effective. 
156
Driving 
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 
This vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). A noise 
from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may be 
observed during ABS braking events. Pedal pulsation coupled with noise 
while braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel, bumps, wet or 
snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle’s 
anti-lock brake system. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder 
in the steering wheel while braking, the vehicle should be inspected by a 
qualified service technician. 
The ABS operates by detecting the 
onset of wheel lockup during brake 
applications and compensates for 
this tendency. The wheels are 
prevented from locking even when 
the brakes are firmly applied. The 
accompanying illustration depicts 
the advantage of an ABS equipped 
vehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABS 
equipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with loss of front braking 
traction. 
Using ABS 
• In an emergency or when maximum efficiency from the four-wheel 
ABS is required, apply continuous force on the brake. The four wheel 
ABS will be activated immediately, thus allowing you to retain full 
steering control of your vehicle and, providing there is sufficient 
space, will enable you to avoid obstacles and bring the vehicle to a 
controlled stop. 
• The anti-lock system does not reduce stopping distance. Always leave 
enough room between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to 
stop. 
• We recommend that you familiarize yourself with this braking 
technique. However, avoid taking any unnecessary risks. 
ABS warning lamp ABS 
The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates 
when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the light does not 
illuminate momentarily at start up, remains on or continues to flash, the 
ABS needs to be serviced. 
157
Driving 
With the ABS light on, the anti-lock 
brake system is disabled and normal 
braking is still effective unless the 
brake warning light also remains 
illuminated with parking brake released. (If your brake warning lamp 
illuminates, have your vehicle serviced immediately.) 
Parking brake 
Apply the parking brake whenever 
the vehicle is parked. To set the 
parking brake, press the parking 
brake pedal down until the pedal 
stops. 
The BRAKE warning lamp in the 
instrument cluster illuminates and 
remains illuminated (when the 
ignition is turned ON) until the 
parking brake is released. 
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the 
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic 
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission). 
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle. 
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop 
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the 
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the 
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected. 
158
Pull the release lever to release the 
brake. Driving with the parking 
brake on will cause the brakes to 
wear out quickly and reduce fuel 
economy. 
PULL 
Driving 
STEERING YOUR VEHICLE 
Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses energy 
from the engine to help steer the vehicle. 
Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left 
position for more than a few seconds when the engine is running. This 
action could damage the power steering pump. 
If the amount of effort needed to steer your vehicle changes at a 
constant vehicle speed, have the power steering system checked. If the 
power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you 
can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort. 
After any severe impact such as striking large potholes, sliding into curbs 
on icy roads or a collision involving the front end, have the front 
suspension and steering checked for possible damage. 
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED) 
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when 
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the 
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. 
Extended use of other than the manufacturer’s specified size tires on a 
Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in 
effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving 
and should not be noticeable to the driver. 
To reduce the risk of injury, never run the engine with one wheel 
off the ground, such as when changing a tire. 
159
Driving 
PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE 
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than 
other types of vehicles. 
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely 
to die than a person wearing a seat belt. 
Your vehicle has special design and equipment features to make it 
capable of performing in a wide variety of circumstances. These special 
design features, such as larger tires and increased ground clearance, give 
the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car. 
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and 
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a 
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not 
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more 
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under 
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt 
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in 
an increased risk of vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. 
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle 
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as 
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when 
driving a heavily loaded vehicle. 
Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most 
passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load, 
hauling people and cargo may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle. 
Use extra caution while becoming familiar with your vehicle. Know the 
capabilities and limitations of both you as a driver and your vehicle. 
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION 
Brake-shift interlock 
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents 
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is 
in the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed. 
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in 
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed: 
160
Driving 
1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the 
key. 
2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the brake pedal and shift 
to N (Neutral). 
In the OFF position, the automatic transmission shift lever can 
be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal 
depressed. To avoid unwanted movement, always set the parking 
brake. 
3. Start the vehicle. 
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever, 
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not 
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside 
emergencies chapter. 
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps 
are working. 
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by 
shifting from forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a 
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. 
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes. The 
transmission and tires may be damaged or the engine may 
overheat. 
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is 
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and 
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. 
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp 
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. 
See your dealer or a qualified service technician. 
Driving with a 4–speed automatic transmission 
Understanding gearshift positions 
To put your vehicle in gear, start the engine, depress the brake pedal, 
then move gearshift lever out of P (Park). 
161
Driving 
Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift lever 
from P (Park) to another position. If you do not hold the brake 
pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone. 
P (Park) 
Always come to a complete stop 
before shifting into P (Park). Make 
sure the gearshift lever is securely 
latched in P (Park). This position 
locks the transmission and prevents 
the rear wheels from turning. 
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift 
lever is latched in P (Park). Turn off the ignition whenever you 
leave your vehicle. 
R (Reverse) 
With the gearshift lever in R 
(Reverse), the vehicle will move 
backward. Always come to a 
complete stop before shifting into 
and out of R (Reverse). 
N (Neutral) 
With the gearshift lever in N 
(Neutral), the vehicle can be started 
and is free to roll. Hold the brake 
pedal down while in this gear. 
(Overdrive) 
The normal driving position for the 
best fuel economy. Transmission 
operates in gears one through four. 
162
(Overdrive) can be deactivated 
Driving 
by pressing the transmission control 
OVERDRIVE OFF 
switch (TCS) on the end of the 
gearshift lever. 
The transmission control indicator 
light (TCIL) (the word OFF) on the 
end of the gearshift lever will 
illuminate. 
Drive – Not shown on the display. Activate by pressing the transmission 
control switch (TCS) on the end of the gearshift lever with the gearshift 
in the position. The TCIL (the word OFF) will illuminate on the 
gearshift lever. Transmission operates in gears one through three. 
(Drive) provides more engine braking than (Overdrive) and is useful 
when: 
• driving with a heavy load. 
• towing a trailer up or down steep hills. 
• additional engine downhill braking is desired. If towing a trailer, refer 
to Driving while you tow in the Trailer towing section. 
OVERDRIVE 
To return to (Overdrive) mode, press the transmission control switch 
(TCS). The TCIL (the word OFF) will no longer be illuminated. 
Each time the vehicle is started, the transmission will automatically 
return to normal overdrive mode. 
Every time the vehicle is shut off and restarted, you must press the 
transmission control switch to cancel overdrive operation if driving in 
overdrive is not desired. 
2 (Second) 
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on 
slippery roads or to provide 
additional engine braking on 
downgrades. 
1 (First) 
Use 1 (Low) to provide maximum 
engine braking on steep 
downgrades. Upshifts can be made 
by shifting to 2 (Second) or to 
163
Driving 
(Overdrive). Selecting 1 (Low) at higher speeds causes the transmission 
to shift to a lower gear, and will shift to 1 (Low) after vehicle decelerates 
to the proper speed. 
Forced Downshifts 
To gain acceleration in (Overdrive) or Drive (O/D OFF) when 
passing another vehicle, push the accelerator to the floor. The 
transmission will downshift to the appropriate gear: third, second or first 
gear. 
Shift strategy (4R100 automatic transmission) 
To account for customer driving habits and conditions, your 4R100 
automatic transmission electronically controls the shift quality by using 
an adaptive learning strategy. The adaptive learning strategy is 
maintained by power from the battery. When the battery is disconnected 
or a new battery is installed, the transmission must relearn its adaptive 
strategy. Optimal shifting will resume within a few hundred kilometers 
(miles) of operation. 
If the shift quality does not improve within a few hundred 
kilometers (miles) of operation, or if the downshifts and other 
throttle conditions do not function normally, see your dealer or a 
qualified service technician as soon as possible. 
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) 
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of 
obstacles near the rear bumper when R (Reverse) is selected. The RSS 
will assist the driver in detecting certain objects while: 
• the vehicle is moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 5 km/h 
(3 mph) or less. 
• the vehicle is in R (Reverse) but not moving backward (the brake 
pedal is depressed or the parking brake is applied), and a moving 
object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of 5 km/h (3 
mph) or less. 
• the vehicle is moving in reverse at a speed of less than 5 km/h (3 
mph) and a moving object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a 
speed of less than 5 km/h (3 mph) 
The RSS is not effective at speeds greater than 5 km/h (3 mph) and may 
not detect certain angular or moving objects. 
164
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the 
limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this 
section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and 
fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking 
speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS; 
this may include reduced performance or a false activation. 
To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in R 
(Reverse) and when using the RSS. 
This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or 
moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to 
assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging 
the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly 
those close to the ground. 
The RSS detects obstacles within 
approximately 1.8 meters (5.9 ft.) of 
the rear bumper with a decreased 
coverage area at the outer corners 
of the bumper, (refer to the figures 
for approximate zone coverage 
areas). As you move closer to the 
obstacle, the rate of the tone 
increases. When the distance to the 
obstacle is less than 25.0 cm (10 
in.), the tone will sound 
continuously. If the system detects a 
stationary or receding object further 
than 25.0 cm (10 in.) from the side 
of the vehicle, the tone will sound 
for only three seconds. Once the 
system detects an object 
approaching, the tone will sound 
again. 
Driving 
165
The RSS is automatically enabled 
when the gear selector is placed in 
R (Reverse) and the ignition is ON. 
The RSS control allows the driver to 
disable the RSS only when the 
ignition is ON, and the gear selector is in R (Reverse). 
The OFF indicator remains illuminated when the system is disabled. The 
system defaults to ON every time R (Reverse) is selected. Press the 
control to disable or enable the system. 
The indicator will remain illuminated to indicate a failure of the RSS. 
Always keep the sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free 
from dirt, snow and ice (do not clean the sensors with sharp 
objects). These elements may cause the system to operate 
inaccurately. 
If the vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving 
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing 
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms. 
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) 
For important information regarding safe operation of this type 
of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter. 
When four–wheel drive (4WD) is engaged, power is supplied to all four 
wheels through a transfer case. 4WD can be selected when additional 
driving power is desired. 
4WD operation is not recommended on dry pavement. Doing so could 
result in difficult disengagement of the transfer case, increased tire wear 
and decreased fuel economy. 
Electronic shift on the fly (ESOF) 4x4 system (if equipped) 
If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and 4WD Low 
is selected while the vehicle is moving, the 4WD system will not 
engage. This is normal and should be no reason for concern. 
Before 4WD Low can be engaged, the vehicle must be brought to 
a complete stop, the brake pedal depressed and the transmission 
placed in N (Neutral). 
The 4WD system: 
• provides 4x4 High engagement and disengagement while the vehicle is 
moving. 
OFF 
Driving 
166
• Driving 
is operated by a rotary control located on the instrument panel that 
allows you select 2WD, 4x4 High or 4x4 Low operation. 
• uses auto-manual hub locks that can be engaged and disengaged 
automatically based on the 4x4 mode selected. 
• auto-manual hub locks can be 
manually overridden by rotating 
the hub lock control from AUTO 
to LOCK if desired. 
• automatic operation of the 
hub locks is recommended, and 
will increase fuel economy 
• For proper operation, make 
sure that the arrow and the 
indicator dot on the hub are 
aligned, and that both hub 
locks are set the same (both 
set to AUTO or both set to 
LOCK). 
4WD system indicator lights 
The 4WD system indicator lights illuminate only under the following 
conditions. If these lights illuminate when driving in 2WD, contact your 
Ford dealer as soon as possible. 
• 4x4- momentarily illuminates 
after the engine is started. 
Illuminates when 4H (4x4 High) 
or 4L (4x4 Low) is engaged. 
• LOW RANGE– momentarily 
4x4 
LOW 
RANGE 
illuminates when the ignition is 
turned to the ON position. 
Illuminates when 4L (4x4 Low) is 
engaged. 
Using the electronic shift 4WD system (if equipped) 
Positions of the electronic shift system 
To prevent damage, the electronic shift 4WD system is designed 
to allow up to 45 seconds before a shift command is performed. 
In the event that conflicting shift commands are selected, allow 
up to 45 seconds for the shift command to be performed prior to 
reporting any shift concerns to your dealer. 
167
Driving 
2H (2WD High) – For general on-road driving. Sends power to the rear 
wheels only. 
4H (4WD High) – For winter and off-road conditions. Sends power to 
front and rear wheels. 
4L (4WD Low)– For low-speed off-road cond applications that require 
extra power such as steep grades, deep sand or pulling a boat out of the 
water. Sends power to front and rear wheels. 
Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4WD system shifts or engages. 
This is normal. 
Shifting from 2WD (2WD High) to 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) 
Rotate the 4WD control to the 4x4 
HIGH position at speeds up to 88 
4X4 
km/h (55 mph). 
4X4 
2WD HIGH 
LOW 
• To prevent damage, the 
electronic shift 4WD system is 
designed to engage 4x4 HIGH 
(4WD High) when the vehicle 
is moving. If shifted to 4x4 
HIGH (4WD HIGH) while at 
complete stop, 4x4 may not 
engage and the 4x4 indicator 
may not illuminate until the vehicle is driven above 8 km/h (5 
mph). 
Do not shift into 4x4 HIGH with the rear wheels slipping. 
Shifting from 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) to 2WD (2WD High) 
Rotate the 4WD control to 2WD at 
any forward speed. Disengagement 
4X4 
HIGH 
4X4 
of the transfer case and front hubs 
2WD LOW 
may be delayed due to torque bind 
which is caused by driving on dry 
hard surfaces or performing tight 
turns while using the 4WD system. 
• You do not need to operate the vehicle in R (Reverse) to disengage 
your front hubs, but it will eliminate any torque bind and allow the 
system to immediately disengage. 
168
Shifting from 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) to 4x4 LOW (4WD Low) 
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 
2. Depress the brake. 
3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral). 
4. Move the 4WD control to the 4x4 
LOW position. 
4X4 
4X4 
5. Hold the shift conditions until the 
2WD 
HIGH 
LOW 
LOW RANGE indicator light 
illuminates. 
6. If the LOW RANGE indicator light 
does not illuminate within 15 
seconds, drive the vehicle above 8 
km/h (5 mph), then repeat steps 1 
through 5 before reporting any shift 
concerns to your dealer. 
Shifting from 4x4 LOW (4WD Low) to 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) or 2WD 
(2WD High) 
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 
2. Depress the brake. 
3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral). 
4. Move the 4WD control to the 4x4 
HIGH (4WD High) or 2WD (2WD 
4X4 
High) position. 
2WD 
HIGH 
4X4 
LOW 
5. Hold the shift conditions until the 
LOW RANGE indicator light shuts 
off. 
6. If the LOW RANGE indicator light 
does not shut off within 15 
seconds, drive the vehicle above 8 
km/h (5 mph), then repeat steps 1 
through 5 before reporting any shift concerns to your dealer. 
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles 
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and 
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat 
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road. 
Driving 
169
Driving 
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles 
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your 
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without 
getting hung up or damaging underbody components. 
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle 
differently than an ordinary passenger car. 
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain. 
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel 
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not 
grip the spokes. 
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as 
rocks and stumps. 
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before 
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain 
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four 
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning. 
Basic operating principles 
• Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce 
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components. 
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces. 
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering 
characteristics of your vehicle. 
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by 
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice. 
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement 
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but 
avoid severe brake application, Ease the vehicle back onto the 
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering 
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface. 
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow 
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose 
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too 
sharply or abruptly. 
• It often may be less risky to strike small inanimate objects, such as 
highway reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than 
attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the 
vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your 
safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern. 
170
Driving 
If your vehicle gets stuck 
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by 
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a 
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. 
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating 
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. 
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage 
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may 
overheat. 
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is 
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and 
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. 
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp 
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. 
See your dealer or a qualified service technician. 
Do not spin the wheels at over 56 km/h (35 mph). The tires may 
fail and injure a passenger or bystander. 
Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument cluster 
chapter for transmission fluid temperature information. 
Emergency maneuvers 
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn 
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e., 
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid 
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control, 
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or 
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are 
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking. Use all 
available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of 
travel. 
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not 
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements. 
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from 
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle 
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again, 
avoid these abrupt inputs. 
171
Driving 
Parking 
On some 4WD vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral) 
position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of 
the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic 
transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not 
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in N (Neutral) 
position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition 
when leaving the vehicle. 
4WD Systems 
4WD (when you select a 4WD mode), uses all four wheels to power the 
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and 
road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle can’t. 
Power is supplied to all four wheels 
through a transfer case. On 4WD 
vehicles, the transfer case allows 
you to select 4WD when necessary. 
Information on transfer case 
operation and shifting procedures 
can be found in the Driving 
chapter. Information on transfer 
case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and specifications 
chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information 
before you operate your vehicle. 
Normal characteristics 
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4x4 while 
the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting 
sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the 
automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern. 
Sand 
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid 
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower 
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly 
and avoid spinning the wheels. 
If you must reduce the tire pressure for whatever reason in sand, make 
sure you re-inflate the tires as soon as possible. 
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you 
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may 
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back 
out the way you came if you proceed with caution. 
172
Driving 
Mud and water 
If you must drive through high 
water, drive slowly. Traction or 
brake capability may be limited. 
When driving through water, 
determine the depth; avoid water 
higher than the bottom of the hubs 
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If 
the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall. 
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the 
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving 
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. 
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you 
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As 
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid 
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of 
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle. 
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water, 
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary. 
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission. 
Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument cluster 
chapter for transmission fluid temperature information. 
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should 
be replaced. 
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts 
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an 
imbalance that could damage drive components. 
“Tread Lightly” is an educational 
program designed to increase public 
awareness of land-use regulations 
and responsibilities in our nations 
wilderness areas. Ford Motor 
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land 
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and 
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.” 
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain 
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up 
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up 
173
Driving 
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep 
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and 
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand 
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without 
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse 
over a hill without the aid of an observer. 
When climbing a steep slope or hill, 
start in a lower gear rather than 
downshifting to a lower gear from a 
higher gear once the ascent has 
started. This reduces strain on the 
engine and the possibility of stalling. 
If you do stall out, do not try to 
turn around because you might roll 
over. It is better to back down to a 
safe location. 
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much 
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of 
vehicle control. 
Descend a hill in the same gear you 
would use to climb up the hill to 
avoid excessive brake application 
and brake overheating. Do not 
descend in neutral, disengage 
overdrive or manually shift to a 
lower gear. When descending a 
steep hill, avoid sudden hard 
braking as you could lose control. 
When you brake hard, the front 
wheels can’t turn and if they aren’t 
turning, you won’t be able to steer. 
The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle. Rapid 
pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle and still 
maintain steering control. 
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not 
“pump” the brakes. 
Driving on snow and ice 
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but 
can skid like any other vehicle. 
174
Driving 
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the 
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control. 
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on 
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting 
from a full stop. 
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate 
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any 
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do 
not become overconfident as to road conditions. 
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles 
for stopping as well as drive slower than usual and consider using one of 
the lower gears. In emergency stopping situations, avoid locking of the 
wheels. Use a “squeeze” technique, push on the brake pedal with a 
steadily increasing force which allows the wheels to brake yet continue 
to roll so that you may steer in the direction you want to travel. If you 
lock the wheels, release the brake pedal and repeat the squeeze 
technique. If your vehicle is equipped with a Four Wheel Anti-Lock 
Brake System (ABS), apply the brake steadily. Do not “pump” the 
brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional 
information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system. 
Never drive with chains on the front tires of 4WD vehicles without also 
putting them on the rear tires. This could cause the rear to slide and 
swing around during braking. 
Tires, Replacement Requirements 
Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel other than that 
originally provided by Ford Motor Company because it can affect 
the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to loss of 
vehicle control or roll over and serious injury. 
Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the same size, type, 
tread design, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you have questions 
regarding tire replacement, see an authorized Ford or Lincoln/Mercury 
dealer. 
If you nevertheless decide to equip your 4WD for off-road use with tires 
larger than what Ford Motor Company recommends, you should not use 
these tires for highway driving. 
If you use any tire/wheel combination not recommended by Ford Motor 
Company, it may adversely affect vehicle handling and could cause 
steering, suspension, axle or transfer case failure. 
175
Driving 
Do not use”aftermarket lift kits” or other suspension modifications, 
whether or not they are used with larger tires and wheels. 
These “aftermarket lift kits” could adversely affect the vehicle’s handling 
characteristics, which could lead to loss of vehicle control or roll over 
and serious injury. 
Tires can be damaged during off-road use. For your safety, tires that are 
damaged should not be used for highway driving because they are more 
likely to blow out or fail. 
You should carefully observe the recommended tire inflation pressure 
found on the safety compliance certification label attached to the left 
front door lock facing or door latch post pillar. Failure to follow tire 
pressure recommendations can adversely affect the way your vehicle 
handles. Do not exceed the Ford Motor Company recommended pressure 
even if it is less than the maximum pressure allowed for the tire. 
Each day before you drive, check 
your tires. If one looks lower than 
the others, use a tire gauge to check 
pressure of all tires, and adjust if 
required. Check tire pressure with a 
tire gauge every few weeks 
(including spare). Safe operation 
requires tires that are neither 
underinflated nor overloaded. 
Periodically inspect the tire treads and remove stones, nails, glass or 
other objects that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check for holes 
or cuts that may permit air leakage from the tire and make necessary 
repairs. 
Inspect the tire side walls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If internal 
damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected 
in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. 
Maintenance and Modifications 
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed 
and tested to provide both reasonably safe, predictable performance 
whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability. For this 
reason, Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make 
modifications such as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or 
stabilizer bars) or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the 
original factory equipment. 
176
Driving 
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make 
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control. 
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle 
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box 
cover). 
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase 
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities 
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of 
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to 
heavy off-road usage. 
DRIVING THROUGH WATER 
Do not drive quickly through standing water, especially if the depth is 
unknown. Traction or brake capability may be limited and if the ignition 
system gets wet, your engine may stall. Water may also enter your 
engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine. 
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very 
slowly. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the 
hubs (for trucks) or the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars). 
Once through the water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the 
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving 
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. 
Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is 
submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause 
internal transmission damage. Have the fluid checked and, if 
water is found, replace the fluid. 
VEHICLE LOADING 
Before loading a vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms: 
• Base Curb Weight: Weight of the vehicle including any standard 
equipment, fluids, lubricants, etc. It does not include occupants or 
aftermarket equipment. 
• Payload: Combined maximum allowable weight of cargo, occupants 
and optional equipment. The payload equals the gross vehicle weight 
rating minus base curb weight. 
• GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): Base curb weight plus payload 
weight. The GVW is not a limit or a specification. 
• GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): Maximum permissible total 
weight of the base vehicle, occupants, optional equipment and cargo. 
The GVWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the Safety 
Certification Label on the driver’s door pillar. 
177
Driving 
• GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): Carrying capacity for each axle 
system. The GAWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the 
Safety Certification Label on the driver’s door pillar. 
• GCW (Gross Combined Weight): The combined weight of the 
towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo) and the loaded trailer. 
• GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating): Maximum permissible 
combined weight of towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo) 
and the loaded trailer 
• Maximum Trailer Weight Rating: Maximum weight of a trailer the 
vehicle is permitted to tow. The maximum trailer weight rating is 
determined by subtracting the vehicle curb weight for each 
engine/transmission combination, any required option weight for trailer 
towing and the weight of the driver from the GCWR for the towing 
vehicle. 
• Maximum Trailer Weight: Maximum weight of a trailer the loaded 
vehicle (including occupants and cargo) is permitted to tow. It is 
determined by subtracting the weight of the loaded trailer towing 
vehicle from the GCWR for the towing vehicle. 
• Trailer Weight Range: Specified weight range that the trailer must 
fall within that ranges from zero to the maximum trailer weight rating. 
Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded trailer when 
figuring the total weight. 
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the 
certification label. 
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the 
originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR 
limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do 
not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations. 
The Safety Certification Label, found on the driver’s door pillar, lists 
several important vehicle weight rating limitations. Before adding any 
additional equipment, refer to these limitations. If you are adding weight 
to the front of your vehicle, (potentially including weight added to the 
cab), the weight added should not exceed the front axle reserve capacity 
(FARC). Additional frontal weight may be added to the front axle reserve 
capacity provided you limit your payload in other ways (i.e. restrict the 
number of occupants or amount of cargo carried). 
178
Driving 
Always ensure that the weight of occupants, cargo and equipment being 
carried is within the weight limitations that have been established for 
your vehicle including both gross vehicle weight and front and rear gross 
axle weight rating limits. Under no circumstance should these limitations 
be exceeded. 
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in 
serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury. 
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and 
utility-type vehicles 
For important information regarding safe operation of this type 
of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in 
this chapter. 
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle 
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as 
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when 
driving a heavily loaded vehicle. 
Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most 
passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load, 
hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle. 
Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow 
1. Use the appropriate maximum gross combined weight rating (GCWR) 
chart (in the Trailer Towing section) to find the maximum GCWR for 
your type engine and rear axle ratio. 
2. Weigh your vehicle as you customarily operate the vehicle without 
cargo. To obtain correct weights, try taking your vehicle to a shipping 
company or an inspection station for trucks. 
3. Subtract your loaded vehicle weight from the maximum GCWR on the 
following charts. This is the maximum trailer weight your vehicle can tow 
and must fall below the maximum shown under maximum trailer weight 
on the chart. 
179
Driving 
TRAILER TOWING 
Your vehicle may tow a 
Conventional/Class IV trailer 
provided the maximum trailer 
weight is less than or equal to the 
maximum trailer weight listed for 
your engine and rear axle ratio on 
the following charts. 
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so 
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle. 
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine, 
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these 
components carefully after any towing operation. The following trailer 
towing charts apply to vehicles equipped with gasoline engines; for 
Diesel engines, refer to the 7.3 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection 
Turbo Diesel Supplement. 
The hitch receiver was designed not to be removed. Any 
modification or removal of the hitch receiver compromises the 
safety benefit it was designed to provide. 
4x2 w/automatic transmission 
Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum 
GCWR-kg (lbs.) 
Maximum 
trailer 
weight-kg (lbs.) 
5.4L 3.73 5897 (13000) 2812 (6200) 
5.4L 4.10 6350 (14500) 3266 (7200) 
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4536 (10000) 
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 4763 (10500) 
180
4x4 w/automatic transmission 
Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum 
GCWR-kg (lbs.) 
Driving 
Maximum 
trailer 
weight-kg (lbs.) 
5.4L 4.10 6350 (14500) 3266 (7200) 
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4354 (9600) 
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 4990 (11000) 
The frame mounted hitch receiver is non-removable. 
Towing a Class IV trailer (extra heavy duty) 2,268–4,536 kg 
(5,001–10,000 lbs.) trailer weight requires a weight-distributing 
or fifth-wheel hitch. 
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the 
certification label. 
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer 
weight could result in engine damage, transmission/axle damage, 
structural damage, loss of control, and personal injury. 
Preparing to tow 
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer, and make sure it is 
properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer 
dealer if you require assistance. 
Load equalizing hitch 
When hooking up a trailer using a load equalizing hitch, always use the 
following procedure: 
1. Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and 
all doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it 
can level. 
2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers 
at the center of the vehicle. 
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that 
the front bumper height is within 0–13 mm (0.5 in) of the reference 
point. After proper adjustment, the rear bumper should be no higher 
than in Step 2. 
181
Driving 
Adjusting an equalizing hitch so the rear bumper of the vehicle 
is higher than it was unloaded will defeat the function of the 
load equalizing hitch and may cause unpredictable handling. 
Safety chains 
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers 
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the 
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners. 
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency 
gives to you. 
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper. 
Trailer brakes 
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are 
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s 
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal 
regulations. 
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your 
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough 
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase. 
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the 
GVWR not GCWR. 
Trailer lamps 
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure your 
trailer lamps conform to local and Federal regulations. See your dealer or 
trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking 
up trailer lamps. 
Using a step bumper (if equipped) 
The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a 
ball with a 25.4 mm (one inch) shank diameter. The bumper has a 2 270 
kg (5 000 lb.) trailer weight and 227 kg (500 lb.) tongue weight capacity. 
If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position, a 
frame-mounted trailer hitch must be installed. 
182
Driving while you tow 
When towing a trailer: 
• Ensure that you turn off your speed control. The speed control may 
shut off automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades. 
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer. 
• To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist 
in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to the 
Driving with a 4–speed automatic transmission section in this 
chapter. 
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually. 
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur. 
Servicing after towing 
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more 
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for 
more information. 
Trailer towing tips 
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to 
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make 
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles. 
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. 
• The trailer tongue weight should be no more than 10–15% of the 
loaded trailer weight. 
• After you have traveled 80 km (50 miles), thoroughly check your 
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts. 
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot 
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park) 
(automatic transmission) or N (Neutral) (manual transmissions). 
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must 
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels. 
Launching or retrieving a boat 
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval, 
• Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of 
the rear bumper. 
• Do not allow waves to break higher than 15 cm (6 inches) above the 
bottom edge of the rear bumper. 
Driving 
183
• Driving 
Disconnect the trailer tow electrical connector to prevent blown fuses 
caused by water entering into your trailer’s electrical wiring. 
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter critical vehicle 
components, adversely affecting driveability, emissions and reliability. 
Replace front and rear axle lubricants any time the axles have been 
submerged in water. Axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked 
unless a leak is suspected. 
RECREATIONAL TOWING (ALL WHEELS ON THE GROUND) 
An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind 
a motorhome. Follow these guidelines if you have the need for 
recreational towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. 
These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not 
damaged. 
2WD vehicles (with automatic transmissions) 
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral) 
• Maximum speed is 56 km (35 mph) 
• Maximum distance is 80 km (50 miles) 
If a distance of 80 km (50 miles) or a speed of 56 km (35 mph) must be 
exceeded, the drive shaft will have to be removed before the vehicle is 
towed. 
Ford recommends the driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified 
technician. See your local dealer for driveshaft removal/installation. 
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause 
transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal 
transmission components. 
4WD vehicles electronic shift transfer case (with automatic 
transmissions) 
4x4 vehicles with electronic shift on the fly cannot be towed with any 
wheels on the ground. 
184
Roadside Emergencies 
GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE 
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor 
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This 
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service 
is available: 
• 24–hours, seven days a week 
• for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or 
60,000 km (36,000 miles), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury 
vehicles, and four years or 80,000 km (50,000 miles) on Lincoln 
vehicles. 
Roadside assistance will cover: 
• changing a flat tire. 
• jump-starts. 
• lock-out assistance. 
• limited fuel delivery. 
• towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford Motor Company 
dealership, or your selling dealer if within 56.3 km (35 miles) of the 
nearest Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per disablement). 
Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in the 
mud or snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound 
towing or repossession). 
Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for 
information on: 
• Coverage period 
• Exact fuel amounts 
• Towing of your disabled vehicle 
• Emergency travel expense reimbursement 
• Travel planning benefits 
USING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE 
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your 
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the 
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment in Ford vehicles and is 
mailed to you if you own a Mercury or Lincoln. In Canada, the card is 
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment. 
185
Roadside Emergencies 
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance, 
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140. 
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 
1–800–665–2006. 
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor 
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement 
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call 
1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140. 
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call 
1–800–665–2006. 
ROADSIDE COVERAGE BEYOND BASIC WARRANTY 
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance 
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting 
your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. 
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you 
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside 
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact 
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca. 
HAZARD FLASHER 
Use only in an emergency to warn traffic of vehicle breakdown, 
approaching danger, etc. The hazard flashers can be operated when the 
ignition is off. 
• The hazard lights control is 
located on top of the steering 
column. 
• Depress hazard lights control to 
activate all hazard flashers 
simultaneously. 
• Depress control again to turn the 
flashers off. 
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH FUEL 
RESET 
The fuel pump shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the electric 
fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt. 
After a collision, if the engine cranks but does not start, the fuel pump 
shut-off switch may have been activated. 
186
The fuel pump shut-off switch is 
located in the passenger’s foot well, 
by the kick panel. 
Roadside Emergencies 
Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut-off switch. 
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 
2. Check the fuel system for leaks. 
3. If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the fuel pump shut-off switch by 
pushing in on the reset button. 
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Pause for a few seconds and 
return the key to the OFF position. 
5. Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system. 
FUSES AND RELAYS 
Fuses 
If electrical components in the 
vehicle are not working, a fuse may 
have blown. Blown fuses are 
identified by a broken wire within 
the fuse. Check the appropriate 
15 
fuses before replacing any electrical 
components. 
187
Roadside Emergencies 
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage 
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire 
damage and could start a fire. 
Standard fuse amperage rating and color 
COLOR 
Fuse 
rating 
Mini 
fuses 
Standard 
fuses 
Maxi 
fuses 
Cartridge 
maxi 
fuses 
Fuse link 
cartridge 
2A Grey Grey — — — 
3A Violet Violet — — — 
4A Pink Pink — — — 
5A Tan Tan — — — 
7.5A Brown Brown — — — 
10A Red Red — — — 
15A Blue Blue — — — 
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue 
25A Natural Natural — — — 
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink 
40A — — Orange Green Green 
50A — — Red Red Red 
60A — — Blue — Yellow 
70A — — Tan — Brown 
80A — — Natural — Black 
Passenger compartment fuse panel / power distribution box 
The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by 
the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. 
188
To remove the fuse panel cover, 
turn the panel fasteners 
counterclockwise. 
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller 
tool provided on the fuse panel 
cover. 
The fuses are coded as follows. 
Roadside Emergencies 
189
Roadside Emergencies 
Fuse/Relay 
Location 
Fuse Amp 
Rating 
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel 
Description 
1 15A* Adjustable pedals 
2 20A* Power point - floor console 
3 20A* Power point – 3rd row 
4 20A* Power point - instrument panel 
5 20A* Power point - right rear quarter 
6 20A* Trailer tow turn/stop relay 
7 30A* High beam headlamps / Flash to pass 
8 — Not used 
9 20A* Heated mirrors 
10 10A* A/C clutch 
11 20A* Radio (main) 
12 20A* Cigar lighter / OBD II 
13 5A* Power mirrors/switches 
14 15A* Daytime running lamps 
15 10A* Driver’s seat module memory 
16 15A* Rear seat controller 
17 15A* Exterior lamps 
18 20A* Turn lamps/Brake on-off switch (high) 
19 10A* Body security module/4x4 module 
20 — Not used 
21 25A* Rear wiper motor 
22 20A* Engine control 
23 20A* Engine control 
24 15A* Air suspension 
25 10A* 4-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System 
(4WABS) module 
26 10A* Airbags 
27 15A* Ignition switch Run feed 
28 10A* EATC module module/Front blower relay 
coil 
29 10A* Customer access 
190
Fuse/Relay 
Location 
Fuse Amp 
Rating 
Roadside Emergencies 
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel 
Description 
30 15A* Highbeam headlamps 
31 15A* Clutch interlock switch 
32 5A* Radio (start) 
33 15A* Front wiper 
34 10A* Brake on-off switch 
35 10A* Instrument cluster 
36 10A* PCM Keep-Alive 
37 15A* Horn 
38 20A* Trailer tow park lamps and backup lamps 
39 — Not used 
40 20A* Fuel pump 
41 10A* Instrument cluster 
42 15A* Delayed accessory 
43 10A* Fog lamps 
44 10A* PATS module, transceiver 
45 10A* Ignition switch Run/ Start feed 
46 10A* Left-hand lowbeam 
47 10A* Right-hand lowbeam 
48 10A* Rear wiper motor 
101 30A** Trailer tow electric brake 
102 30A** Door locks/Body security module 
103 50A** Ignition switch 
104 40A** Heated backlite 
105 30A** Injector driver module 
106 30A** Front wiper main 
107 40A** Front blower motor 
108 40A** Auxiliary blower motor 
109 30A** Heated seats 
110 50A** Ignition switch 
111 30A** 4WD/Shift on the fly 
112 30A** Left-hand power seats 
191
Roadside Emergencies 
Fuse/Relay 
Location 
Fuse Amp 
Rating 
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel 
Description 
113 30A** Starter motor 
114 30A** Right-hand power seats 
115 20A** Trailer tow battery charge 
116 30A** Ignition switch 
601 30A CB Door window motors 
602 60A** 4-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System 
(4WABS) module 
210 — Not used 
211 — Not used 
212 — Not used 
301 — Front blower motor relay 
302 — Powertrain (EEC) relay 
303 — Injector driver module relay (Diesel 
only) 
304 — Heated backlite relay 
305 — Trailer tow battery charge relay 
306 — Delayed accessory relay 
307 — Starter relay 
* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses 
CHANGING THE TIRES 
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily. 
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly 
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. 
The use of tire sealants is not recommended and may compromise the 
integrity of your tires. The use of tire sealants may also affect your tire 
pressure monitoring system (if equipped). 
Spare tire information 
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire that can be used as 
either a spare or a regular tire. The spare tire is not equipped with wheel 
trim. The wheel trim from the original wheel/tire may be used on the 
spare. 
Your vehicle is equipped with 4WD, a spare tire of a different size 
than the road tires should not be used. Such a tire could result in 
damage to driveline components and make the vehicle difficult to 
control. 
192
Location of the spare tire and tools 
The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following 
locations: 
Tool Location 
Spare tire Mounted on the left rear quarter 
panel in the cargo area 
Jack In the right rear cargo area 
stowage bin. 
Jack handle and lug wrench On top of the radiator support in 
the engine compartment 
Tire change procedure 
To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be 
sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions) the 
wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to 
the tire being changed. 
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be 
seriously injured. 
1. Park on a level surface, activate 
hazard flashers and set the parking 
brake. 
Roadside Emergencies 
193
Roadside Emergencies 
2. Turn engine OFF and block the 
diagonally opposite wheel (block not 
provided). 
3. Remove the jack, jack handle, lug 
wrench and spare tire from the 
stowage locations. 
4. Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim. 
5. Loosen each wheel lug nut 
one-half turn counterclockwise but 
do not remove them until the wheel 
is raised off the ground. 
When one of the rear 
wheels is off the ground, 
the transmission alone will not 
prevent the vehicle from moving 
or slipping off the jack, even if the 
transmission is in P (Park) 
(automatic transmission). To 
prevent the vehicle from moving 
when you change the tire, be sure 
that the parking brake is set and 
the diagonally opposite wheel is 
blocked. 
6. Insert the hooked end of the jack 
handle into the jack and use the 
handle to slide the jack under the 
vehicle. 
7. Position the jack according to the 
following guides: 
194
• Front (4x2) 
• Front passenger side (4x4) 
• Front driver side (4x4) 
Make sure the jack fits into the 
notched area on the differential 
housing. 
• Rear 
Roadside Emergencies 
195
Roadside Emergencies 
8. Turn the jack handle clockwise 
until the wheel is completely off the 
ground and high enough to install 
the spare tire. 
To lessen the risk of 
personal injury, do not put 
any part of your body under the 
vehicle while changing a tire. Do 
not start the engine when your 
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is 
only meant for changing the tire. 
• Never use the front or rear differential as a jacking point. 
9. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench. 
10. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is 
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the 
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered. 
11. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 
12. Remove the jack and fully 
1 
tighten the lug nuts in the order 
shown. 
6 7 
13. Stow the the flat tire, jack, jack 
handle and lug wrench. Make sure 
4 3 
the jack is securely fastened so it 
does not rattle when driving. 
14. Unblock the wheels. 
8 5 
Retighten the lug nuts to the 
2 
specified torque at 800 km (500 
miles) after any wheel disturbance 
(rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.). 
Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque* 
Nm Lb-ft 
M14 x 1.5 200-225 150-165 
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and 
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners. 
196
On all two-piece flat wheel nuts, 
apply one drop of motor oil between 
the flat washer and the nut. Do not 
apply motor oil to the wheel nut 
threads or the wheel stud threads. 
When a wheel is installed, 
always remove any 
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials 
present on the mounting surfaces 
of the wheel or the surface of the 
front disc brake hub and rotor 
that contacts the wheel. Installing 
wheels without correct 
metal-to-metal contact at the 
wheel mounting surfaces can 
cause the wheel nuts to loosen 
and the wheel to come off while 
the vehicle is in motion, resulting 
in loss of control. 
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 
Roadside Emergencies 
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames, 
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or 
vehicle damage. 
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes, and 
clothing, if contacted. 
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic 
transmissions do not have push-start capability; also, the 
catalytic converter may become damaged. 
Preparing your vehicle 
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the 
transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission 
may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and 
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the 
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation. 
197
Roadside Emergencies 
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle. 
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could 
damage the vehicle’s electrical system. 
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle 
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on 
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving 
parts. 
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before 
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level. 
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical 
surges. Turn all other accessories off. 
Connecting the jumper cables 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
1. Connect the positive (+) booster cable to the positive (+) terminal of 
the discharged battery. 
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the 
assisting (boosting) battery. 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
198
Roadside Emergencies 
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) 
terminal of the assisting battery. 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the 
assisting battery. 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed 
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the 
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker 
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points. 
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-) 
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an 
explosion of the gases that surround the battery. 
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of 
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts. 
199
Roadside Emergencies 
Jump starting 
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at 
moderately increased speed. 
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. 
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an 
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables. 
Removing the jumper cables 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were 
connected. 
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface. 
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the 
assisting (boosting) battery. 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the 
booster vehicle’s battery. 
200
Roadside Emergencies 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster 
vehicle’s battery. 
+ 
– 
+ 
– 
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the 
disabled vehicle’s battery. 
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables 
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can 
relearn its idle conditions. 
201
Roadside Emergencies 
WRECKER TOWING 
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing 
service or, if you are a member, your roadside assistance center. 
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels 
on the ground and the rear wheels off the ground using a wheel lift or a 
slingbelt with T-hooks. 
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a 
wheel lift or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground. 
However, a slingbelt with T-hooks and a wheel dolly can also be used if 
all four wheels are off the ground. 
202
Roadside Emergencies 
An alternative for towing a 4x4 vehicle is to: 
• put the transfer case in neutral. On manual 4WD systems, put the 
4WD shift lever in N (Neutral); on electronic shift on the fly 4WD 
systems, press the 2WD portion of the 4WD control. 
• unlock the front hub locks (refer to Four wheel drive [4WD] 
Operation [if equipped] in the Driving chapter). 
• lift the rear wheels of the vehicle using a wheel lift or a sling belt with 
T-hooks. 
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle 
damage may occur. 
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow 
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for 
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle. 
203
Customer Assistance 
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED 
At home 
Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada have authorized dealerships to 
service your vehicle. It is preferred that you return to the Ford dealer 
where your vehicle was purchased when warranty repairs are needed. 
However, you may also take your vehicle to another Ford Motor 
Company or Ford of Canada dealership authorized for warranty repairs. 
Certain warranty repairs require special training though, so not all 
dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. That means that 
depending on the warranty repair needed, the vehicle may need to be 
taken to another dealer. If a particular dealership can not assist you, 
then contact the Customer Relationship Center. 
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you 
are receiving, follow these steps: 
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your 
selling/servicing dealership. 
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales 
Manager or Service Manager at the dealership. 
3. If the inquiry or concern cannot be resolved at the dealership level, 
please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center. 
Away from home 
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when 
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership 
could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the 
Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to 
help you. 
In the United States: 
Ford Motor Company 
Customer Relationship Center 
16800 Executive Plaza Drive 
P.O. Box 6248 
Dearborn, Michigan 48121 
1-800-392-3673 (FORD) 
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) 
www.ford.com 
In Canada: 
Customer Relationship Centre 
204
Customer Assistance 
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited 
P.O. Box 2000 
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 
1-800-565-3673 (FORD) 
www.ford.ca 
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle 
needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could 
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford 
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help 
you. 
In the United States: 
Ford Motor Company 
Customer Relationship Center 
16800 Executive Plaza Drive 
P.O. Box 6248 
Dearborn, Michigan 48121 
1-800-521-4140 
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) 
www.ford.com 
In Canada: 
Customer Relationship Centre 
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited 
P.O. Box 2000 
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 
1-800-565-3673 (FORD) 
www.ford.ca 
In order to help you service your Ford or Lincoln Mercury vehicle, please 
have the following information available when contacting a Customer 
Relationship Center: 
• Your telephone number (home and business). 
• The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located. 
• The year and make of your vehicle. 
• The date of vehicle purchase. 
• The current odometer reading. 
• The vehicle identification number (VIN). 
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish 
to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.). 
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing 
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also 
allowed a final repair attempt in some states. 
205
Customer Assistance 
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the 
Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss 
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing 
replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This 
dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state 
created rights or other rights which are independent of the 
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws. 
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN 
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by 
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. Ford ESP 
is an optional service contract which is backed by Ford Motor Company 
or Ford Motor Service Company (in the U.S.) and Ford of Canada (in 
Canada). It provides the following: 
• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you 
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain 
maintenance and wear items). 
• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper 
Warranty expires. 
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln 
Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in 
various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored 
to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement 
benefits for towing and rental coverage. 
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection 
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of 
more than 5,000 participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of 
Canada dealers. 
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the 
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Please contact 
your dealer for further information. Since this information is subject to 
change, please ask your dealer for complete details about Ford Extended 
Service Plan coverage options, or visit the Ford ESP website at 
www.ford-esp.com. 
THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY) 
The Dispute Settlement Board is: 
• an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes. 
• available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company 
vehicles. 
206
Customer Assistance 
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford 
Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify 
procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without 
incurring obligations per applicable state law. 
What kinds of cases does the Board review? 
Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as 
on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light 
trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle 
warranty are eligible for review, except those involving: 
• a non-Ford product 
• a non-Ford dealership 
• sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated 
with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s performance as 
designed 
• a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a 
service or product concern is being reviewed 
• items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including 
maintenance and wear items) 
• alleged personal injury/property damage claims 
• cases currently in litigation 
• vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes 
(except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to 
review commercial vehicles) 
• vehicles with non-U.S. warranties 
Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 
has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility 
is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle. 
Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique 
brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin 
purchasers/lessees. 
Board membership 
The Board consists of: 
• Three consumer representatives 
• A Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative 
Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by 
an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen 
207
Customer Assistance 
from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for 
their business leadership qualities. 
What the Board needs 
To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the 
DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application 
form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return 
receipt requested. 
Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you 
will receive an acknowledgment indicating: 
• The file number assigned to your application. 
• The toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator. 
Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be 
asked to submit statements. 
To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information: 
• Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders 
relevant to the case. 
• The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed 
on your vehicle ownership license. 
• The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s). 
• The current mileage. 
• The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle. 
• A brief description of your unresolved concern. 
• A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor 
Company. 
• The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the 
dealership(s). 
• A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern. 
You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not 
qualify for Board review. 
Oral presentations 
If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question 
6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation 
before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the 
case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation 
may be requested by the Board as well. 
208
Customer Assistance 
Making a decision 
Board members review all available information related to each 
complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial 
decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party. 
Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that 
all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board 
generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to 
consider some cases. 
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a 
form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of 
the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but 
not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to 
them under state or federal law. 
To request a DSB Brochure/Application 
For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call to the 
Board at the following address/phone number: 
Dispute Settlement Board 
P.O. Box 5120 
Southfield, MI 48086–5120 
1–800–428–3718 
You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center 
at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952 
or by writing to the Center at the following address: 
Ford Motor Company 
Customer Relationship Center 
16800 Executive Plaza Drive 
P.O. Box 6248 
Dearborn, Michigan 48121 
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM (CANADA 
ONLY) 
In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and 
the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been 
unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party 
mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor 
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). 
209
Customer Assistance 
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy 
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a 
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is 
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal 
proceedings. 
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct 
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal 
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the 
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve 
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrator’s 
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada. 
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more 
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial 
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685. 
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA 
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the 
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you 
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel. 
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock 
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or 
owner relations/customer relationship office. 
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may 
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause 
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of 
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper 
fuel. 
In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty 
importing your vehicle back into the U.S. 
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in 
Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the 
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call: 
FORD MOTOR COMPANY 
WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS 
1555 Fairlane Drive 
Fairlane Business Park #3 
Allen Park, Michigan 48101 
U.S.A. 
Telephone: (313) 594-4857 
FAX: (313) 390-0804 
210
Customer Assistance 
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford 
dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct 
you to the nearest Ford affiliate office. 
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of 
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and 
new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market 
Operations. 
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE 
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at: 
HELM, INCORPORATED 
P.O. Box 07150 
Detroit, Michigan 48207 
Or call: 
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356 
Helm, incorporated can also be reached by their website: 
www.helminc.com. 
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST 
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card holders only.) 
Obtaining a French owner’s guide 
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to 
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box 
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3. 
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY) 
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer 
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the 
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of 
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the 
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and 
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or 
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer 
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund 
or replacement vehicle. 
211
Customer Assistance 
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer 
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its 
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of 
a new vehicle or the first 29 000 km (18 000 miles), whichever occurs first: 
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity 
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a 
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of 
the vehicle) OR 
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of 
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time) 
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the 
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the 
following address: 
Ford Motor Company 
16800 Executive Plaza Drive 
Mail Drop 3NE-B 
Dearborn, MI 48126 
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY) 
If you believe that your vehicle has 
a defect which could cause a crash 
or could cause injury or death, you 
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company. 
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and 
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a 
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved 
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor 
Company. 
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free 
at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write 
to: 
NHTSA 
U.S. Department of Transportation 
Washington, D.C. 20590 
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from 
the Hotline. 
212
Cleaning 
WASHING THE EXTERIOR 
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral 
Ph shampoo, such as Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is available from your 
dealer. 
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing 
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted 
surfaces. 
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to 
strong, direct sunlight. 
• Always use a clean sponge or carwash mitt with plenty of water for 
best results. 
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to 
eliminate water spotting. 
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the 
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause 
damage to the vehicle. 
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings 
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s 
paintwork and trim over time. 
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a 
car wash. 
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted 
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle, 
wash off as soon as possible. 
WAXING 
Applying a polymer paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will 
assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage. 
• Wash the vehicle first. 
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives. 
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body 
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof 
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl 
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time. 
PAINT CHIPS 
Your dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your vehicle’s color. 
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jam) to 
your dealer to ensure you get the correct color. 
213
• Cleaning 
Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar 
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips. 
• Always read the instructions before using the products. 
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND COVERS 
Aluminum wheel rims or covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish. 
In order to maintain their shine: 
• Clean with Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is available from your dealer. 
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or 
covers. 
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your 
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning 
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust 
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time. 
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel 
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent. 
• To remove tar and grease, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil 
Removal (B7A-19520–AA), available from your dealer. 
ENGINE 
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt 
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing: 
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The 
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause 
damage. 
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the 
engine block or other engine components. 
• Spray Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts that 
require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. 
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning 
the engine. 
214
• Cleaning 
Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the 
running engine may cause internal damage. 
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS 
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are 
available from your dealer. 
• For routine cleaning, use Detail Wash (ZC-3–A). 
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil 
Removal (B7A-19520–AA). 
CLEANING THE WINDSHIELD, WIPER BLADES AND REAR 
WINDOW 
If the wiper does not wipe properly, substances on the windshield, rear 
window or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot 
wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree sap, or other 
organic contamination. 
Do not clean the windshield or rear window glass with abrasives, 
as they may cause scratches. 
Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean the windshield, 
rear window or the wiper blades as damage may occur. 
Clean the outside of the windshield or rear window with a non-abrasive 
cleaner such as Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (E4AZ-19C507–AA), 
available from your authorized Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer. If after 
cleaning the glass surface, the water sheets from the glass (e.g., does not 
bead), then the window is clean. 
The windshield, rear window and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. 
Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or windshield 
washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or 
do not function properly. 
215
Cleaning 
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES 
The windshield, rear window and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. 
If the wiper does not wipe properly, substances on the windshield, rear 
window or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot wax 
treatments used by commercial car washes, tree sap, or other organic 
contamination. To clean these items, please follow these tips: 
• The windshield or rear window may be cleaned with a non-abrasive 
cleaner such as Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23), available 
from your dealer. 
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches. 
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts. 
• Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or 
windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they 
appear worn or do not function properly. 
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS 
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth. 
• Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of 
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the 
driver from undesirable windshield reflection. 
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning 
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of 
the air bag system. 
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in 
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan 
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the painted surfaces. 
WOOD-TONE TRIM 
• Clean the area with a damp cloth, then dry by wiping with a dry, soft, 
clean cloth. 
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish. 
INTERIOR 
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts: 
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. 
• Remove light stains and soil with Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner 
(E8AZ-19523–AA). 
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first 
with Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). 
216
• Never saturate the seat covers with cleaning solution. 
Cleaning 
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can 
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of 
the seat materials. 
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED) 
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the 
leather. 
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner 
(ZC-11–A). Dry the area with a soft cloth. 
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Deluxe Leather Care 
Kit (ZC-11–D), available from your authorized dealer. 
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or 
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based 
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of 
the clear, protective coating. 
UNDERBODY 
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and 
door drain holes free from packed dirt. 
FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS 
Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available 
to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products 
have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they 
are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your 
vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or 
exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following or 
products of equivalent quality: 
Ford Custom Clearcoat Polish* 
Ford Custom Silicone Gloss Polish 
Ford Custom Vinyl Protectant* (not available in Canada) 
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) 
Ford Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada) 
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) 
Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Remover* (not available in Canada) 
Ford Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada) 
Ford Custom Bright Metal Cleaner 
217
Cleaning 
Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate 
Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only) 
Ford Spot and Stain Remover* 
Ford Super Premium Tire and Trim Dressing 
Ford Triple Clean 
Ford Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada) 
Ford Engine Shampoo and Degreaser 
* May be sold with the Motorcraft name 
FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS 
Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available 
to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products 
have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they 
are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your 
vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or 
exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following or 
products of equivalent quality: 
Ford Custom Clearcoat Polish* 
Ford Custom Silicone Gloss Polish 
Ford Custom Vinyl Protectant* (not available in Canada) 
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) 
Ford Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada) 
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) 
Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Remover* (not available in Canada) 
Ford Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada) 
Ford Custom Bright Metal Cleaner 
Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate 
Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only) 
Ford Spot and Stain Remover* 
Ford Super Premium Tire and Trim Dressing 
Ford Triple Clean 
Ford Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada) 
Ford Engine Shampoo and Degreaser 
* May be sold with the Motorcraft name 
218
Maintenance and Specifications 
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS 
To help you service your vehicle: 
• We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy 
location. 
• We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which makes tracking 
routine service easy. 
If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide 
the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide to find out 
which parts and services are covered. 
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts 
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to 
provide the best performance in your vehicle. 
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE 
Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle. 
• Do not work on a hot engine. 
• When the engine is running, keep loose clothing, jewelry or long hair 
away from moving parts. 
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed 
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. 
• Keep all lit cigarettes, open flames and other lit material away from 
the battery and all fuel related parts. 
If you disconnect the battery, the engine must “relearn” its idle 
conditions before your vehicle will drive properly, as explained in the 
Battery section in this chapter. 
Working with the engine off 
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P 
(Park). 
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key. 
3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. 
219
Working with the engine on 
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P 
(Park). 
2. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. 
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not 
remove it while the engine is running. 
OPENING THE HOOD 
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood 
release handle located under the 
bottom left corner of the instrument 
panel. 
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and 
release the auxiliary latch located 
under the right center of the hood. 
Slide the handle to release the 
auxiliary latch. 
3. Lift the hood until the lift 
cylinders hold it open. 
HOOD 
Maintenance and Specifications 
220
Maintenance and Specifications 
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 
5.4L V8/6.8L V10 gasoline engines 
Refer to the 7.3 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel 
Owner’s Guide Supplement for diesel engine component locations. 
1. Battery 
2. Engine oil filler cap 
3. Transmission fluid dipstick 
4. Engine oil dipstick 
5. Brake fluid reservoir 
6. Power steering fluid reservoir 
7. Air filter assembly 
8. Engine coolant reservoir 
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 
221
Maintenance and Specifications 
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID 
Washer fluid 
Check the washer fluid whenever 
you stop for fuel. The reservoir is 
highlighted with a symbol. 
If the level is low, add enough fluid 
to fill the reservoir. In very cold 
weather, do not fill the reservoir all 
the way. 
Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification ESR-M17P5–A. 
Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter. 
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the 
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive. 
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used 
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the 
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system. 
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer 
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system 
components. 
Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate 
Washer fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the same reservoir as the 
windshield. 
ENGINE OIL 
Checking the engine oil 
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals 
for checking the engine oil. 
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. 
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the 
oil pan. 
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P 
(Park). 
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat. 
222
Maintenance and Specifications 
5. Locate and carefully remove the 
engine oil level indicator (dipstick). 
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it 
again. 
• If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks, the oil level is 
acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL. 
• If the oil level is below the MIN 
mark, add enough oil to raise the 
level within the MIN-MAX range. 
• Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage. Some oil 
must be removed from the engine by a service technician. 
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated. 
Adding engine oil 
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine 
oil in this chapter. 
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified 
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap 
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening. 
223
Maintenance and Specifications 
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the 
MAX mark on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick). 
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated. 
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise 
1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated. 
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the 
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed. 
Engine oil and filter recommendations 
Look for this certification 
trademark. 
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended. 
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American 
Petroleum Institute (API). Use Motorcraft or an equivalent oil meeting 
Ford specification WSS-M2C153–H. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum 
fuel economy and durability performance meeting all 
requirements for your vehicle’s engine. 
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine 
treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions, 
lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty. 
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule 
listed in the scheduled maintenance guide. 
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for 
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used 
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up 
engine noises or knock may be experienced. 
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or 
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application. 
224
Maintenance and Specifications 
BATTERY 
Your vehicle is equipped with a 
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery 
which normally does not require 
additional water during its life of 
service. 
However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the 
battery electrolyte level. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for 
the service interval schedules. 
Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”. 
Do not overfill the battery cells. 
If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water 
to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high 
mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery 
cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the 
charging system checked. 
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled 
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced. 
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and 
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to 
the battery terminals. 
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables 
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the 
acid with a solution of baking soda and water. 
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the 
transmission must learn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the 
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and 
will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel. 
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause 
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted 
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, 
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper 
ventilation. 
225
Maintenance and Specifications 
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the 
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, 
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery. 
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite 
corners. 
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric 
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes 
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of 
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush 
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt 
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. 
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and 
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. 
For information on transmission operation after the battery has been 
disconnected see “Shift strategy” in the driving section. 
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer, 
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When 
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must 
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and 
performance. To begin this process: 
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake. 
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the 
engine. 
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with 
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for 
at least one minute. 
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process. 
• The vehicle may need to be driven 16 km (10 miles) or more to 
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy. 
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle 
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle 
trim is eventually relearned. 
226
Maintenance and Specifications 
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, 
the clock must be reset once the battery is reconnected. 
• Always dispose of automotive 
batteries in a responsible manner. 
Follow your local authorized 
standards for disposal. Call your 
local authorized recycling center 
to find out more about recycling 
automotive batteries. 
ENGINE COOLANT 
LEAD 
RETURN 
RECYCLE 
Checking engine coolant 
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the 
mileage intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance guide. The coolant 
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and water, which 
equates to a freeze point of -36° C (-34° F). Coolant concentration 
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the 
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolant 
should be maintained at the “cold full” of “cold fill range” level in the 
coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add coolant per the instructions 
in the Adding engine coolant section. 
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water 
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above 
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A 
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following: 
• Freeze protection down to -36° C (-34° F). 
• Boiling protection up to 129° C (265° F). 
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion. 
• Enables calibrated gauges to work properly. 
227
Maintenance and Specifications 
When the engine is cold, check the 
level of the engine coolant in the 
reservoir. 
MAX 
COLD FILL 
RANGE 
MIN 
• The engine coolant should be at the “cold fill level” or within the “cold 
fill range” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon 
application). 
• Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for service interval 
schedules. 
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your 
vehicle in this chapter. 
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval, 
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is 
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding 
engine coolant in this chapter. 
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine 
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified 
function and vehicle location. 
Adding engine coolant 
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant 
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the 
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained. 
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and 
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you 
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. 
228
Maintenance and Specifications 
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid 
container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could 
make it difficult to see through the windshield. 
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with either green-colored 
Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant meeting Ford specification 
ESE-M97B44–A or yellow-colored Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine 
Coolant meeting Ford Specification WSS-M97B51–A1. To determine your 
vehicle’s coolant type (color), check your coolant reservoir. 
• Add Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored), 
VC-4–A (U.S.) or CXC-10 (Canada) or Motorcraft Premium 
Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored), VC-7–A (VC-7–B in 
Oregon), depending on the type of coolant originally equipped 
in your vehicle. If you are unsure which type of coolant your vehicle 
requires, check your coolant reservoir or contact your local dealer. 
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, 
darkens the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from 
yellow to golden tan. 
• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such 
as Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or 
CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44–D 
with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Speciality Orange 
Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product with your 
factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection. 
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case 
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the 
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of 
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone 
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion, 
overheating or freezing. 
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants 
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol 
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or 
freezing. 
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These 
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine 
coolant. 
• Do not mix with recycled coolant unless from a Ford-approved 
recycling process (see Use of Recycled engine coolant section). 
229
Maintenance and Specifications 
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap 
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery 
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and 
water to the “cold full” level. For all other vehicles, which have a coolant 
degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to remove the 
coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow 
system, follow these steps to add engine coolant. 
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is 
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The 
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out 
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly. 
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool. 
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant 
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (an opaque plastic bottle). 
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release. 
3. Step back while the pressure releases. 
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the 
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap. 
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see 
above), to within the “cold fill range” or the “cold full” level on the 
reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the 
radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full. 
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly 
installed to prevent coolant loss.) 
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration see 
Checking Engine Coolant section). If the concentration is not 50/50 
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the 
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50 
coolant concentration. 
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant 
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If 
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and 
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level. 
If you have to add more than 1.0 liter (1.0 quart) of engine coolant per 
month, have your dealer check the engine cooling system. Your cooling 
system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant 
can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage. 
230
Maintenance and Specifications 
Recycled engine coolant 
Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a recycled engine coolant 
produced by Ford-approved processes in vehicles originally equipped 
with Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored). However, not 
all coolant recycling processes produce coolant that meets Ford 
specification ESE-M97B44–A. Use of such coolant may harm the engine 
and cooling system components. 
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine 
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold 
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet 
available. 
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate 
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling 
and disposing of automotive fluids. 
Coolant refill capacity 
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer 
to Refill capacities in this chapter. 
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant 
in this chapter. 
Severe climates 
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –36° C [–34° F]): 
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration 
above 50%. 
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%. 
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will 
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine 
coolant and may cause engine damage. 
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the 
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate 
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the 
winter months. 
If you drive in extremely hot climates: 
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration 
above 40%. 
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%. 
231
Maintenance and Specifications 
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will 
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine 
coolant and may cause engine damage. 
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will 
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine 
coolant and may cause engine damage. 
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the 
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate 
protection at the temperatures in which you drive. 
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50 
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system 
and engine protection. 
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (if equipped) 
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to 
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred. 
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load 
and terrain. 
How fail-safe cooling works 
If the engine begins to overheat: 
• The engine coolant temperature 
gauge will move to the red (hot) 
area. 
• The and symbol will 
illuminate. 
• The Service Engine Soon 
indicator light will illuminate. 
H 
C 
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine 
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled 
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine. 
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However: 
• The engine power will be limited. 
• The air conditioning system will be disabled. 
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine 
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to 
increase. 
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take 
your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine 
damage. 
232
Maintenance and Specifications 
When fail-safe mode is activated 
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the 
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed 
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is 
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine 
damage, therefore: 
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine. 
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility. 
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool. 
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low. 
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is 
running or hot. 
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility. 
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem 
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a 
service facility as soon as possible. 
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS 
Important safety precautions 
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank 
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. 
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is 
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops 
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may 
spray out and injure you or others. 
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or 
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause 
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible 
personal injury. 
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or 
mishandled. 
233
Maintenance and Specifications 
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent. 
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel: 
• Extinguish all smoking materials 
and any open flames before 
fueling your vehicle. 
• Always turn off the vehicle before 
fueling. 
• Automotive fuels can be harmful 
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if 
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, 
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately 
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours. 
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind 
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, 
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious 
illness and permanent injury. 
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes, 
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and 
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could 
lead to permanent injury. 
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is 
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated 
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or 
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation. 
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of 
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors, 
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive 
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is 
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and 
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse 
reaction. 
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow 
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while 
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. 
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes. 
234
Maintenance and Specifications 
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static 
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an 
ungrounded fuel container. 
Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an 
ungrounded fuel container: 
• Place approved fuel container on the ground. 
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the 
cargo area). 
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while 
filling. 
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill 
position. 
Fuel Filler Cap 
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/8 turn on/off 
feature. 
When fueling your vehicle: 
1. Turn the engine off. 
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/8 of a turn until it 
stops. 
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe. 
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the 
filler pipe. 
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops. 
If the “Service Engine Soon/Check Engine” indicator comes on and stays 
on after you start the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly 
installed. Turn off the engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap 
properly and reinstall it. 
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler 
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may 
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the 
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used. 
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is 
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops 
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may 
spray out and injure you or others. 
235
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or 
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause 
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible 
personal injury. 
Choosing the right fuel 
Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law 
and could damage your vehicle. 
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system 
components. 
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic 
compounds, including manganese-based compounds containing MMT. 
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was 
not designed may not be covered by your warranty. 
Octane recommendations 
Your vehicle is designed to use 
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with 
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. 
We do not recommend the use of 
(R+M)/2 87 METHOD 
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that 
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas. 
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if 
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel 
with the recommended octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified 
service technician to prevent any engine damage. 
Fuel quality 
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability 
problems during a cold start, try a different brand of “Regular” unleaded 
gasoline. “Premium” unleaded gasoline is not recommended (particularly 
in the United States) because it may cause these problems to become 
more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your dealer or a qualified 
service technician. 
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel 
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane 
rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system. 
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your 
fuel may not be covered by your warranty. 
Maintenance and Specifications 
236
Maintenance and Specifications 
Many of the world’s automakers 
issued the World-wide Fuel Charter 
that recommends gasoline 
specifications to provide improved 
performance and emission control 
system protection for your vehicle. 
Gasolines that meet the World-wide 
Fuel Charter should be used when 
available. Ask your fuel supplier 
about gasolines that meet the 
World-wide Fuel Charter. In Canada, 
look for fuels that display the Auto Makers’ Choice logo. 
Cleaner air 
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to 
improve air quality. 
Running out of fuel 
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse 
affect on powertrain components. 
If you have run out of fuel: 
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after 
refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to 
the engine. 
• Your “Service Engine Soon” indicator may come on. For more 
information on the “Service Engine Soon” indicator, refer to the 
Instrument cluster chapter. 
Fuel Filter 
For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service 
technician. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate 
intervals for changing the fuel filter. 
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The 
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system 
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used. 
237
Maintenance and Specifications 
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY 
Measuring techniques 
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the 
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as 
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are 
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend 
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 600 km (1 000 
miles) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate 
measurement after 3 000 km–5 000 km (2 000 miles-3 000 miles). 
Filling the tank 
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to 
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities 
section of this chapter. 
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the 
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the 
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates 
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel 
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty. 
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should 
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your 
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be 
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the 
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank. 
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank: 
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling, 
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running. 
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time 
the tank is filled. 
• Allow no more than 2 automatic click-offs when filling. 
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating. 
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand. 
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the 
same direction each time you fill up. 
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time. 
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent. 
238
Maintenance and Specifications 
Calculating fuel economy 
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading 
(in kilometers or miles). 
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in liters 
or gallons). 
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record 
the current odometer reading. 
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer 
reading. 
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel 
economy: 
Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total kilometers 
traveled. 
Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used. 
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city 
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel 
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records 
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel 
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy. 
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits 
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change 
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy. 
Habits 
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel. 
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel 
economy. 
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste 
fuel. 
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop. 
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy. 
• Slow down gradually. 
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 88 km/h [55 mph] uses 15% 
less fuel than traveling at 105 km/h [65 mph]). 
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy. 
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy. 
239
• Maintenance and Specifications 
You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if 
unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs. 
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel 
economy. 
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may 
reduce fuel economy. 
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel 
economy. 
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving. 
Maintenance 
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size. 
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel 
economy. 
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in 
this chapter. 
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the 
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks 
found in your vehicle scheduled maintenance guide. 
Conditions 
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy 
at any speed. 
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately 
0.4 km/L [1 mpg] is lost for every 180 kg [400 lb] of weight carried). 
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug 
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may 
reduce fuel economy. 
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy. 
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 
12–16 km (8–10 miles) of driving. 
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to 
driving on hilly terrain. 
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top 
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal. 
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than 
two-wheel-drive operation. 
• Close windows for high speed driving. 
240
Maintenance and Specifications 
EPA window sticker 
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your 
dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA 
window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons 
with other vehicles. 
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window 
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of L/100 km (MPG) 
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy 
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions. 
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM 
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a 
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with 
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic 
converter and other emission control components continue to work 
properly: 
• Use only the specified fuel listed. 
• Avoid running out of fuel. 
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at 
high speeds. 
• Have the items listed in your scheduled maintenance guide performed 
according to the specified schedule. 
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance 
guide are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its 
emissions system. 
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for 
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting 
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine 
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. 
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry 
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine 
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. 
241
Maintenance and Specifications 
Illumination of the “Service Engine Soon” light, charging system warning 
light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke 
or loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system 
is not working properly. 
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially 
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. 
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By 
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, 
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not 
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent 
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on 
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the 
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up 
specifications. 
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty 
information. 
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing 
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of 
the on-board diagnostics system. If your “Check Engine/Service Engine 
Soon” light is on, refer to the description in the Warning lights and 
chimes section of the Instrument cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not 
pass the I/M test with the “Check Engine/Service Engine Soon” light on. 
If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced, 
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test” 
condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a 
minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as 
described below: 
• First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway. 
• Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with 
at least four idle periods. 
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the 
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The 
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started, 
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. 
242
Maintenance and Specifications 
CHECKING AND ADDING POWER STEERING FLUID 
Check the power steering fluid. 
Refer to the scheduled maintenance 
guide for the service interval 
schedules. If adding fluid is 
necessary, use only MERCON ATF. 
Check the fluid level when it is at ambient temperature, 20° – 80° F (-7° 
– 25° C): 
1. Check the fluid level on the dipstick. It should be between the arrows 
in the FULL COLD range. Do not add fluid if the level is within this 
range. 
2. If the fluid level is low, start the engine. 
3. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several 
times. 
4. Turn the engine off. 
5. Recheck the fluid level on the dipstick. Do not add fluid if the level is 
between the arrows in the FULL COLD range. 
6. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking 
the level until it reaches the FULL COLD range. Be sure to put the 
dipstick back in the reservoir. 
243
Maintenance and Specifications 
BRAKE FLUID 
Checking and adding brake fluid 
Brake fluid should be checked and 
refilled as needed. Refer to the 
scheduled maintenance guide for 
the service interval schedules. 
1. Clean the reservoir cap before 
removal to prevent dirt or water 
from entering the reservoir. 
2. Visually inspect the fluid level. 
3. If necessary, add brake fluid from 
a clean un-opened container until 
the level reaches MAX. Do not fill 
above this line. 
4. Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid 
certified to meet Ford specification ESA-M6C25–A. Refer to Lubricant 
specifications in this chapter. 
MAX 
Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes 
with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention if 
irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. 
Seek medical attention immediately. 
If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will cause 
permanent damage to your brakes. 
Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run dry. This 
may cause the brakes to fail. 
244
Maintenance and Specifications 
TRANSMISSION FLUID 
Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped) 
Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for scheduled intervals for 
fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid. 
However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not 
working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you 
notice some sign of fluid leakage. 
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an 
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating 
temperature (approximately 30 km [20 miles]). If your vehicle has been 
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot 
weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 
minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking. 
1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until it reaches normal operating 
temperature. 
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake. 
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal, 
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear 
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage. 
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running. 
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If 
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment 
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick. 
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube. 
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in 
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient 
temperature. 
Low fluid level 
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid 
level is at the bottom of the dipstick 
and the ambient temperature is 
ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD 
above 10°C (50°F). 
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK 
245
Correct fluid level 
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating 
temperature 66°C-77°C (150°F-170°F) on a level surface. The normal 
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 30 km (20 
miles) of driving. 
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is 
above 10°C (50°F). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill 
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating 
temperature. 
The transmission fluid should be in 
this range if at normal operating 
temperature (66°C-77°C 
[150°F-170°F]). 
The transmission fluid should be in 
this range if at ambient temperature 
(10°C-35°C [50°F-95°F]). 
High fluid level 
Fluid levels above the safe range 
may result in transmission failure. 
An overfill condition of transmission 
fluid may cause shift and/or 
engagement concerns and/or 
possible damage. 
High fluid levels can be caused by 
an overheating condition. 
ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD 
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK 
ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD 
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK 
ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD 
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK 
Maintenance and Specifications 
246
Maintenance and Specifications 
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels 
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of 
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the 
Lubricant specifications section in this chapter. 
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause 
internal transmission component damage. 
If necessary, add fluid in 250 ml (1/2 pint) increments through the filler 
tube until the level is correct. 
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid 
should be removed by a qualified 
technician. 
ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD 
An overfill condition of 
transmission fluid may cause 
shift and/or engagement 
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK 
concerns and/or possible 
damage. 
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or 
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission 
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components. 
Checking and adding transfer case fluid (if equipped) 
1. Clean the filler plug. 
2. Remove the filler plug and 
inspect the fluid level. 
247
Maintenance and Specifications 
3. Add only enough fluid through 
the filler opening so that the fluid 
level is at the bottom of the 
opening. 
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant 
Specifications in this chapter. 
AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE 
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals 
for changing the air filter element. 
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter 
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft Part Numbers. 
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not 
remove it while the engine is running. 
Changing the air filter element (gasoline engines only) 
1. Loosen the clamp that secures 
the air filter element in place. 
248
Maintenance and Specifications 
2. Carefully separate the two halves 
of the air filter housing. 
3. Remove the air filter element 
from the open end of the air filter 
housing. 
4. Install a new air filter element, ensuring the arrow on the top half of 
the air filter housing lines up with the notch on the bottom half of air 
filter housing. Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between 
the air filter housing. This could cause filter damage and allow 
unmetered air to enter the engine if not properly seated. 
5. Replace the two halves of the air filter housing and secure the clamp. 
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING 
New vehicles are fitted with tires 
that have a rating on them called 
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality 
grades can be found where 
applicable on the tire sidewall 
between tread shoulder and 
maximum section width. For 
example: 
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A 
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United 
States Department of Transportation has set. 
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger 
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, 
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim 
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in 
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2). 
249
Maintenance and Specifications 
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S. 
Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following 
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. 
Treadwear 
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of 
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified 
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one 
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire 
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual 
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the 
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and 
differences in road characteristics and climate. 
Traction AA A B C 
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The 
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured 
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of 
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction 
performance. 
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on 
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include 
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. 
Temperature A B C 
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the 
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat 
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory 
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire 
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to 
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance 
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle 
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of 
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by 
law. 
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that 
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, 
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in 
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 
250
Maintenance and Specifications 
SERVICING YOUR TIRES 
Checking the tire pressure 
• Use an accurate tire pressure gauge. 
• Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle has been 
parked for at least one hour or has been driven less than 5 km (3 
miles). 
• Adjust tire pressure to recommended specifications found on the 
Certification Label. Tire pressure information can also be found on the 
Tire Information label located on the inside of the fuel filler door. 
Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail 
suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle control. 
Tire rotation 
Because your vehicle’s tires perform different jobs, they often wear 
differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly and last longer, rotate 
them as indicated in the scheduled maintenance guide. If you notice that 
the tires wear unevenly, have them checked. 
• Four tire rotation 
251
• Maintenance and Specifications 
Five tire rotation 
Replacing the tires 
Replace the tires when the wear 
band is visible through the tire 
treads. 
When replacing full size tires, never mix radial bias-belted, or 
bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes that are listed on the 
Certification Label. Make sure that all tires are the same size, speed 
rating, and load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire combinations 
recommended on the label. If you do not follow these precautions, 
your vehicle may not drive properly and safely. 
Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size, type, 
load-carrying capacity and tread design (e.g., “All Terrain”, 
“Touring”, etc.), as originally offered by Ford. 
252
Maintenance and Specifications 
Do not replace your tires with “high performance” tires or larger 
size tires. 
Failure to follow these precautions may adversely affect the 
handling of the vehicle and make it easier for the driver to lose 
control and roll over. 
Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tires may also 
affect the accuracy of your speedometer. 
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS 
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you 
currently have on your vehicle. 
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in 
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow 
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel 
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used as chains may chip 
aluminum wheels. 
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains: 
• Use only SAE Class S chains. 
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any 
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines. 
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your 
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove 
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle. 
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle. 
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use 
tire chains on dry roads. 
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle 
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when 
using snow tires and chains. 
253
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS 
Component* 5.4L V8 engine 6.8L V10 engine 
Air filter element FA-1634 FA-1634 
Fuel filter FG-986B FG-986B 
Oil filter FL-820-S FL-820-S 
PCV valve EV-233 EV-233 
Battery BXT-65-750 BXT-65-750 
Spark plugs-platinum** AGSF-22W AGSF-22W 
*Refer to the 7.3 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel 
Owner’s Guide Supplement for Motorcraft diesel engine service part 
numbers. 
**Refer to Vehicle Emissions Control Information (VECI) decal for spark 
plug gap information. 
REFILL CAPACITIES 
Fluid Ford Part Name Application Capacity 
Front axle Motorcraft SAE 
75W-90 Premium 
4x4 Front Axle 
Lubricant 
4X4 vehicles 1.8L (3.8 pints) 
Rear axle 1 Motorcraft SAE 
75W-140 Synthetic 
Rear Axle 
Lubricant 
All 3.3L (6.9 pints) 
2 
Brake fluid High Performance 
DOT 3 Motor 
Vehicle Brake 
Fluid 
All Fill to line on 
reservoir 
Maintenance and Specifications 
254
Maintenance and Specifications 
Fluid Ford Part Name Application Capacity 
Engine coolant- 
Gasoline 
engines 3 
Motorcraft 
Premium Engine 
Coolant 
(green-colored) or 
Motorcraft 
Premium Gold 
Engine Coolant 
(yellow-colored) 
5.4L V8 engine 25L (26.4 
quarts) 4 
6.8L V10 engine 27.0L (28.5 
quarts) 4 
Engine 
coolant-Diesel 
engine 
Refer to your 7.3L Diesel Supplement 
Engine oil 
(includes filter 
change)-Gasoline 
engines 
Motorcraft SAE 
5W-20 Premium 
Synthetic Blend 
Motor Oil 
All 5.7L (6.0 
quarts) 
Engine oil 
(includes filter 
change)-Diesel 
engine 
Refer to your 7.3L Diesel Supplement 
Fuel tank N/A All 166.6L (44.0 
gallons) 
Power steering 
fluid 
Motorcraft 
MERCON ATF 
All Fill to line on 
dipstick 
Transfer case 
fluid (if 
equipped) 
Motorcraft 
MERCON ATF 
4x4 vehicles 1.9L (2.0 
quarts) 
Transmission 
fluid 5 
Motorcraft 
MERCON ATF 
4x2 vehicles 16.1L (17.1 
quarts) 6 
4x4 vehicles 16.7L (17.7 
quarts) 6 
Windshield 
washer fluid 
Ultra-Clear 
Windshield Washer 
Concentrate 
All 4.2L (1.1 
gallons) 
255
Maintenance and Specifications 
1Your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic lubricant. Axle lubricant 
quantities should not need to be checked unless a leak is suspected, 
service is required or the axle assembly has been submerged in water. 
The axle lubricant should be changed any time the rear axle has been 
submerged in water. 
2Add 236 ml (8 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier C8AZ-19B546-A or 
equivalent meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill 
of Traction-Lok axles. 
Service refill capacities are determined by filling the rear axle to the 
bottom of the filler hole with the specified lubricant. 
3Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. 
4If equipped with auxiliary rear heater, add an additional 1.4 L (1.5 
quarts). 
5Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission 
fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick 
handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being added is of the 
correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide to determine 
the correct service interval. 
Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as 
MERCON and MERCON V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used 
in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCON type 
fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that 
require the MERCON V type fluid. 
MERCON and MERCON V type fluids are not interchangeable. 
DO NOT mix MERCON and MERCON V. Use of a transmission 
fluid that indicates dual usage (MERCON and MERCON V) in 
an automatic transmission application requiring MERCON may 
cause transmission damage. Use of any fluid other than the 
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage. 
6Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary 
based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount 
of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on 
the dipstick’s normal operating range. 
256
Maintenance and Specifications 
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS 
Item 
Ford part name 
or equivalent 
Ford part 
number 
Ford 
specification 
Spindle bearing 
High Temperature 
4X4 Front Axle 
and Wheel 
Bearing Grease 
E8TZ-19590–A ESA-M1C198–A 
Front axle Motorcraft SAE 
75W-90 Premium 
4x4 Front Axle 
Lubricant 
XY-75W90-TQL WSP-M2C201-A 
Rear axle1 Motorcraft SAE 
75W-140 High 
Performance 
Synthetic Rear 
Axle Lubricant 
XY-75W140–QL WSL-M2C192-A 
Brake fluid Motorcraft High 
Performance DOT 
3 Motor Vehicle 
Brake Fluid 
PM-1 ESA-M6C25-A 
and DOT 3 
Engine 
coolant-Gasoline 
engines 
Motorcraft 
Premium Engine 
Coolant 
(green-colored) 
VC-4–A (in 
Canada, 
Motorcraft 
CXC-10 ) 
ESE-M97B44-A 
Motorcraft 
Premium Gold 
Engine Coolant 
(yellow-colored) 
VC-7–A WSS-M97B51-A1 
Engine 
coolant-Diesel 
engine 
Refer to your 7.3L Diesel Supplement 
Engine 
oil-Gasoline 
engines 
Motorcraft SAE 
5W-20 Premium 
Synthetic Blend 
Motor Oil 
XO-5W20-QSP WSS-M2C153-H 
and API 
Certification 
Mark 
257
Maintenance and Specifications 
Item 
Ford part name 
or equivalent 
Ford part 
number 
Ford 
specification 
Engine oil-Diesel 
engine 
Refer to your 7.3L Diesel Supplement 
Hinges, latches, 
striker plates, 
fuel filler door 
hinge and seat 
tracks 
Multi-Purpose 
Grease 
XG-4or 
F5AZ-19G209-AA 
ESR-M1C159-A 
Transmission 
/steering/parking 
brake linkages 
and pivots, 
brake pedal 
shaft 
Premium 
Long-Life Grease 
XG-1-C or 
XG-1-K 
ESA-M1C75-B 
Power steering 
fluid and 
transfer case 
fluid (if 
equipped) 
Motorcraft 
MERCON ATF 
XT-2-QDX MERCON 
Automatic 
transmission 2 
Motorcraft 
MERCON ATF 
XT-2-QDX MERCON 
Windshield 
washer fluid 
Ultra-clear 
Windshield 
Washer 
Concentrate 
C9AZ-19550-AC ESR-M17P5-A 
1 Add 236 ml (8 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier C8AZ-19B546-A or 
equivalent meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill 
of Traction-Lok axles. Ford design rear axles contain a synthetic 
lubricant that does not require changing unless the axle has been 
submerged in water. 
258
Maintenance and Specifications 
2Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission 
fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick 
handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being added is of the 
correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide to determine 
the correct service interval. 
Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as 
MERCON and MERCON V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used 
in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCON type 
fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that 
require the MERCON V type fluid. 
MERCON and MERCON V type fluids are not interchangeable. 
DO NOT mix MERCON and MERCON V. Use of a transmission 
fluid that indicates dual usage (MERCON and MERCON V) in 
an automatic transmission application requiring MERCON may 
cause transmission damage. Use of any fluid other than the 
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage. 
ENGINE DATA 
Engine* 5.4L V8 engine 6.8L V10 engine 
Cubic inches 330 415 
Required fuel 87 octane 87 octane 
Firing order 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 1-6-5-10-2-7-3-8-4-9 
Spark plug gap 
1.3-1.4 mm 
(0.052-0.056 inch) 
1.3-1.4 mm 
(0.052-0.056 inch) 
Ignition system Coil on plug Coil on plug 
Compression ratio 9.0:1 9.0:1 
*Refer to the 7.3 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel 
Owner’s Guide Supplement for diesel engine information. 
259
Maintenance and Specifications 
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS 
EXCURSION 
Dimension 4x2 mm (in) 4x4 mm (in) 
(1) Overall length 5 759 (226.7) 5 759 (226.7) 
(2) Overall width 2 031 (79.9) 2 031 (79.9) 
(3) Overall height 1 967 (77.4) 2 043 (80.4) 
(4) Wheelbase 3 480 (137.0) 3 480 (137.0) 
(5) Track (Front / 
1 738 (68.4)/ 
1 738 (68.4)/ 
Rear) 
1 729 (68.1) 
1 729 (68.1) 
4 
1 
260
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE 
Certification label 
The National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration Regulations require 
that a Certification label be affixed 
to a vehicle and prescribe where the 
Certification label may be located. 
The Certification label is located on 
the front door latch pillar on the 
driver’s side. 
5 
2 
3 
Maintenance and Specifications 
261
Maintenance and Specifications 
Vehicle identification number 
The vehicle identification number is 
attached to a metal tag and is 
located on the driver side 
instrument panel. (Please note that 
in the graphic XXXX is 
representative of your vehicle 
identification number.) 
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 
1. World manufacturer identifier 
2. Brake type and gross vehicle 
weight rating (GVWR) 
3. Vehicle line, series, body type 
4. Engine type 
5. Check digit 
6. Model year 
7. Assembly plant 
8. Production sequence number 
Engine number 
The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification 
number) is stamped on the engine block, transmission, frame and 
transfer case (if equipped). 
262
Accessories 
FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE 
A wide selection of genuine Ford accessories are available for your 
vehicle through your local authorized Ford, Lincoln, Mercury or Ford of 
Canada dealer. These quality accessories have been specifically 
engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to 
complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In 
addition, each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets 
or exceeds Ford’s rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford 
Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Ford 
accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or 
workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component 
damaged by the defective accessory. The accessory will be warranted for 
whichever provides you the greatest benefit: 
• 12 months or 20 000 km (12 000 miles) (whichever occurs first), or 
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty. 
This means that genuine Ford accessories purchased along with your 
new vehicle and installed by the dealer are covered for the full length of 
your New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty — 3 years or 60 000 km (36 000 
miles) (whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a 
copy of the warranty. 
Not all accessories are available for all models. 
Vehicle Security 
Styled wheel protector locks 
Vehicle security systems 
Underbody Lighting 
Comfort and convenience 
Cargo organizers 
Cargo shades 
Cargo trays 
Cell phone holder 
Dash trim 
Engine block heaters 
Battery warmer/blanket 
Cellar phone holder 
Rear door storage bins 
Tire step 
263
Accessories 
Travel equipment 
Adjustable Towing Systems 
Auto headlamp system with DRL (Daytime Running Lights) 
Battery Warmer 
Box Aluminum Rack cargo storage systems 
Daytime running lights 
Factory luggage rack adaptors 
Fog lights 
Framed luggage covers 
Hard and soft sided roof box 
Highway safety and first aid kit 
Multi sport track rider cross bars 
Multi sport track rider adaptors 
Spare tire soft storage cover 
Seat back pack storage 
Soft luggage cover 
Trailgate tables 
Towing mirrors 
Trailer hitch mounted bike carrier 
Trailer hitch bars and balls 
Trailer hitch swivel 
Tubular running bars 
TV/video system 
Protection and appearance equipment 
Air bag anti-theft locks 
Carpeted cargo mat 
Door edge guards 
Truck covers 
Cargo liners, interior 
Carpet floor mats 
Cleaners, waxes and polishes 
Flat splash guards 
Front end covers (full) 
Grill guards/brush guards 
264
Hood deflectors 
Locking gas cap 
Lubricants and oils 
Molded splash guards 
Molded vinyl floor mats 
Rear air deflectors 
Side window air deflectors 
Stainless grill insert 
Step bumpers 
Sun roof deflector 
Touch-up paint 
Universal floor mats — carpeted 
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in 
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle: 
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your 
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the 
front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety compliance 
certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight information. 
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio 
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile 
communications systems - such as two-way radios, telephones and theft 
alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such equipment 
installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations 
and should be installed only by a qualified service technician. 
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your 
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive 
use or are not properly installed. When operated, such systems may 
cause the engine to stumble or stall or cause the transmission to be 
damaged or operate improperly. In addition, such systems may be 
damaged or their performance may be affected by operating your 
vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers and 
other transmitters with outputs of five watts or less will not ordinarily 
affect your vehicle’s operation.) 
• Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage 
that may result from the use of such equipment. 
Accessories 
265
A 
ABS (see Brakes) .....................157 
Accessory delay ..........................86 
Air bag supplemental restraint 
system ........................................140 
and child safety seats ............142 
description ..............................140 
disposal ....................................144 
driver air bag ..........................142 
indicator light ...................12, 144 
operation .................................142 
passenger air bag ...................142 
Air cleaner filter ...............248, 254 
Air conditioning ..........................60 
auxiliary heater and air 
conditioner ................................68 
manual heating and air 
conditioning system .................57 
Antifreeze (see Engine 
coolant) .....................................227 
Anti-lock brake system 
(see Brakes) ..............................157 
Anti-theft system 
warning light .............................14 
Audio system (see Radio) ...19, 27 
Automatic transmission 
driving an automatic 
overdrive .................................161 
fluid, adding ............................245 
fluid, checking ........................245 
fluid, refill capacities ..............254 
fluid, specification ..................259 
Auxiliary power point .................83 
Axle 
lubricant specifications ..257, 259 
refill capacities ........................254 
traction lok ..............................159 
B 
Battery .......................................225 
acid, treating emergencies .....225 
charging system warning 
light ............................................12 
jumping a disabled battery ....197 
maintenance-free ....................225 
replacement, specifications ...254 
servicing ..................................225 
BeltMinder .................................135 
Brakes ........................................156 
anti-lock ...................................157 
anti-lock brake system (ABS) 
warning light .....................12, 157 
brake warning light ..................11 
fluid, checking and adding ....244 
fluid, refill capacities ..............254 
fluid, specifications .........257, 259 
lubricant specifications ..257, 259 
parking ....................................158 
pedals (see Power adjustable 
foot pedals) ...............................89 
shift interlock ..........................160 
Break-in period .............................5 
Bulbs ............................................75 
C 
Capacities for refilling fluids ....254 
Cargo net ...................................102 
CD-6 disc .....................................27 
CD-single premium .....................19 
Certification Label ....................261 
Changing a tire .........................192 
Child safety restraints ..............145 
child safety belts ....................145 
Child safety seats ......................145 
Index 
266
attaching with tether straps ..149 
in front seat ............................147 
in rear seat ..............................147 
Cleaning your vehicle 
engine compartment ..............214 
exterior ....................................217 
instrument panel ....................216 
interior .....................................216 
plastic parts ............................215 
washing ....................................213 
waxing .....................................213 
wheels ......................................214 
wiper blades ....................215–216 
woodtone trim ........................216 
Climate control (see Air 
conditioning or Heating) ......57, 60 
Clock ......................................23, 32 
Compass, electronic ..............86, 95 
calibration .................................96 
set zone adjustment .................96 
Console ......................................101 
overhead ..............................82–83 
Controls 
power seat ...............................119 
steering column ........................93 
Coolant 
checking and adding ..............227 
refill capacities ................231, 254 
specifications ..................257, 259 
Cruise control (see Speed 
control) ........................................89 
Customer Assistance ................185 
Ford accessories for your 
vehicle .............................217–218 
Ford Extended Service 
Plan ..........................................206 
Getting assistance outside the 
U.S. and Canada .....................210 
Getting roadside assistance ...185 
Index 
Getting the service you 
need .........................................204 
Ordering additional owner’s 
literature .................................211 
The Dispute Settlement 
Board .......................................206 
Utilizing the 
Mediation/Arbitration 
Program ...................................209 
D 
Daytime running lamps 
(see Lamps) ................................72 
Defrost 
rear window ..............................70 
Dipstick 
automatic transmission 
fluid ..........................................245 
engine oil .................................222 
Doors 
door ajar warning .....................14 
lubricant specifications ..........257 
Driving under special 
conditions ..........................171, 173 
sand .........................................172 
snow and ice ...........................174 
through water .................173, 177 
E 
Emergencies, roadside 
jump-starting ..........................197 
Emission control system ..........241 
Engine ................................259–260 
check engine/service engine 
soon light ..................................10 
cleaning ...................................214 
coolant .....................................227 
diesel ...........................................7 
267
fail-safe coolant ......................232 
idle speed control ...................225 
lubrication 
specifications ..................257, 259 
refill capacities ........................254 
service points ..........................221 
starting after a collision .........186 
Engine block heater .................155 
Engine oil ..................................222 
checking and adding ..............222 
dipstick ....................................222 
filter, specifications ........224, 254 
recommendations ...................224 
refill capacities ........................254 
specifications ..................257, 259 
Exhaust fumes ..........................155 
F 
Fail safe cooling ........................232 
Fluid capacities .........................254 
Foglamps .....................................72 
Four-Wheel Drive 
vehicles ................................14, 166 
description ..............................167 
driving off road .......................169 
electronic shift ................166–167 
indicator light ...................14, 167 
preparing to drive your 
vehicle .....................................160 
Fuel ............................................233 
calculating fuel economy .......238 
cap .....................................11, 235 
capacity ...................................254 
choosing the right fuel ...........236 
comparisons with EPA fuel 
economy estimates .................241 
detergent in fuel .....................237 
filling your vehicle with 
fuel ...........................233, 235, 238 
filter, specifications ........237, 254 
fuel pump shut-off switch .....186 
gauge .........................................17 
improving fuel economy ........238 
low fuel warning light ..............13 
octane rating ...........236, 259–260 
quality ......................................236 
running out of fuel .................237 
safety information relating to 
automotive fuels .....................233 
Fuses ..................................187–188 
G 
Garage door opener ..............83, 97 
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ......11, 235 
Gas mileage (see Fuel 
economy) ...................................238 
Gauges .........................................15 
engine coolant temperature 
gauge .........................................15 
engine oil pressure gauge ........16 
fuel gauge ..................................17 
odometer ...................................18 
speedometer .............................18 
tachometer ................................18 
trip odometer ............................18 
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight 
Rating) .......................................177 
calculating ...............................179 
definition .................................177 
driving with a heavy load ......177 
location ....................................177 
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight 
Rating) .......................................177 
calculating .......................177, 179 
definition .................................177 
driving with a heavy load ......177 
location ....................................177 
H 
Hazard flashers .........................186 
Index 
268
Head restraints .........................121 
Headlamps ...................................71 
aiming ........................................73 
autolamp system .......................71 
bulb specifications ....................75 
daytime running lights .............72 
flash to pass ..............................72 
high beam ...........................13, 72 
replacing bulbs .........................76 
turning on and off ....................71 
warning chime ..........................14 
Heating 
heating and air conditioning 
system .................................57, 60 
HomeLink universal 
transceiver (see Garage 
door opener) .................97–98, 100 
Hood ..........................................220 
I 
Ignition .......................152, 259–260 
Infant seats 
(see Safety seats) .....................145 
Inspection/maintenance (I/M) 
testing ........................................242 
Instrument panel 
cleaning ...................................216 
cluster ........................................10 
lighting up panel and 
interior .......................................73 
J 
Jack ............................................192 
positioning ...............................192 
storage .....................................192 
Jump-starting your vehicle ......197 
Index 
K 
Keyless entry system 
autolock ...................................112 
locking and unlocking 
doors ................................111–112 
programming entry code .......111 
Keys ...................................113–115 
key in ignition chime ...............15 
positions of the ignition .........152 
L 
Lamps 
autolamp system .................71, 75 
bulb replacement 
specifications chart ..................75 
cargo lamps ...............................73 
daytime running light ...............72 
fog lamps ...................................72 
headlamps .................................71 
headlamps, flash to pass ..........72 
instrument panel, dimming .....73 
interior lamps ...............73–74, 76 
replacing bulbs ...................75–79 
Lane change indicator (see 
Turn signal) .................................73 
Liftgate ......................................102 
Lights, warning and indicator ....10 
air bag ........................................12 
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ....12, 157 
anti-theft ...................................14 
brake ..........................................11 
charging system ........................12 
check coolant ............................11 
cruise indicator .........................13 
door ajar ....................................14 
fuel cap light .............................11 
high beam .................................13 
low fuel ......................................13 
safety belt .................................12 
269
service engine soon ..................10 
speed control ............................93 
turn signal indicator .................13 
Limited slip axle (see Traction 
Loc) ............................................159 
Load limits .................................177 
GAWR ......................................177 
GVWR ......................................177 
trailer towing ..........................177 
Loading instructions .................179 
Locks 
autolock ...................................112 
childproof ................................106 
doors ........................................105 
Lubricant specifications ...257, 259 
Lumbar support, seats .............119 
M 
Manual transmission 
fluid capacities ........................254 
lubricant specifications ..........259 
Message center ...........................93 
english/metric button ...............94 
menu button .............................94 
Mirrors .........................................82 
automatic dimming rearview 
mirror ........................................86 
fold away ...................................88 
heated ........................................88 
side view mirrors (power) .......87 
Motorcraft parts ................237, 254 
O 
Octane rating ............................236 
Odometer .....................................18 
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................222 
Overdrive ...................................101 
P 
Panic alarm feature, remote 
entry system ..............................108 
Parking brake ............................158 
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....254 
Pedals (see Power adjustable 
foot pedals) .................................89 
Power adjustable foot pedals ...118 
Power distribution box 
(see Fuses) ...............................188 
Power door locks ..............105, 112 
Power mirrors .............................87 
Power point .................................83 
Power steering ..........................159 
fluid, checking and adding ....243 
fluid, refill capacity ................254 
fluid, specifications .........257, 259 
Power Windows ...........................85 
Preparing to drive your 
vehicle ........................................160 
R 
Radio ......................................19, 27 
Radio reception ...........................56 
Rear window defroster ...............70 
Relays ........................................187 
Remote entry system .......106, 108 
illuminated entry ....................110 
locking/unlocking 
doors ................................105, 107 
panic alarm .............................108 
replacement/additional 
transmitters .............................109 
Index 
270
replacing the batteries ...........108 
Reverse sensing system ...........164 
Roadside assistance ..................185 
Roof rack ...................................103 
S 
Safety belts (see Safety 
restraints) ............14, 128–131, 133 
Safety defects, reporting ..........212 
Safety restraints ........128–131, 133 
belt minder .............................135 
cleaning the safety belts ........139 
extension assembly ................139 
for adults .........................129–131 
for children .....................144–145 
lap belt ....................................134 
warning light and 
chime ...........................12, 14, 135 
Safety seats for children ..........145 
Seat belts (see Safety 
restraints) ..................................128 
Seats ..........................................117 
child safety seats ....................145 
memory seat ...........................118 
SecuriLock passive anti-theft 
system ................................113–115 
Servicing your vehicle ..............219 
Snowplowing .................................7 
Spare tire (see Changing the 
Tire) ...........................................192 
Spark plugs, 
specifications .............254, 259–260 
Special notice 
diesel-powered vehicles .............7 
utility-type vehicles ....................7 
Index 
Specification chart, 
lubricants ...........................257, 259 
Speed control ..............................89 
Speedometer ...............................18 
Starting your vehicle ........152–154 
jump starting ..........................197 
Steering .....................................159 
Steering wheel 
controls ..........................82, 89, 93 
tilting .........................................82 
T 
Tachometer .................................18 
Tires ...........................192, 249–251 
changing ..........................192–193 
checking the pressure ............251 
replacing ..................................252 
rotating ....................................251 
snow tires and chains ............253 
tire grades ...............................250 
treadwear ................................250 
Towing .......................................180 
recreational towing .................184 
trailer towing ..........................180 
wrecker ....................................202 
Traction-lok rear axle ...............159 
Transfer case 
fluid checking .........................247 
Transmission .............................160 
fluid, checking and adding 
(automatic) .............................245 
fluid, refill capacities ..............254 
lubricant 
specifications ..................257, 259 
Transmission control indicator 
light ..............................................13 
Trip odometer .............................18 
271
Turn signal ............................13, 73 
V 
Vehicle dimensions ...................260 
Vehicle Identification Number 
(VIN) ..........................................262 
Vehicle loading ..........................177 
Ventilating your vehicle ...........156 
W 
Warning chimes .....................14–15 
Warning lights (see Lights) .......10 
Washer fluid ..............................222 
Water, Driving through .............177 
Windows 
power .........................................85 
rear wiper/washer .....................80 
Windshield washer fluid and 
wipers 
checking and adding fluid .....222 
checking and cleaning ..............81 
liftgate reservoir .....................222 
operation ...................................80 
replacing wiper blades .............81 
Wrecker towing .........................202 
Index 
272

More Related Content

PDF
02 ls
PDF
02 expedition
PDF
02 town car
PDF
02 navigator
PDF
02 escape
PDF
02 windstar
PDF
03 focus
PDF
03 escape
02 ls
02 expedition
02 town car
02 navigator
02 escape
02 windstar
03 focus
03 escape

What's hot (20)

PDF
03 navigator
PDF
03 ranger
PDF
03 sable
PDF
03 ls
PDF
03 expedition
PDF
03 mountaneer
PDF
03 taurus
PDF
02 ranger
PDF
02 grand marquis
PDF
02 sable
PDF
02 mustang
PDF
02 villager
PDF
03 marauder
PDF
02 cougar
PDF
02 crown victoria
PDF
02 taurus
PDF
01 taurus
PDF
02 f series 250 350 450 550 lihgt super duty
PDF
03 explorer sport
PDF
03 escort
03 navigator
03 ranger
03 sable
03 ls
03 expedition
03 mountaneer
03 taurus
02 ranger
02 grand marquis
02 sable
02 mustang
02 villager
03 marauder
02 cougar
02 crown victoria
02 taurus
01 taurus
02 f series 250 350 450 550 lihgt super duty
03 explorer sport
03 escort
Ad

Similar to 02 excursion (11)

PDF
02 thunderbird
PDF
03 f 53 motorhome
PDF
02 continental
PDF
02 econoline e150 250-350-450
PDF
02 f series 650 750
PDF
02 escort
PDF
02 explorer sport trac
PDF
02 explorer sport
PDF
03 f series 650 750
PDF
02 f series 150
PDF
02 mountaneer
02 thunderbird
03 f 53 motorhome
02 continental
02 econoline e150 250-350-450
02 f series 650 750
02 escort
02 explorer sport trac
02 explorer sport
03 f series 650 750
02 f series 150
02 mountaneer
Ad

More from rukford (20)

PDF
6.0 l dies
PDF
тнвдбошденсолука1
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru бесприборная диагностика неисправностей легковых автомобилей
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru справочник по диагностике неисправностей автомобиля
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru техобслуживание, мелкий ремонт и покраска автомобиля свои...
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru справочник автомеханика2008
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru советы автомеханика техобслуживание, диагностика, ремонт
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru справочник автомеханика
PDF
97continental
PDF
Vnx.su аэростар 1986—1997 руководство по ремонту и схемы
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru eec iv-usa
PDF
Ford
PDF
дигностика двигателя. коды неисправностей. руководство 2003
PDF
97aerostar
PDF
97aspire
PDF
Vnx.su escort-i-orion-90-99
PDF
Vnx.su escort-90-pl
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru escort zetec-1-8-16-v
PDF
Vnx.su scorpio 1994-1998
PDF
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru systema upravleniy
6.0 l dies
тнвдбошденсолука1
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru бесприборная диагностика неисправностей легковых автомобилей
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru справочник по диагностике неисправностей автомобиля
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru техобслуживание, мелкий ремонт и покраска автомобиля свои...
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru справочник автомеханика2008
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru советы автомеханика техобслуживание, диагностика, ремонт
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru справочник автомеханика
97continental
Vnx.su аэростар 1986—1997 руководство по ремонту и схемы
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru eec iv-usa
Ford
дигностика двигателя. коды неисправностей. руководство 2003
97aerostar
97aspire
Vnx.su escort-i-orion-90-99
Vnx.su escort-90-pl
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru escort zetec-1-8-16-v
Vnx.su scorpio 1994-1998
Fordrazborka.zu8.ru systema upravleniy

02 excursion

  • 1. Table of Contents Introduction 4 Instrument Cluster 10 Warning and control lights 10 Gauges 15 Entertainment Systems 19 AM/FM stereo cassette with CD 19 AM/FM stereo with CD 27 Rear seat entertainment system 41 Climate Controls 57 Manual heating and air conditioning 57 Electronic automatic temperature control 60 Lights 71 Headlamps 71 Turn signal control 73 Bulb replacement 75 Interior lamps 76 Driver Controls 80 Windshield wiper/washer control 80 Steering wheel adjustment 82 Power windows 85 Mirrors 87 Speed control 89 Message center 93 Locks and Security 105 Keys 105 Locks 105 Anti-theft system 106 1
  • 2. Table of Contents Seating and Safety Restraints 117 Seating 117 Safety restraints 128 Air bags 140 Child restraints 144 Driving 152 Starting 152 Brakes 156 Transmission operation 160 Vehicle loading 177 Trailer towing 180 Recreational towing 184 Roadside Emergencies 185 Getting roadside assistance 185 Hazard flasher switch 186 Fuel pump shut-off switch 186 Fuses and relays 187 Changing tires 192 Jump starting 197 Wrecker towing 202 Customer Assistance 204 The dispute settlement board 206 Utilizing the mediation/arbitration 209 Getting assistance outside the U.S. and Canada 210 Ordering additional owner’s literature 211 Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 212 2
  • 3. Table of Contents Cleaning 213 Underbody preservation 217 Maintenance and Specifications 219 Hood 220 Engine compartment 221 Engine oil 222 Battery 225 Fuel information 233 Air filter(s) 248 Part numbers 254 Refill capacities 254 Lubricant specifications 257 Engine data 259 Vehicle dimensions 260 Accessories 263 Index 266 All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation. Copyright © 2002 Ford Motor Company 3
  • 4. Introduction The following warning may be required by California law: CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it. For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the following website: • In the United States: www.ford.com • In Canada: www.ford.ca • In Australia: www.ford.com.au • In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx Additional owner information is given in separate publications. This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available. Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle. Fuel pump shut-off switch In the event of an accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g. collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Roadside emergencies chapter. 4
  • 5. SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION Warning symbols in this guide Introduction How can you reduce the risk of personal injury and prevent possible damage to others, your vehicle and its equipment? In this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be read and observed. Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol, it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before touching or attempting adjustment of any kind. Protecting the environment We must all play our part in protecting the environment. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol. BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE There are no particular guidelines for breaking-in your vehicle. During the first 1 600 km (1 000 miles) of driving, vary speeds frequently. This is recommended to give the moving parts a chance to break in. 5
  • 6. Introduction SPECIAL NOTICES Emission warranty The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 7.3L Power Stroke Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide. Special instructions For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls. By operating other electronic equipment (e.g. mobile telephone without exterior aerial) electromagnetic fields can occur which can cause malfunctions of the vehicle electronics. Therefore you should observe the instructions of the equipment manufacturers. Please read the section Air bag in the Seating and safety restraints chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury. Front seat mounted rear-facing child or baby seats should NEVER be used in front of a passenger side air bag. 6
  • 7. Introduction Notice to owners of diesel-powered vehicles Read the 7.3 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for information regarding correct operation and maintenance of your diesel-powered light truck. Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. Snowplowing The Excursion is not recommended for snowplow installation. Ford makes no representation as to the suitability of the Excursion for snowplowing, in particular regarding the potential for exceeding vehicle weight limits, airbag (SRS) deployment sensitivity, vehicle crash integrity, or powertrain durability. The Snowplow Package Option is not available. Middle East/North Africa vehicle specific information For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the ones that are described in this Owner Guide; therefore, a supplement has been supplied that complements this book. By referring to the pages in the provided supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this Owner Guide for all other required information and warnings. 7
  • 8. These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle. Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide Fasten Safety Belt Air Bag-Front Air Bag-Side Child Seat Child Seat Installation Warning Child Seat Tether Anchorage Brake System Anti-Lock Brake System Brake Fluid - Non-Petroleum Based Traction Control AdvanceTrac Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe Windshield Defrost/Demist Rear Window Defrost/Demist Power Windows Front/Rear Introduction 8
  • 9. Vehicle Symbol Glossary Power Window Lockout Child Safety Door Lock/Unlock Interior Luggage Compartment Release Symbol Panic Alarm Engine Oil Engine Coolant Engine Coolant Temperature Do Not Open When Hot Battery Avoid Smoking, Flames, or Sparks Battery Acid Explosive Gas Fan Warning Power Steering Fluid Maintain Correct Fluid Level MAX MIN Emission System Engine Air Filter Passenger Compartment Air Filter Jack Check fuel cap Low tire warning Introduction 9
  • 10. Instrument Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions. Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, have the respective system inspected immediately. Service engine soon Illuminates briefly to ensure the system is functional. If it comes on after the engine is started, one of the engine’s emission control systems may be malfunctioning. The light may illuminate without a driveability concern being noted. The vehicle will usually be drivable and will not require towing. Light turns on solid: Temporary malfunctions may cause the light to illuminate. Examples are: 1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. 2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel. 3. The fuel cap may not have been properly installed and securely tightened. These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with high quality fuel of the recommended octane and/or properly installing and securely tightening the fuel cap. After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the light should turn off. (A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is required. If the light remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. 10
  • 11. Instrument Cluster Light is blinking: Engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter. You should drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire. Check fuel cap (if equipped) Illuminates when the fuel cap is not installed correctly. Check the fuel cap for proper installation. When the fuel filler cap is properly re-installed, the light(s) will turn off after a period of normal driving. Continuing to operate the vehicle with the check fuel cap light on, or a mis-installed fuel cap can activate the Service Engine Soon/Check Engine warning light. It may take a long period of time for the system to detect an improperly installed fuel filler cap. For more information, refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and specifications chapter. Check gage Illuminates when the engine coolant CHECK temperature is high, the engine oil pressure is low or the fuel gauge is GAGE at or near empty. Refer to Engine coolant temperature gauge, Engine oil pressure gauge or Fuel gauge in this chapter for more information. Brake system warning To confirm the brake system warning light is functional, it will momentarily illuminate when the ignition is turned to the ON position (alternatively for some vehicles when the ignition is moved from the ON position to START position, the light will momentarily illuminate prior to reaching the START 11
  • 12. position). It also illuminates if the parking brake is engaged. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate as described, seek service immediately. Illumination after the parking brake is released indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction and the brake system should be serviced immediately by a qualified technician. Refer to Brakes in the Driving chapter for more information. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) To confirm the anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light is functional it will momentarily illuminate when the ABS ignition is turned to the ON position (alternatively for some vehicles when the ignition is moved from the ON position to the START position, the light will momentarily illuminate just prior to reaching the START position). If the light remains on, continues to flash or fails to illuminate, have the ABS serviced immediately. If the ABS light remains on, it means the anti-lock brake system has malfunctioned and is disabled, however, the normal brake system will still function unless the brake warning light also remains illuminated and parking brake is off. Refer to Brakes in the Driving chapter for more information. Safety belt Illuminates to remind you to fasten your safety belts. For more information, refer to the Seating and safety restraints chapter. Air bag readiness Illuminates to confirm that the air bags (front or side) are operational. If the light fails to illuminate, continues to flash or remains on, have the system serviced immediately. Charging system Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. Instrument Cluster 12
  • 13. Low fuel Illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at, or near, empty (refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter for more information). Speed control Illuminates when the speed control is activated. Instrument Cluster Transmission control indicator light (TCIL) Illuminates when the overdrive function of the transmission has been turned OFF using the OVERDRIVE Transmission Control Switch (TCS). Refer to the Driving chapter for transmission function and operation. If the light does not come on or if the light flashes steadily, have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, damage to the transmission could occur. Turn signals Illuminates when the turn signals or the hazard lights are turned on. If the lights stay on continuously or flash faster, check for a burned-out bulb. High beams Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on. 13
  • 14. Instrument Cluster Door ajar Illuminates when any door is open (or not fully closed). SecuriLock anti-theft system Illuminates when the anti-theft alarm system is armed. If the light fails to illuminate, continues to flash or remains on, have the system serviced. Refer to SecuriLock passive anti-theft system in the Locks and Security chapter. Four wheel drive indicator Illuminates when the four-wheel drive is engaged. If the light 4x4 continues to flash have the system serviced. Four wheel drive low Illuminates when four-wheel drive low is engaged. If the light continues LOW to flash have the system serviced. RANGE Safety belt warning chime Sounds to remind you to fasten your safety belts. BeltMinder chime Sounds intermittently to remind you to fasten your safety belts. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) warning chime Sounds when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system (front or side airbags) has been detected. Have the supplemental restraint system inspected immediately. Headlamps on warning chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the key is removed from the ignition and the driver’s door is opened. 14
  • 15. Instrument Cluster Key-in-ignition warning chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition and the driver’s door is opened. Parking brake ON warning chime Sounds when the parking brake is set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 5 Km (3 mph). GAUGES Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates the temperature of the engine coolant. At normal operating temperature, the needle remains within the normal area (the area between the “H” and “C”). If it enters the red section, the engine is overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine immediately and let the engine cool. Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and specifications chapter. Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. Steam and scalding liquid from a hot cooling system can burn you badly. This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant, not the coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level the gauge indication will not be accurate. 15
  • 16. Instrument Cluster Engine oil pressure gauge Indicates engine oil pressure. At normal operating temperature, the needle will be in the normal range (the area between the “L” and “H”); if the needle goes below the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and switch off the engine immediately. Check the oil level. Add oil if needed (refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and specifications chapter). If the oil level is correct, have your vehicle checked at your dealership or by a qualified technician. Transmission fluid temperature gauge If the gauge is in the: White area (normal) - the transmission fluid is within the normal operating temperature (between “H” and “C”). Yellow area (warning) — the transmission fluid is higher than normal operating temperature. This can be caused by special operation conditions (i.e. towing or off road use). Refer to Special Operating Conditions in the scheduled maintenance guide for instructions. Operating the transmission for extended periods of time with the gauge in the yellow area may cause internal transmission damage. Altering the severity of the driving conditions is recommended to lower the transmission temperature into the normal range. 16
  • 17. Red area (over temperature) — the transmission fluid is overheating. Stop the vehicle to allow the temperature to return to normal range. Instrument Cluster If the gauge is operating in the Yellow or Red area, stop the vehicle and verify the airflow is not restricted such as snow or debris blocking airflow through the grill. If the gauge continues to show high temperatures, see your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. Fuel gauge Displays approximately how much fuel is in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade. When refueling the vehicle from empty indication, the amount of fuel that can be added will be less than the advertised capacity due to the reserve fuel. The FUEL DOOR icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located. 17
  • 18. Speedometer Indicates the current vehicle speed. Odometer Registers the total kilometers (miles) of the vehicle. Trip odometer Registers the kilometers (miles) of individual journeys. Press and release the reset button (this represents the trip mode). Press and hold the button for three seconds to reset. Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine. P RNDD 2 Instrument Cluster 18
  • 19. Entertainment Systems PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO/CASSETTE/SINGLE CD DISC FM 1 AMC BL RF EJ TAPE CD DOLBY B NR ST SCAN BASS TREB SEL BAL VOL PUSH ON AM FM SEEK TUNE REW FF FADE EJ MUTE AUTO CLK SIDE 1-2 COMP SHUFFLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 Your vehicle is equipped with a delayed accessory feature. This feature enables the audio playing media to continue playing up to 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off, or until a door is opened. Volume/power control Press the control to turn the audio system on or off. Audio power can also be turned on by pressing the AM/FM select control or the TAPE/CD select control. Turn control to raise or lower volume. VOL - PUSH ON VOL - PUSH ON If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on. 19
  • 20. Bass adjust The bass adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system’s bass output. Press the BASS control then press: • to decrease the bass output and • to increase the bass output. Treble adjust The treble adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system’s treble output. Press the TREB control then press: • to decrease the treble output and • to increase the treble output. Speaker balance adjust Speaker sound distribution can be adjusted between the right and left speakers. Press the BAL control then press: • to shift sound to the left and • to shift sound to the right. Speaker fade adjust Speaker sound can be adjusted between the front and rear speakers. Press the FADE control then press: • to shift the sound to the front and • to shift the sound to the rear. BASS TREB BASS TREB BAL FADE BAL FADE Entertainment Systems 20
  • 21. Entertainment Systems Seek function The seek function control works in radio, tape or CD mode. Seek function in radio mode • Press to find the next listenable station down the frequency band. • Press to find the next listenable station up the frequency band. Seek function in tape mode • Press to listen to the previous selection on the tape. • Press to listen to the next selection on the tape. Seek function in CD mode • Press to seek to the previous track of the disc. If a selection has been playing for three seconds or more and you press , the CD will replay that selection from the beginning. • Press to seek forward to the next track of the disc. After the last track has been completed, the first track of the current disc will automatically replay. Scan function The scan function works in radio, tape or CD mode. SCAN Scan function in radio mode Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations on the frequency band. Press the control again to stop the scan mode. Scan function in tape mode Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the tape. (The tape scans in a forward direction. At the end of the tape’s first side, direction automatically reverses to the opposite side of the tape.) To stop on a particular selection, press the control again. Scan function in CD mode Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the CD. (The CD scans in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first track at the end of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press the control again. 21
  • 22. Entertainment Systems AM/FM select The AM/FM select control works in radio, tape and CD modes. AM FM AM/FM select in radio mode This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations. AM/FM select in tape mode Press this control to stop tape play and begin radio play. AM/FM select in CD mode Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio play. Radio station memory preset The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2). Setting memory preset stations 1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM select control. AM FM 2. Select a station. Refer to Tune adjust or Seek function for more information on selecting a station. 3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the sound returns, indicating the station is held in memory of the control you selected. Autoset memory preset Autoset allows you to set strong radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations. This feature is helpful on trips when you travel between cities with different radio stations. 22
  • 23. Entertainment Systems Starting autoset memory preset 1. Select a frequency using the AM/FM select controls. 2. Press the control. 3. When the first six strong stations are filled, the station stored in memory preset control 1 will start playing. If there are less than six strong stations available on the frequency band, the remaining memory preset controls will all store the last strong station available. These stations are temporarily stored in the memory preset controls (until deactivated) and are accessed in the same manner as your original presets. To deactivate autoset and return to your audio system’s manually set memory stations, press the AUTO control again. Setting the clock To set the hour, press and hold the CLK control and press SEEK: • to decrease hours and • to increase hours. To set the minute, press and hold the CLK control and press TUNE: AUTO CLK AUTO CLK AUTO CLK 23
  • 24. • Entertainment Systems to decrease minutes and • to increase minutes. If your vehicle has a separate clock, (other than the digital radio display), the CLK control will not function in the above manner. The CLK control will allow you to switch between media display mode (radio station, stereo information, AUTO etc.) and clock display mode (time). When in clock mode, the media information will display for 10 CLK seconds, when the radio is turned on, and then revert to clock information. Any time that the media is changed, (new radio station, etc.), the media information will again display for 10 seconds before reverting back to the clock. In media mode, the media information will always be displayed. Tune adjust The tune control works in radio mode. Tune adjust in radio mode • Press to move to the next frequency down the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). Hold the control to move through the frequencies quickly. • Press to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement. Tape/CD select • To begin tape play (with a tape TAPE CD loaded into the audio system) while in the radio or CD mode, press the TAPE control. Press the button during rewind or fast forward to stop the rewind or fast forward function. 24
  • 25. • Entertainment Systems To begin CD play (if CD is loaded), press the CD control. The first track of the disc will begin playing. If returning from radio or tape mode, CD play will begin where it stopped last. CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm (4.75 in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your dealer for further information. Rewind The rewind control works in tape and CD modes. • In tape mode, radio play will continue until rewind is stopped (with the TAPE control) or the beginning of the tape is reached. • In CD mode, pressing the REW control rewinds the CD within the current track. Fast forward The fast forward control works in tape and CD modes. • In the tape mode, tape direction will automatically reverse when the end of the tape is reached. • In CD mode, pressing the FF control fast forwards the CD within the current track. TAPE CD REW 1 FF 2 25
  • 26. Tape direction select Press to play the alternate side of the tape. Eject function Press the EJ control to stop and eject a tape. Press the EJ control to stop and eject a CD. SIDE 1-2 3 EJ EJ Dolby noise reduction Dolby noise reduction operates in tape mode. Dolby noise reduction reduces the amount of hiss and 4 static during tape playback. Press the control to activate (and deactivate) the Dolby noise reduction. Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Compression adjust Compression adjust brings soft and loud CD passages together for a COMP more consistent listening level. 5 Press the COMP control to activate and deactivate compression adjust. Entertainment Systems 26
  • 27. Entertainment Systems Shuffle feature The shuffle feature operates in CD mode and plays all tracks in random SHUFFLE order. 6 Press the SHUFFLE control to start this feature. Random order play will continue until the SHUFFLE control is pressed again. Mute mode Press the MUTE control to mute the playing media. Press the MUTE control again to return to the EJ playing media. MUTE PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO IN DASH SIX CD RADIO SCAN DISC SHUF COMP MUTE TUNE SEEK REW FF LOAD EJ BASS BAL SEL TREB FADE PUSH ON AM CD 1 2 3 4 5 6 MENU FM Your vehicle is equipped with a delayed accessory feature. This feature enables the audio playing media to continue playing up to 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off, or until a door is opened. 27
  • 28. Volume/power control Press the control to turn the audio system on or off. Turn the control to raise or lower volume. If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on. Speed sensitive volume With this feature, radio volume changes automatically and slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise. The recommended level for speed sensitive volume is from level 1 through level 3. Level 0 turns the speed sensitive volume off and level 7 is the maximum setting. To engage the speed sensitive volume feature, press and hold the volume control for five seconds (with the radio on), then press: • to increase volume compensation. • to decrease or shut off the volume compensation. The selected level will appear in the display. Bass adjust The bass adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system’s bass output. Press the BASS control. Use the SEL control to increase or decrease the amount of bass. PUSH ON PUSH ON SEL SEL BASS TREB + Entertainment Systems 28
  • 29. Entertainment Systems Treble adjust The treble adjust control allows you to increase or decrease the audio system’s treble output. Press the TREB control. Use the SEL control to increase or decrease the amount of treble. Speaker balance adjust Speaker sound distribution can be adjusted between the right and left speakers. Press the BAL control. Use the SEL control to adjust the sound between the left and right speakers. Speaker fade adjust Speaker sound can be adjusted between the front and rear speakers. Press the FADE control. Use the SEL control to adjust the sound between the front and rear speakers. Seek function The seek function works in radio or CD mode. Seek function in radio mode • Press to find the next listenable station down the frequency band. SEEK DOWN will display. • Press to find the next listenable station up the frequency band. SEEK UP will display. SEL BASS TREB + BAL FADE + SEL BAL FADE + SEL 29
  • 30. Entertainment Systems Seek function in CD mode • Press to seek to the previous track of the current disc. If the beginning of the disc is reached, the CD player seeks to the beginning of the last track on the current disc and begins playing. • Press to seek forward to the next track of the current disc. After the last track has been completed, the first track of the current disc will automatically replay. Scan function The scan function works in radio or CD mode. Scan function in radio mode Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations on the frequency band. Press the SCAN control again to stop the scan mode. Scan function in CD mode Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the CD. (The CD scans in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first track at the end of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press the control again. AM/FM select The AM/FM select control works in radio and CD modes. AM CD FM AM/FM select in radio mode This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations. AM/FM select in CD mode Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio play. Radio station memory preset The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2). 30
  • 31. Entertainment Systems Setting memory preset stations 1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM select control. Press the AM/FM control to toggle between AM, FM1, or FM2. 2. Press the SEEK control to access the next listenable station up or down the frequency band. Press the TUNE control to go up or down the listening band in individual increments. 3. Select a station. Refer to Seek function for more information on selecting a station. 4. Press and hold a memory preset control. The playing media will mute momentarily. When the sound returns, the station is held in memory on the control you selected. The display will read SAVED. Autostore Autostore allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations. This feature is helpful on trips when you travel between cities with different radio stations. Starting autostore 1. Press and momentarily hold the AM/FM control. 2. AUTOSET will flash in the display AM as the frequency band is scrolled FM CD through. 3. When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in memory preset control 1 will start playing. If there are fewer than six strong stations available on the frequency band, the remaining memory preset controls will all store the last strong station available. To deactivate autoset and return to your audio system’s manually set memory stations, press the AM/FM control again. 31
  • 32. Setting the clock Press the MENU control until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINUTE is displayed. (The menu mode must be engaged to enable clock mode). Use the SEL control to manually set the time. • Press to increase hours/minutes. • Press to decrease hours/minutes. Press the MENU control again to disengage the clock mode. Tune/disc adjust The tune control works in radio or CD mode. Tune adjust in radio mode • Press to move to the next frequency down the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). Hold the control to move through the frequencies quickly. • Press to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement. Disc adjust for CD mode • Press to select the previous disc. (Play will begin on the first track of the disc unless shuffle mode is engaged.) Refer to Shuffle feature for more information. Hold the control to continue reversing through the discs. • Press to select the next disc. Hold the control to fast-forward through the remaining discs. SEL DISC TUNE DISC TUNE Entertainment Systems 32
  • 33. Entertainment Systems CD select CD mode may be entered by pressing the CD control and the AM FM CD LOAD control. Load the CD into the audio system. The first track of the disc will begin playing. After that, CD play will begin where it stopped last. If an alternative CD is desired, press the corresponding preset control (1–6) of a loaded CD, or press the TUNE control to access the other loaded CDs. NO CD will display if the CD control is activated when there is not a CD present in the audio system. NO CD will illuminate in the display if the CD control and a present number (that is currently empty) are pressed. The system will play the next available disc. CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm (4.75 in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your dealer for further information. Display description Six circles are always lit in the digital display. These signify the six CD slots in the audio system. When a disc is loaded into a particular slot (1–6), the number inside that specific circle lights. If the circle is empty, there is no CD in that particular slot. Rewind The rewind control works in CD modes. REW FF Press and hold the REW control until the desired selection is reached. If the beginning of the disc is reached, the CD will begin play at the first track. Release the control to disengage rewind mode. 33
  • 34. When in rewind mode, your audio system will automatically lower the volume level of the playing media. Fast forward The fast forward control works in REW FF CD modes. Press and hold the FF control until the desired selection is reached. If the end of the disc is reached, the CD will return to the first track. Release the control to disengage fast forward mode. When in fast forward mode, your audio system will automatically lower the volume level of the playing media. Load The load feature allows you to load LOAD single CDs into the player internal to the radio. This six disc CD player is equipped with a CD door. Compact discs should only be inserted into the player after the door has been opened by the player. Do not attempt to force the door open. Compact discs should only be loaded by pressing the LOAD control. Press the LOAD control. (You can choose which slot will be loaded by pressing the desired preset number. If you do not choose a slot, the system will choose the next available one.) Wait until the CD door opens. Load the CD into the player. LOADING CD# is displayed. When the CD has been loaded, the door will close and the CD will begin to play. For example, to load a CD into slot 2, press the LOAD control and then press preset 2. Auto load This feature allows you to autoload LOAD up to 6 discs into the multi disc CD player internal to the radio. Press and hold the LOAD control until AUTOLOAD # is displayed. The CD door will open. Load the desired discs, one at a time. The CD is loaded into position and the audio system will display CD#. Each time the CD door opens, INSERT CD# is displayed. The door will close and the player will move to the next slot after each disc has been loaded. The process is repeated until all 6 slots are full. The audio system plays Entertainment Systems 34
  • 35. Entertainment Systems the last CD loaded and the display is updated. If some slots are already full and autoload is activated, the system will fill all empty slots. Eject Press the EJ control to stop and eject a CD. You can choose which EJ CD will be ejected by pressing the EJ control and the desired preset number (1–6). For example, to eject CD 2, press the EJ control and then press the preset 2 control. If you do not choose a specific CD, the player will eject the current CD. If a CD is ejected and not removed from the door of the CD player, the player will automatically reload the CD. This feature may be used when the ignition is ON or OFF. Auto eject Press and momentarily hold the EJ control to engage auto eject. All CDs EJ which are present in the player will be ejected one at a time. If a CD is ejected and not removed from the door of the CD player, the player will automatically reload the CD. This feature may be used when the ignition is ON or OFF. Shuffle feature Press the SHUF control until the desired shuffle mode is displayed. The audio system will then engage the desired shuffle mode. When engaged, the shuffle feature has two different modes: SHUFFLE DISC and SHUFFLE TRK. SHUFFLE DISC randomly plays tracks from all the discs presently in the audio system. SHUFFLE TRK plays all the tracks on the current disc in random order. Compression feature The compression feature operates in CD mode and brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level. Press the COMP control until COMP ON is displayed. 35
  • 36. Entertainment Systems Menu mode The MENU control allows you to access many different features within your audio system. There are three sets of menus available depending upon which mode or feature is activated. While in FM mode, two menus are available. If RDS is turned OFF, you can access the following: • SELECT HOURS — Refer to Setting the clock. • SELECT MINUTES — Refer to Setting the clock. • RDS OFF — Refer to Radio data system feature. If RDS is turned ON, you can access the following: • TRAFFIC ON/OFF-Refer to Traffic announcements. • FIND type-Refer to Program type. • SHOW (NAME, TYPE, NONE)- Refer to Radio data system feature. • RDS ON— Refer to Radio data system feature. • SELECT HOURS — Refer to Setting the clock. • SELECT MINUTES —Refer to Setting the clock. When in CD mode, you can access: SELECT HOURS, SELECT MINUTES or COMP ON/OFF. SELECT HOURS, SELECT MINUTES— Allows you to adjust the hours and minutes. Refer to Setting the clock. TRAFFIC ON/OFF— Traffic announcements can be programmed as local or distant. Refer to Traffic announcements. RDS ON/OFF— This feature allows your audio system to receive text information from RDS-equipped FM radio stations. Refer to Radio Data System feature. FIND type — Allows you to select your desired FM program type and search for that selection. SHOW — Allows you to select from NAME (displays the name of the radio station), TYPE (displays the RDS program type: rock, jazz, etc.), or NONE (deactivates the RDS display). 36
  • 37. Entertainment Systems Traffic announcements This feature allows you to hear traffic announcements. When in this mode, traffic announcements will MENU + SEL interrupt radio and CD play. When in FM mode and RDS is activated, press the MENU until TRAFFIC OFF displays. Press the SEL control to engage the feature. The display will read TRAFFIC ON. This feature also allows you to control the volume of traffic announcements. With the display reading TRAFFIC ON, adjust the volume using the volume control to the desired level. The volume level will show at the bottom of the display. Interrupting traffic announcements will be at the selected volume level. To disengage the feature, press the MENU control until TRAFFIC ON displays. Press the SEL control. The display will read TRAFFIC OFF. RDS traffic seek feature When in traffic mode, you can use the SEEK feature to seek up or down the listenable traffic capable frequencies. With the RDS activated, press MENU until TRAFFIC ON is displayed. Press and hold the SEEK control until the desired selection is reached. The feature disengages when the control is released. RDS traffic scan feature When in traffic mode, you can use the SCAN feature to scan up the frequency band for listenable traffic capable frequencies. With the RDS activated, press the MENU control until TRAFFIC ON is displayed. Press the SCAN control. SCAN TRAFFIC will display. The audio system will scan to all traffic capable frequencies. If no valid stations are found after one pass, the scan function is cancelled and NOT FOUND displays. Traffic announcements are not available in most U.S. markets. Radio data system (RDS) feature This feature allows your audio system to receive text information from RDS-equipped FM radio MENU + SEL stations. 37
  • 38. To activate RDS: • When in FM mode, press the MENU control until RDS OFF displays. • Press the SEL control to engage this feature (RDS ON). RDS features: Once the RDS feature is on, press the MENU control to scroll through the following selections: Traffic announcements This feature allows you to hear traffic announcements while in CD mode. These announcements are broadcast by traffic capable RDS stations. When in this mode, traffic announcements will interrupt radio and CD play. • Press the MENU control until TRAFFIC is displayed. • Press the SEL control to engage the feature. The display will read TRAFFIC ON. This feature also allows you to control the volume of traffic announcements. With the display reading TRAFFIC ON, adjust the volume using the volume control to the desired level. The volume level will show at the bottom of the display. Interrupting traffic announcements will be at the selected volume level. To disengage the feature, press the MENU control until TRAFFIC ON displays. Press the SEL control. The display will read TRAFFIC OFF. Traffic announcements are not available in most U.S. markets. Program type This feature allows you to search for RDS stations selectively by their program type. Press the MENU control until FIND program type is displayed. MENU + SEL Use the SEL control to select the program type. With the feature on, use the SEEK or SCAN control to find the desired program type from the following selections: • Classic • Country • Info • Jazz Entertainment Systems 38
  • 39. • Oldies • R B • Religious • Rock • Soft • Top 40 Show This feature allows you to select the type of RDS broadcast information the radio will regularly show in the display. Entertainment Systems MENU + SEL With RDS activated, press the MENU control until SHOW is displayed. MENU + SEL Use the SEL control to select TYPE (displays the RDS program type: rock, jazz, etc), NAME (displays the name of the radio station) or NONE (deactivates the RDS display). Mute mode Press the control to mute the playing media. Press the control again to return to the playing media. REAR SEAT CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED) The Rear Seat Controls (RSC) allow VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK the rear seat passengers to operate the radio, tape, CD, or CD changer (if equipped). 39
  • 40. REW FF SIDE 1-2 COMP SHUFFLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 To turn on the rear seat controls, press the memory preset controls 3 and 5 at the same time. The will appear in the radio display. Pressing 3 and 5 at the same time again will turn the rear seat controls off. If there is a discrepancy between the rear seat and the front audio controls, (i.e, both trying to listen to the same playing media), the front audio system will receive the desired selection. ADJUSTING THE VOLUME Press the + control to increase volume. VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK Press the — control to decrease volume. From the RSC controls, the speaker volume can not be set higher than the current volume radio setting. Once in headphone mode, the RSC volume controls will only change volume in the headphones to a desired level and will have no effect on the front speakers (muting the speakers will not mute the headphones). USING HEADPHONES/PERSONAL AUDIO SYSTEM The Personal Audio System allows VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK the rear seat passengers to listen to one media source (radio, tape, CD, or CD changer if equipped) while the front seat passengers listen to another. However, front and rear seat passengers can not listen to two different radio stations simultaneously. Plug a 3.5 mm headphone (not included) into either one of the two jacks. Press the / control to operate the headphones. The rear speakers will cut out once the speaker on/off control is pressed. A soft audible sound may be heard from the rear speakers. The front Entertainment Systems 40
  • 41. Entertainment Systems speaker will remain playing for the front passengers. Press the / control again to deactivate the headphones (Personal Audio System). MEDIA SELECT Push the MEDIA control to toggle between AM, FM1, FM2, tape, CD, or CD changer (if equipped). MEMORY PRESET CONTROL Push the MEM control successively to allow rear seat passengers to scroll through the six memory presets in AM, FM1, or FM2. Push the MEM control in CD changer mode (if equipped) to advance to the next disc. SEEK FUNCTION • Press to find the next listenable station down the frequency band. • Press to find the next listenable station up the frequency band. VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK In tape mode, use the SEEK function to access the next or previous selection. In CD or CD changer mode (if equipped), use the SEEK function to access the next or the previous selection. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT DVD SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) Your vehicle may be equipped with a Rear Seat Entertainment DVD System which allows you to watch DVDs, play music CDs and to plug in and play video game systems. Please review this material to become familiar with the system features and safety information. 41
  • 42. Entertainment Systems DVD player controls V L 7 8 9 1 2 R AUX DISP MENU NEXT PREV REV FWD ENTER + DIM - 6 5 4 3 1. MAIN control • NEXT — Press to access the next track on the CD, the next chapter on the DVD, or to go up in cursor mode. • PREV — Press to access the previous track on the CD, the previous chapter on the DVD, or to go down in cursor mode. • REV — Press to reverse in CD and DVD play modes or to move the cursor left in the menu active mode. • FWD —Press to advance in CD and DVD play modes or to move the cursor right in the menu active mode. 2. PLAY/PAUSE control Press to playback or pause the DVD. 3. DIM control Adjust to increase (+) or decrease (-) the amount of brightness on the screen. 4. ENTER control Press to select the function pointed to within the active menu. May also be used by some user interactive discs during movie play. 5. MENU control Press to bring up the disc menu. 6. AUX control Press to switch DVD player from play mode to auxiliary mode. 42
  • 43. Entertainment Systems 7. Auxiliary jacks Insert lines for standard video game players. 8. STOP/EJECT control Press once to stop DVD play. Press again to eject the DVD. 9. DISPLAY (DISP) control Press to enable on screen display of player menu and user display adjustments. DVD control features Menu control Press the MENU control to enter into MENU mode. This allows you to move and choose within the DVD generated menu structure. Once in MENU mode: • Press the NEXT control to move the cursor one position upward • Press the PREV control to move the cursor one position downward • Press the REV control to move the cursor left one position NEXT PREV REV FWD NEXT PREV REV FWD NEXT PREV REV FWD 43
  • 44. • Press the FWD control to move the cursor right one position NEXT PREV REV FWD Next/Previous control The NEXT (up) and PREV (down) controls allow you to access the NEXT next or previous track on a CD or REV FWD chapter on a DVD. When pressed, PREV the playing audio will mute momentarily while the next chapter is accessed. Press and hold to advance or reverse multiple tracks or chapters. REV/ FWD control Press the REV/FWD control during playback mode to reverse or NEXT advance at a normal speed. Press REV FWD the REV/FWD control again to PREV disengage the reverse/advance action and return to normal playback mode Enter control The ENTER control allows you to select items when in MENU mode. ENTER Press the ENTER control to select the desired highlighted item. CD play mode Press NEXT during CD play to advance to the next track. If you NEXT press NEXT during the last track, REV FWD the system will wrap around to the PREV first track and begin play. Slow play mode To enter slow play mode, press the PLAY/PAUSE control. Once the system is in pause mode, press the Entertainment Systems 44
  • 45. FWD or REV control for slow motion playback. Three different speeds are available depending on how long the control is held. Press the control once for slow motion playback. Press the control again to disengage slow motion playback. Press the control a third time to return to normal playback mode. User menu mode To adjust the display setting, press DISP once and the player menu will appear. Press DISP again to adjust the display setting. Use the arrow controls and the ENTER controls to select the various screen settings. (Available screen selections are 16x9, Normal, 4x3 and Zoom). The DVD player will read the disc type and configure the display accordingly. Some movies have a wide screen movie format to fit a normal 4x3 screen. In this case, the movie will have black bars on the top and bottom. When shown on the screen, it may appear as a small screen within the wide screen. It may be desirable to view this type of movie in zoom mode. To enter zoom mode, press DISP once for the player menu and again to adjust the display setting. Select zoom from the screen settings by using the arrow and ENTER controls. Remote control + 1 2 DISP MNU ENT - 8 1. REWIND control Press to reverse the direction of the DVD movie. DISP REV FWD VOL SEEK MODE MEMORY 3 4 5 6 7 Entertainment Systems 45
  • 46. Entertainment Systems 2. FAST FORWARD control Press to advance the direction of the DVD movie. 3. PLAY/STOP control Press to play or stop the DVD movie. 4. SEEK control Press to reverse or advance the chapter of the DVD or the track of the CD. 5. DISPLAY (DISP) control Press to enable on screen display of player menu and user display adjustments. Once the display is on, use SEEK to choose the desired screen setting. 6. ENTER (ENT) MEMORY control In DVD playback mode, press the control to select a designated item in menu mode. In stop mode, press the control to select the next memory preset. 7. MNU/MODE control In DVD playback mode, press to access the disc menu. In stop mode, press to change to rear seat mode (i.e. AM, FM, CD . . . ) 8. VOLUME control Press to increase (+) or decrease (-) volume level. Battery replacement Batteries are supplied with the remote control unit. Since all batteries have a limited shelf life, replace them when the unit fails to control the DVD player. There is a LED indicator light on the remote control that will illuminate when any control is pressed. Slide the battery cover off as shown on the remote control to access the batteries. The remote control unit uses two AAA batteries. 46
  • 47. Entertainment Systems Rear seat controls The DVD system controls allow the rear seat passengers to operate the radio, tape, CD, DVD or CD DJ (if equipped). Press the / control to activate the rear controls. will appear in the radio display. Adjusting the volume from the rear seat controls The volume control allows the rear seat passengers to adjust the volume level of the desired selection. Press the + control to increase the volume. Press the - control to decrease the volume. When in single play mode, the speaker volume cannot be set higher than the current volume radio setting. When in headphone mode, the rear seat controls can change the volume setting to any desired level. Mode select Press the control to toggle between AM, FM1, FM2, TAPE, CD, CDDJ, DVD and AUX modes (if equipped). When selected, the media source will illuminate in the radio display. • AM AM radio frequency band • FM1, FM2 FM radio frequency bands • TAPE cassette tape (if equipped) • CD single cd player (if equipped) • CDDJ VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK 47
  • 48. Entertainment Systems compact disc changer (if equipped) • DVD/AUX DVD player / Auxiliary line input Memory preset control In radio mode, press the MEMORY control successively to scroll through the memory presets in AM, FM1 or FM2. VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK In CDDJ mode (if equipped), press the MEMORY control to select the next disc in the compact disc changer. Play will begin with the first track. Seek function The SEEK control has varying functions depending on which mode VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK is enabled. In radio mode (AM, FM1, FM2): Press the control to find the next station down the frequency band. Press the control to find the next station up the frequency band. In tape mode (if equipped), press the control to access the previous selection or for the next selection. In CD mode (if equipped), press the control to access the previous track or for the next track. In CDDJ mode (if equipped), press the control to access the previous track or to select the next track of the current disc. In AUX/DVD mode, the SEEK control is not operational. 48
  • 49. Entertainment Systems Using headphones/Personal Audio Feature Single play mode will allow all VOLUME MEDIA MEM SEEK passengers to listen to the same media source through all speakers. The Personal Audio Feature allows the front seat passengers to listen to one source (radio, TAPE, CD, CDDJ, DVD, or AUX) while the rear seat passengers listen to another. To activate from the rear seat controls, press the / control and plug a 3.5mm headphone into the headphone jack. With the headphones ON, the rear speakers will not operate. In this mode, the headphones are enabled. The rear seat passengers have control over the desired volume levels. Press the MODE control to toggle to the desired media source. Use the SEEK, VOLUME and MEM controls to make any desired adjustments. Press the / control again to engage the rear speakers and deactivate the Personal Audio Feature. In this mode, you can adjust the audio output to all system speakers — front and rear together. The rear seat passengers can not raise the volume of the system above the level on the front radio bezel. Parental control Your Entertainment System allows you to have control over the rear seat controls. The DVD system is automatically activated when the ignition is ON. This enables rear seat passengers to utilize the Rear Seat Controls (RSC). Once the headphone mode is activated, the symbol will appear in the radio display. Press the memory preset controls 3 and 5 simultaneously on the front audio controls to disable the rear seat controls. They will remain disabled until the front seat passengers “enable” them again by simultaneously pressing the 3 and 5 preset controls. The settings of the front seat controls will always override those of the rear seat controls. Press the memory preset controls 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 and 4 simultaneously to toggle between single play and the Personal Audio Feature. 49
  • 50. Entertainment Systems Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) flip-down screen The screen rotates down to view and up into housing to store when not in use. Be sure the screen is latched into the housing when being stored. 1. 7.0” (diagonal) active matrix liquid crystal display (LCD) screen. 2. Screen housing. 3. Dimmer switch. Toggle to increase/decrease the brightness of the screen. Playback and format • The DVD player of your Rear Seat Entertainment DVD System can only be used in the “playback” mode. (The DVD player does not offer a record feature.) • The system plays standard CDs or DVDs. • The DVD player is only capable of playback of DVDs and CDs. The player is not compatible with CDR/RW media. Rear Seat Entertainment DVD System protection circuits High temperature sensor circuit • Excessively high temperatures may cause damage to the DVD player. • When the temperature of the DVD player becomes too hot, the high temperature sensor circuit stops machine operation. DVD/CD will illuminate in the radio display. 50
  • 51. Entertainment Systems General operating tips • When the engine is not running, use the system sparingly otherwise it will run the battery down. • When the ignition is turned to OFF, the Rear Seat Entertainment DVD System is also turned OFF. When the ignition is turned ON, the system will begin playback from the last selected media source when the play control is pressed. • To disable the DVD player, simultaneously press the 3 and 5 memory presets on the radio face. To enable the DVD player again, press the 3 and 5 presets simultaneously. • The DVD player is only capable of reading the bottom side of a disc. When inserting a single sided disc, the label should be up. For a multi-sided disc, the desired play side should be down when the disc is inserted into the player. • The DVD player is only capable of playback of DVDs and CDs. The player is not compatible with CDR/RW media. • DVDs are formatted by regions. This DVD system can only play region 1 DVDs (DVDs manufactured in U.S and Canada). This unit is designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm (4.75 in) audio compact discs and DVDs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford DVD/CD players. Irregular shaped discs, discs with a scratch protection film attached, and discs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the player. The label may peel and cause the disc to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade discs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ball point pens may damage discs. Please contact your dealer for further information. Inserting a CD/DVD Inserting a CD/DVD into the DVD player automatically turns the power ON and playback should begin. The counter is automatically reset to 0:00:00. Ensure that the overhead screen is down for viewing. Removing a CD/DVD 1. Press the STOP/EJECT control to stop playback. 2. Press the STOP/EJECT control again to eject the CD/DVD. 51
  • 52. Entertainment Systems If the CD/DVD is not removed within the allotted time, the system will pull the CD/DVD back into the system for safety purposes. If the CD/DVD will not eject from the system, press and hold the EJECT control for approximately 2 seconds. The disc should eject whether the vehicle ignition is ON or OFF. Playing a video game/auxiliary device 1. Connect the video line from your video game device to the YELLOW auxiliary input jack. 2. Connect the left and right audio lines to the WHITE and RED auxiliary input jacks respectively. 3. Press the MODE control until DVD/CD AUX (no disc in player) or DVD/CD play (disc in player) illuminates in the radio display. If a disc is in the system, playback should begin. To enable the aux inputs, press the STOP control or press the AUX control on the DVD player. On-screen indicators Each time a control is pressed, the operational status of the DVD player is shown on the screen. The following are some possible indicators: 1. CD track 2. DVD chapter 3. SYSTEM COUNTER — displays current viewing time of desired media. (HOURS:MINUTES:SECONDS) 4. DVD/ CD STATUS (PLAY/FF/REW/PAUSE) 5. AUDIO OUTPUT (not changeable) 52
  • 53. Entertainment Systems 6. Subtitles (specific language type - English or Spanish, dependent of disc capability and ON/OFF selection.) 7. Camera angle (of picture) - Adjustable with cursor controls and ENTER control. Safety information Read all of the safety and operating instructions before operating the system and retain for future reference. Do not attempt to service, repair or modify the Rear Seat Entertainment DVD System. See your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. Do not insert foreign objects into the DVD compartment. The front glass on the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen may break when hit with a hard surface. If the glass breaks, do not touch the liquid crystalline material. In case of contact with skin, wash immediately with soap and water. Do not expose the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen to direct sunlight or intensive ultraviolet rays for extensive periods of time. Ultraviolet rays deteriorate the liquid crystal. Be sure to review User Manuals for video games and video game equipment when used as auxiliary inputs for your Rear Seat Entertainment DVD System. Do not operate video games or video equipment if the power cords and/or cables are broken, split or damaged. Carefully place cords and/or cables where they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation of seats and/or compartments. Disconnect video games and video equipment power cords and/or cables when not in use. Avoid touching auxiliary input jacks with your fingers. Do not blow on them or allow them to get wet or dirty. Do not clean any part of the DVD layer with benzene, paint thinner or any other solvent. Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Compliance Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln Mercury could void user’s authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide 53
  • 54. Entertainment Systems reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference and radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Care and service of the DVD player Environmental extremes DVD players that are subjected to harsh environmental conditions may be damaged or perform at less than maximum capability. To avoid these outcomes, whenever possible avoid exposing your DVD player to: • extremely hot or cold temperatures. • direct sunlight. • high humidity. • a dusty environment. • locations where strong magnetic fields are generated. Temperature extremes When the vehicle is parked under direct sunlight or in an extremely cold place for a long period of time, wait until the cabin temperature of the vehicle is at normal temperature before operating the system. Humidity and moisture condensation Moisture in the air will condense in the DVD player under extremely humid conditions or when moving from a cold place to a warm one. If moisture condensation occurs, do not insert a CD or DVD into the player. If one is already in the player, remove it. Turn the DVD player ON to dry the moisture before inserting a DVD. This could take an hour or more. Cleaning the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen Clean the display screen by applying a small amount of water or any ammonia-based household glass cleaner directly to a soft cloth. Rub the screen gently until the dust, dirt or fingerprints are removed. Do not spray the screen directly with water or glass cleaning solvents. Overspray from these fluids could drip down into the internal electronics of the screen and cause damage. Do not apply excessive pressure while cleaning the screen. 54
  • 55. Entertainment Systems Foreign substances Exercise care to prevent dirt and foreign objects from entering the DVD player compartment. Be especially careful not to spill liquids of any kind onto the media controls or into the videocassette player. If liquid is accidentally spilled onto the system, immediately turn the system OFF and consult a qualified service technician. Cleaning compact discs Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean discs only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe from the center out to the edge. Do not use circular motion. Cleaning the DVD player Clean the exterior of the DVD player with a damp cloth. Do not use CD cleaning kits or CDs intended to clean the interior of your DVD player. Use of these products may damage your system. CLEANING COMPACT DISCS Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean discs only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe from the center out to the edge. Do not use circular motion. CD AND CD CHANGER CARE • Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface. • Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time. • Do not insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer magazine. CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm (4.75 in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your dealer for further information. CLEANING CASSETTE PLAYER (IF EQUIPPED) Clean the tape player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after 10 to 12 hours of play in order to maintain the best sound and operation. 55
  • 56. Entertainment Systems CASSETTE AND CASSETTE PLAYER CARE • Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less. • Do not expose tapes to direct sunlight, high humidity, extreme heat or extreme cold. Allow tapes that may have been exposed to extreme temperatures to reach a moderate temperature before playing. • Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole and turning the hub. • Remove loose labels before inserting tapes. • Do not leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not being played. RADIO FREQUENCY INFORMATION The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission(CRTC) establish the frequencies AM and FM stations may use for their broadcasts. Allowable frequencies are: AM 530, 540–1600, 1610 kHz FM 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz Not all frequencies are used in a given area. RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS Three factors can affect radio reception: • Distance/strength. The further an FM signal travels, the weaker it is. The listenable range of the average FM station is approximately 40 km (24 miles). This range can be affected by “signal modulation.” Signal modulation is a process radio stations use to increase their strength/volume relative to other stations. • Terrain. Hills, mountains and tall buildings between your vehicle’s antenna and the radio station signal can cause FM reception problems. Static can be caused on AM stations by power lines, electric fences, traffic lights and thunderstorms. Moving away from an interfering structure (out of its “shadow”) returns your reception to normal. • Station overload. Weak signals are sometimes captured by stronger signals when you pass a broadcast tower. A stronger signal may temporarily overtake a weaker signal and play while the weak station frequency is displayed. The audio system automatically switches to single channel reception if it will improve the reception of a station normally received in stereo. AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTIES AND SERVICE Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your dealer or a qualified technician. 56
  • 57. Climate Controls MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Fan speed control Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. Temperature control knob Controls the temperature of the airflow inside the vehicle. Mode Selector Control Controls the direction of the airflow to the inside of the vehicle. OFF A/C MAX A/C OFF A/C MAX A/C The air conditioning compressor can operate in all modes except and . However, the air conditioning will only function if the outside temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher. Since the air conditioner removes considerable moisture from the air during operation, it is normal if clear water drips on the ground under the air conditioner drain while the system is working and even after you have stopped the vehicle. • MAX A/C – Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. MAX A/C is noisier than A/C but more economical and will cool the inside of the vehicle faster. Airflow will be from the instrument panel registers. This mode can also be used to prevent undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. • A/C – Uses outside air to cool the vehicle. It is quieter than MAX A/C but not as economical. Airflow will be from the instrument panel registers. 57
  • 58. • Climate Controls (Panel) – Distributes outside air through the instrument panel registers. However, the air will not be cooled below the outside temperature because the air conditioning does not operate in this mode. • OFF – Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate. For short periods of time only, use this mode to prevent undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. • (Panel and floor) – Distributes outside air through the instrument panel registers and the floor ducts. Heating and air conditioning capabilities are provided in this mode. For added customer comfort, when the temperature control knob is anywhere in between the full hot and full cold positions, the air distributed through the floor ducts will be slightly warmer than the air sent to the instrument panel registers. • (Floor) – Distributes outside air through the floor ducts. However, the air will not be cooled below the outside temperature because the air conditioning does not operate in this mode. • (Floor and defrost) – Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster ducts and the floor ducts. Heating and air conditioning capabilities are provided in this mode. For added customer comfort, the air distributed through the floor ducts will be slightly warmer than the air sent to the windshield defroster ducts. If the temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher, the air conditioner will automatically dehumidify the air to reduce fogging. • (Defrost) – Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster ducts. It can be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield. If the temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher, the air conditioner will automatically dehumidify the air to reduce fogging. Operating tips • In humid weather conditions, place the climate control system in Defrost mode before driving. This will reduce fogging on your windshield. Once the windshield has been cleared, operate the climate control system as desired. • To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in cold weather conditions, don’t drive with the climate control system in the OFF or MAX A/C position. • To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in warm weather conditions, don’t drive with the climate control system in the OFF position. 58
  • 59. • Climate Controls Under normal weather conditions, your vehicle’s climate control system should be left in any position other than the MAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe” through the outside air inlet duct. • Under snowy or dirty weather conditions, your vehicle’s climate control system should be left in the OFF position when the vehicle is parked. This allows the climate control system to be free from contamination of outside pollutants. • If your vehicle has been parked with the windows closed during warm weather conditions, the air conditioner will perform more efficiently in cooling the vehicle if driven for two or three minutes with the windows open. This will force most of the hot, stale air out of the vehicle. Once the vehicle has been “aired out”, operate the climate control system as desired. • Do not put objects under the front seat which may interfere with the airflow to the rear seats (if equipped). • Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area (at the bottom of the windshield and underneath the hood). • Do not place objects over the defroster outlets. These objects can block airflow and reduce visibility through your windshield. Avoid placing small objects on top of the instrument panel. These objects may fall down into the defroster outlets and block airflow, in addition to, damaging the climate control system. To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather conditions: 1. Select the position that distributes air through the Panel and Floor. 2. Set the temperature control to full heat. 3. Set the fan speed to full fan. 4. Direct the outer panel vents towards the side windows. 5. To increase airflow to the outer panel vents, close the central panel vents. Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop. 59
  • 60. Climate Controls ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (EATC) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) 1. A/C control 2. Windshield defrost control 3. Recirculated air control 4. Fan speed control 5. Windshield and floor control 6. Floor control 7. Panel and floor control 8. Panel control 9. OFF control 10. AUTO control 11. External temperature control 12. Temperature control The EATC system will maintain a selected temperature and automatically control airflow. You can override automatic operation with any of the override controls, the fan speed control or the steering wheel controls (if equipped). 60
  • 61. Turning the EATC on Climate Controls Press AUTO, any of the override controls or the fan speed control. The EATC will only operate when the vehicle is running. Turning the EATC system off Press OFF. Automatic operation Press AUTO and select the desired temperature. The selected temperature and the word AUTO will appear in the display window. The EATC system will either heat or cool to achieve the selected temperature. The system will automatically determine fan speed, airflow location and if outside air or recirculated air is required. When in AUTO and weather conditions require heat, the EATC system directs the majority of the airflow to the floor area. The system will allow some airflow through the windshield defroster ducts to reduce window fogging. However, if the engine is not warm enough to provide heat, the fan will be at a low speed and the airflow will be directed to the windshield. In approximately 31⁄2 minutes or less, the fan speed will start to increase and the airflow location will change to the floor. If unusual conditions exist (i.e.-window fogging, etc.), the manual override controls allow you to select airflow locations and the fan control allows you to adjust fan speed as necessary. 61
  • 62. Climate Controls Temperature selection The display window indicates the selected temperature, function (AUTO, A/C, ) or one of the manual override controls) and manual control of fan speed ( ). To control the temperature, select any temperature between 16°C (60°F) and 32°C (90°F) by pressing the blue (cooler) or red (warmer) controls. Temperature conversion Press AUTO and at the same time (for one second) to switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius. 62
  • 63. Fan speed ( ) Climate Controls When AUTO is pressed, fan speed is adjusted automatically for existing conditions. You can override fan speed at any time. To control fan speed manually, press the fan control to cancel the automatic fan speed operation. Press the control up for higher fan speed or down for lower fan speed. The display will show ( ) and a a bar graph to indicate manual fan speed operation and relative speed. To return to automatic fan operation, press AUTO. A/C control Used to manually enable or disable the operation of the air conditioning in all modes except . In all modes, the air conditioning will only function if the outside temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher. When manual A/C is selected, A/C will be displayed in the display window. In , if the outside temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher, the air conditioner will automatically dehumidify the air to reduce window fogging. However, A/C will not be displayed in the display window. The air conditioning compressor can operate in all modes except OFF. However, the air conditioning will only function if the outside temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher. Since the air conditioner removes considerable moisture from the air during operation, it is normal if clear water drips on the ground under the air conditioner drain while the system is working and even after you have stopped the vehicle. 63
  • 64. Climate Controls When AUTO is selected, the A/C operates automatically for existing conditions and A/C will be displayed in the display window. If A/C is selected while in AUTO operation, A/C will not be displayed in the display window and the EATC system will remain in AUTO operation. However, the EATC system will operate without the use of the air conditioning. To return to automatic air conditioning operation, press AUTO. Recirculation control Used to manually enable or disable the operation of the recirculated air operation in all modes except . The use of recirculated air when the air conditioning is operating helps to reduce the amount of time to cool down the interior of the vehicle in very hot conditions. Recirculated air may also help to keep undesired outside odors from reaching the vehicle interior. It is recommended to allow the EATC system to automatically control the selection of outside or recirculated air. The recirculation control cannot be selected in the , as interior fogging may occur. When AUTO is selected, the recirculated air feature operates automatically for existing conditions. However, will not be displayed in the display window. If is pressed again, will not be displayed in the display window and the EATC system will remain in AUTO operation. To return to automatic recirculated air operation, press AUTO. Do not leave the EATC system in recirculated air operation for extended periods of time while the system is in a heating mode or in cold/damp conditions as this may cause interior fogging of the front, side and rear windows. 64
  • 65. Manual override controls EXT TEMP AUTO OFF Climate Controls A/C F AUTO The manual override controls allow you to manually determine where airflow is directed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO. When a manual override control is selected, the EATC system will turn off the AUTO indicator in the display window and display those indicators of all of the operating controls. • - Distributes outside or recirculated air through the instrument panel registers. Heating and air conditioning capabilities are provided in this mode. The air will be heated or cooled based on the temperature selection. For added customer comfort, the system will allow some airflow through the floor ducts in this mode. • - Distributes outside or recirculated air through the instrument panel registers and the floor ducts. Heating and air conditioning capabilities are provided in this mode. For added customer comfort, when the temperature control is anywhere between full hot and full cold positions, the air distributed through the floor ducts will be slightly warmer than the air sent to the instrument panel registers. • - Distributes outside or recirculated air through the floor ducts. Heating and air conditioning capabilities are provided in this mode. The air will be heated or cooled based on the temperature selection. • - Distributes outside or recirculated air through the windshield defroster ducts and the floor ducts. Heating and air conditioning capabilities are provided in this mode. The air will be heated or cooled based on the temperature selection. For added customer comfort, the air distributed through the floor ducts will be slightly warmer than the air sent to the windshield defroster ducts. • - Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster ducts. This mode can be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield. If the outside air is about 6°C (43°F) or higher, the air conditioner will 65
  • 66. Climate Controls automatically dehumidify the air to reduce fogging. (Note that A/C will not be displayed in the display window.) Recirculation and A/C override controls cannot be selected. For added customer comfort, the system will allow some airflow through the floor ducts in this mode. Turning the EATC off OFF — Outside air is shut out. The fan, heating, and air conditioning will not operate. The outside temperature will still display when selected with the ignition in the ON position. Displaying outside temperature Press EXT TEMP to display the outside air temperature. It will be displayed until EXT TEMP is pressed again. If the temperature or fan speed is adjusted or if AUTO or modes are selected while the outside temperature is being displayed, the vehicle interior temperature will be displayed for four seconds. After four seconds have passed, the outside temperature will return to the display window. If the outside temperature is displayed while the EATC system is in the OFF mode and then is turned on, the outside temperature will return to the display window. The outside temperature reading is most accurate when the vehicle is moving. Higher readings may be obtained when the vehicle is not moving. The readings that you get may not agree with temperatures given on the radio due to differences in vehicle and station location. Operating tips • In humid weather conditions, place the climate control system in or rear defrost before driving. This will reduce fogging on your windshield. Once the windshield has been cleared, operate the climate control system as desired. • To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in cold weather conditions, don’t drive with the climate control system in the OFF position or . 66
  • 67. • Climate Controls To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in warm weather conditions, don’t drive with the climate control system in the OFF position. • Under normal weather conditions, your vehicle’s climate control system should be left in any position other than OFF or when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe” through the outside air inlet duct. • Under snowy or dirty weather conditions, your vehicle’s climate control system should be left in the OFF position when the vehicle is parked. This allows the climate control system to be free from contamination of outside pollutants. • If your vehicle has been parked with the windows closed during warm weather conditions, the air conditioner will perform more efficiently in cooling the vehicle if driven for two or three minutes with the windows open. This will force most of the hot, stale air out of the vehicle. Once the vehicle has been “aired out”, operate the climate control system as desired. • Don’t put objects under the front seat that will interfere with the airflow to the rear seats. • Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the area (at the bottom of the windshield and underneath the hood). • Do not place objects over the defroster outlets. These objects can block airflow and reduce your ability to see through your windshield. Avoid placing small objects on top of the instrument panel. These objects may fall down into the defroster outlets and block airflow, in addition to damaging the climate control system. To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather conditions: 1. Select 2. Set the temperature control to full heat 3. Select A/C 4. Set the fan speed to HI 5. Direct the outer panel vents towards to side windows 6. To increase airflow to the outer panel vents, close the central panel vents. Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel, as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop. 67
  • 68. AUXILIARY A/C-HEATER CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED) Depending upon the equipment package of your vehicle, your vehicle may be equipped with auxiliary climate controls. The auxiliary climate control feature provides increased capacity to quickly heat or cool the vehicle. Your auxiliary climate controls are located in the overhead console of the first row seating and in the headliner of the second row seating. The auxiliary climate controls are dependent on the main climate control system. If the main climate control system is in the OFF position, the auxiliary climate controls will not work. In addition, if the main climate control system is operating at a full cool temperature (MAX A/C or ), the auxiliary temperature control becomes non-functional and also operates at a full cool temperature. The auxiliary unit can be controlled either by the front seat using the front auxiliary control or by the rear seat passenger using the rear auxiliary control, but not both. To control the auxiliary unit using the rear control, the front control must be in the REAR position. Front auxiliary control Your auxiliary A/C controls are located in the overhead console. Turn the fan speed control to the desired speed. Turn the temperature control to regulate the air temperature. COOL WARM PANEL FLOOR OFF REAR HI OFF REAR HI COOL WARM Climate Controls 68
  • 69. Climate Controls Turn the mode selector control to determine the airflow location. When FLOOR is selected, airflow will be directed through the floor register in the third row passenger seating. When PANEL is selected, airflow is directed through the overhead registers of the second and third row seating. To blend airflow between each location, select any position between PANEL and FLOOR. Rear auxiliary climate controls The rear auxiliary climate controls are located in the headliner of the second row seating. To control the auxiliary unit using the rear auxiliary climate control, the front auxiliary climate control must be in the REAR position. Turn the fan speed control to the desired speed. Turn the temperature control to regulate the air temperature. PANEL FLOOR OFF LO HI COOL WARM PANEL FLOOR OFF LO HI COOL WARM 69
  • 70. Climate Controls Turn the mode selector control to determine the airflow location. When FLOOR is selected, airflow will be directed through the floor register in the third row passenger seating. When PANEL is selected, airflow is directed through the overhead registers of the second and third row seating. To blend airflow between each location, select any position between PANEL and FLOOR. REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER The rear defroster control is located on the instrument panel. Press the rear defroster control to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. • A small LED will illuminate when the rear defroster is activated. PANEL FLOOR The ignition must be in the ON position to operate the rear window defroster. The defroster turns off automatically after 10 minutes or when the ignition is turned to the OFF position. To manually turn off the defroster before 10 minutes have passed, push the control again. Activating the rear window defroster will also activate the heated mirrors (if equipped). For more information refer to Heated outside mirrors in the Driver controls chapter. 70
  • 71. HEADLAMP CONTROL Rotate the headlamp control to the first position to turn on the parking lamps. Rotate to the second position to turn on the headlamps. A Autolamp control (if equipped) The autolamp system provides light sensitive automatic on-off control of A the exterior lights normally controlled by the headlamp control. The autolamp system also keeps the lights on for approximately 20 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to OFF. To change the delay time of the autolamp feature, do the following: 1. Start with the ignition in OFF and the autolamps selected. 2. Deselect the autolamps. 3. Put the ignition in RUN. 4. Put the ignition in OFF. 5. Select the autolamps. Steps 2 through 5 must be performed within a 10 second period. At this point, the headlamps and parking lamps will turn on. 6. Deselect the autolamps after the desired autolamp delay time (maximum of 3 minutes). At this point, the headlamps and parking lamps will turn off. Lights 71
  • 72. Foglamp control (if equipped) The headlamp control also operates the foglamps. The foglamps can be turned on only when the headlamp control is in the and position and the high beams are not turned on. Pull headlamp control towards you to turn foglamps on. The foglamp indicator light will illuminate if the ignition is in the RUN position. Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped) Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output. To activate: • the ignition must be in the ON position and • the headlamp control is in the OFF or Parking lamps position. Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system does not activate with your tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision. High beams Push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate. Pull the lever towards you to deactivate. Flash to pass Pull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate. A Lights 72
  • 73. PANEL DIMMER CONTROL Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel and all applicable switches in the vehicle during headlamp and parklamp operation. Move the control to the full upright position, past detent, to turn on the interior lamps. Move the control to the full down position, past detent, to prevent the interior lights from illuminating when the doors are opened. AIMING THE HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant. If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by a qualified service technician. TURN SIGNAL CONTROL • Push down to activate the left turn signal. • Push up to activate the right turn signal. • In DRL equipped vehicles, use of the turn signals will shut off the highbeams in daytime driving. INTERIOR LAMPS Dome/Map lamps (if equipped) The map lamps and controls are located on the dome lamp. Press the controls on either side of each map lamp to activate the lamps. Lights 73
  • 74. Lights Rear courtesy/reading lamps • Second row courtesy/reading lamp • Third row courtesy/reading lamp The courtesy lamps light when: • any door is opened. • the instrument panel dimmer switch is held up until the courtesy lamps come on. • any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is OFF. The reading lamps can be turned on by pressing the rocker control. Rear dome lamp The dome lamp lights when: • any door is opened (and switch is in middle position). • the instrument panel dimmer switch is held up until the courtesy lamps come on. • any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is OFF (and switch is in the middle position). With the ignition key in the ACC or ON position, the rear dome lamp can be turned ON or OFF by sliding the control. 74
  • 75. Lights BULBS Replacing exterior bulbs Check the operation of the following lamps frequently: • Headlamps • High-mount brakelamp • Brakelamps • Turn signal lamps • License plate lamp • Tail lamps • Back-up lamps Do not remove lamp bulbs unless they can be replaced immediately with new ones. If a bulb is removed for an extended period of time, contaminants may enter the lamp housings and affect lamp performance. Using the right bulbs Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an “E” for Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time. Function Number of bulbs Trade number Headlamps 2 9007 Park/turn lamp 2 3157 AK Sidemarker lamp 2 194 Foglamp 2 899 Tail/stop lamp 2 3157 K Backup lamp 2 3156K High-mount brakelamp 3 912 Rear dome lamp 1 921 Map/dome lamp 2 578 Second row reading lamp 2 578 Third row reading lamp 2 211-2 License lamp 2 168 All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted. To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer 75
  • 76. Lights Interior bulbs Check the operation of the following interior bulbs frequently: • dome lamps • map lamps • second row reading lamps • third row reading lamp For bulb replacement, see a qualified service technician or your dealer. Replacing headlamp bulbs 1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position. 2. Open the hood. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling rearward. 4. Remove bulb retainer ring by turning it counterclockwise about 1⁄4 turn, then slide the ring off the plastic base. 5. Without turning, carefully pull bulb out of headlamp assembly. Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated. 6. Insert the glass end of the new bulb into the headlamp assembly. When the grooves in the plastic base are aligned, push the bulb into the lamp assembly until the plastic base contacts the rear of the lamp assembly. 7. Install bulb retaining ring over the plastic base and lock the ring into the socket by turning it clockwise until you feel a “stop.” 8. Connect the electrical connector into the rear of the plastic base until it “snaps.” 76
  • 77. Replacing front parking/turn signal bulbs 1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position. 2. Open the hood. 3. Remove the two screws and carefully disengage parking lamp/turn signal assembly from the vehicle. 4. Rotate bulb socket counterclockwise about 1⁄4 turn and remove from lamp assembly. 5. Carefully pull bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb. 6. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning clockwise. 7. Align the lamp assembly on the vehicle. 8. Install two screws on parking lamp/turn signal assembly. Lights 77
  • 78. Lights Replacing foglamp bulbs 1. Rotate the foglamp bulb counterclockwise and remove from foglamp (the rear side of the foglamp is shown). 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the foglamp bulb. Install the new bulb in reverse order. Replacing tail lamp/turn/backup lamp bulbs The tail lamp/turn/backup lamp bulbs are located in the same portion of the tail lamp assembly, one just below the other. Follow the same steps to replace either bulb: 1. Remove the four screws and the lamp assembly from vehicle. 2. Rotate bulb socket counterclockwise about 1⁄4 turn and remove from lamp assembly. 3. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb. 4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning clockwise. 5. Install the lamp assembly and secure with four screws. 78
  • 79. Replacing high-mount brakelamp bulbs To remove the brakelamp assembly: 1. Remove the two screws and lamp assembly from vehicle. 2. Remove the bulb socket from lamp assembly by rotating it 45 degrees. 3. Carefully pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb. Lights To install the brakelamp assembly: 1. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate 45 degrees. 2. Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle and secure with two screws. Replacing license plate lamp bulbs The license plate bulbs are located behind the rear bumper. To change the license plate lamp bulbs: 1. Reach behind the rear bumper to locate the bulb socket. 2. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove. 3. Pull out the old bulb from socket and push in the new bulb. 4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise. 79
  • 80. Driver Controls WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER CONTROLS Rotate the windshield wiper control to the desired interval, low or high speed position. The bars of varying length are for intermittent wipers. When in this position rotate the control upward for fast intervals and downward for slow intervals. Push (tap) the end of the stalk briefly for a single swipe (no wash). Push and hold the end of the stalk to activate washer. The wash cycle will continue for up to ten seconds or until released. After release, there will be three clearing wipes. Speed dependent wipers When the windshield wiper control is set on the intermittent settings, speed-sensitive front wipers automatically adjust as the vehicle’s speed changes. Rear window wiper/washer controls For rear wiper operation, rotate the rear window wiper and washer control to the desired position. Select: INT 1 — 3.5 second interval rear wiper. INT 2 — 10.5 second interval rear wiper. OFF — Rear wiper and washer off. For rear wash cycle, rotate (and hold as desired) the rear wiper/washer control to either position. From either position, the control will automatically return to the INT2 or OFF position. 80
  • 81. Driver Controls Windshield wiper blades Check the wiper blades for wear at least twice a year or when they seem less effective. Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades. Checking the wiper blades If the wiper blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and wiper blades using undiluted windshield wiper solution or a mild detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clean water. To avoid damaging the blades, do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner or other solvents. Changing the wiper blades To replace the wiper blades: 1. Pull the wiper arm away from the windshield and lock into the service position. 2. Turn the blade at an angle from the wiper arm. Push the lock pin manually to release the blade and pull the wiper blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm. 3. Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard. Rear window wiper blade Refer to Windshield wiper blades in this section for more information on rear wiper blades. 81
  • 82. Driver Controls TILT STEERING WHEEL Pull the tilt steering control toward you to move the steering wheel up or down. Hold the control while adjusting the wheel to the desired position, then release the control to lock the steering wheel in position. Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving. ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR Lift the mirror cover to turn on the visor mirror lamps. OVERHEAD CONSOLE The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to your option package. 82
  • 83. Forward storage bin (if equipped) Press the release control to open the storage compartment. The door will open slightly and can be moved to full open. The storage compartment may be used to secure sunglasses or a similar object. Driver Controls Installing a garage door opener (if equipped) The storage compartment can be converted to accommodate a variety of aftermarket garage door openers: • Place Velcro hook onto back side of aftermarket transmitter opposite of actuator control. • Place transmitter into storage compartment, control down. • Place the provided height adaptors onto the back of the storage bin door as needed. • Press the storage compartment door to activate the transmitter. Power quarter rear windows (if equipped) Press the portion of the VENT control to open the power rear quarter windows. Press the portion of the VENT control to close the power rear quarter windows. VENT VENT MODE E/M RESET AUXILIARY POWER POINT Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty. 83
  • 84. The power point is an additional power source for electrical accessories. Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter. Use the powerpoint. The maximum current draw of any single power point is 20 Amps. Exceeding this limit may result in a blown fuse. There are up to four auxiliary power points in the following locations: • Located on the instrument panel. • Located on the back side of the center console (Accessible from the second row seats). • Located in the left side storage compartment in the third row seating position. POWER POINT Driver Controls 84
  • 85. • Located on the right trim panel in the rear cargo area. Driver Controls POWER WINDOWS Press and hold the rocker switches to open and close windows. • Press the top portion of the rocker switch to close. • Press the bottom portion of the rocker switch to open. AUTO 85
  • 86. Driver Controls Express down • Press AUTO completely down and release quickly. The driver’s window will open fully. Depress again to stop window operation. One touch down can be deactivated during operation by pushing down on the top part of the driver power window control. AUTO Window lock The window lock feature allows only the driver to operate the power windows. To lock out all the window controls except for the driver’s press the left side of the control. Press the right side to restore the window controls. Accessory delay (if equipped) With accessory delay, the window switches may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until any door is opened. MIRRORS Automatic dimming inside rear view mirror (if equipped) Your vehicle is equipped with inside rear view mirror with an auto-dimming function. The electronic day/night mirror will change from the normal state to the non-glare state when bright lights (glare) reach the mirror. When the mirror detects bright light from front or behind, it will automatically adjust to minimize glare. 86
  • 87. Driver Controls Press the control located on the bottom of the mirror to turn the mirror on or off. The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the vehicle is placed in R (reverse)(when the mirror is on) to ensure a bright clear view when backing up. Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products. Power side view mirrors (if equipped) The ignition can be in any position to adjust the power side view mirrors. To adjust your mirrors: 1. Select L to adjust the left mirror or R to adjust the right mirror. 2. Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror. MIRRORS L R MIRRORS L R 3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place. 4. Adjust spotter mirrors (if equipped) manually. 87
  • 88. Driver Controls Heated outside mirrors R (if equipped) Both mirrors are heated automatically to remove ice, mist and fog when the rear window defrost is activated. Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors. Signal mirrors (if equipped) When the turn signal is activated, the appropriate mirror will show a blinking red arrow. The arrow provides an additional warning to other drivers that your vehicle is about to turn. Driver and passengers seated inside the vehicle cannot see the arrow. Fold-away mirrors Fold the side mirrors in carefully when driving through a narrow space, like an automatic car wash. The telescoping feature (if equipped) allows the mirror to extend approximately 76 mm (3 inches). 88
  • 89. POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS The accelerator and brake pedal should only be adjusted when the vehicle is stopped and the gearshift lever is in the P(Park) position. Press and hold the rocker control to adjust accelerator and brake pedal toward you or away from you. The adjustment allows for approximately 76 mm (3 inches) of maximum travel. Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on pedals or while the vehicle is moving. SPEED CONTROL To turn speed control on • Press ON. Vehicle speed cannot be controlled until the vehicle is traveling at or above 48 km/h (30 mph). Do not shift the gearshift lever into N (Neutral) with the speed control on. Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved. Driver Controls 89
  • 90. Driver Controls To turn speed control off • Press OFF or • Turn off the vehicle ignition. Once speed control is switched off, the previously programmed set speed will be erased. To set a speed • Press SET ACCEL. For speed control to operate, the speed control must be ON and the vehicle speed must be greater than 48 km/h (30 mph). If you drive up or down a steep hill, your vehicle speed may vary momentarily slower or faster than the set speed. This is normal. Speed control cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it increases above the set speed on a downhill. If your vehicle speed is faster than the set speed while driving on a downhill, you may want to shift to the next lower gear or apply the brakes to reduce your vehicle speed. If your vehicle slows down more than 16 km/h (10 mph) below your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage. This is normal. Pressing RES will re-engage it. Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved. 90
  • 91. To set a higher set speed • Press and hold SET ACCEL. Release the control when the desired vehicle speed is reached or • Press and release SET ACCEL to operate the Tap-Up function. Each press will increase the set speed by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) or • Accelerate with your accelerator pedal. When the desired vehicle speed is reached, press and release SET ACCEL. You can accelerate with the accelerator pedal at any time during speed control usage. Releasing the accelerator pedal will return your vehicle to the previously programmed set speed. To set a lower set speed • Press and hold COAST. Release the control when the desired speed is reached or • Press and release COAST to operate the Tap-Down function. Each press will decrease the set speed by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) or • Depress the brake pedal. When the desired vehicle speed is reached, press SET ACCEL. Driver Controls 91
  • 92. Driver Controls To disengage speed control • Depress the brake pedal. Disengaging the speed control will not erase the previously programmed set speed. Pressing OFF will erase the previously programmed set speed. To return to a previously set speed • Press RES/RESUME. For RES/RESUME to operate, the vehicle speed must be faster than 48 km/h (30 mph). 92
  • 93. Driver Controls Indicator light This light comes on when either the SET ACCEL or RES controls are pressed. The vehicle speed must be at or above 48 km/h (30 mph). It turns off when the speed control OFF control is pressed, the brake is applied, or the ignition is turned to the OFF position. STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED) These controls allow you to operate some radio and climate control features. Radio control features • Press BAND/MODE to select AM, FM1, FM2, TAPE or CD (if equipped). In Radio mode: • Press MEM/NEXT to select a preset station from memory. In Tape mode: • Press MEM/NEXT to listen to the next selection on the tape. In CD mode: • Press MEM/NEXT to listen to the next track on the disc. CRUISE NEXT MODE In any mode: • Press VOL up or down to adjust the volume. Climate control features • Press TEMP up or down to adjust temperature. • Press FAN up or down to adjust fan speed. TRIP COMPUTER (IF EQUIPPED) The trip computer tells you about the condition of your vehicle through a constant monitor of vehicle systems. You may select display features on the trip computer for a display of status. The appearance of your vehicle’s trip computer may differ depending on your vehicle’s option package, but the functions are the same. 93
  • 94. Driver Controls The trip computer only operates with the ignition in the ON position. Trip computer features follow: Selectable features English/metric display Press this control to change the trip computer display between metric and English units. MODE E/M RESET Mode control Each press of the MODE control will display a different feature as follows: Average fuel economy. The display will indicate the vehicle’s average fuel economy in liters/100 km (or miles/gallon) since the average fuel economy was last reset. If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled (miles traveled by gallons used), your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons: • your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up • differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at service stations MODE E/M RESET • variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another • rounding of the displayed values to the nearest liter (gallon) To reset the average fuel economy: 1. Press the MODE control repeatedly until average fuel economy is displayed (this is the only resettable display). 94
  • 95. 2. Press the E/M and MODE controls simultaneously. The display will illuminate the “AVG” indicator. While the indicator is lit, release both controls to reset the average fuel economy. Driver Controls MODE E/M RESET Fuel range. This displays the approximate number of kilometers (miles) left to drive before the fuel tank is empty. The indicated distance to empty may be inaccurate: • with sustained, drastic changes in fuel economy (such as trailer towing), but will eventually recover. • if the vehicle is started while parked on an incline. • if less than 30 liters (8 gallons) of fuel is added to the fuel tank. The fuel range function will flash for five seconds at the following distances based on fuel remaining and fuel economy calculations: • 80 km (50 miles) • 40 km (25 miles) • 16 km (10 miles) Outside air temperature (if equipped) The temperature can be displayed in Centigrade or Fahrenheit by pressing the E/M control. If the outside temperature falls MODE E/M below 3°C (38°F), the display will alternate from “ICE” to the outside RESET temperature at a two second rate for one minute. Off. In this mode the display is off. Compass The compass display is contained in the overhead console. The vehicle heading is displayed as one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW. The compass heading is displayed in average fuel economy modes, fuel range modes and temperature modes. 95
  • 96. The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic or metallic objects placed in or on the vehicle may also affect compass accuracy. Adjustments may need to be made to the zone and calibration of the compass. Compass zone adjustment 1. Determine which magnetic zone you are in for your geographic location by referring to the zone map. 2. Locate the trip computer on the overhead console. 3. Turn ignition to the ON position. 4. Press and hold both trip computer controls. After approximately four seconds, the trip computer will enter zone setting MODE E/M mode. Zone setting mode is indicated when the display lights the RESET “ZONE” indicator. 5. Release both controls. Subsequent pressing of either control will increment the zone. Press the control repeatedly until the correct zone setting for your geographic location is displayed on the trip computer. 6. To exit the zone setting mode and save the displayed zone in memory, release both controls for greater than five seconds. Compass calibration adjustment Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut. 1. Locate the trip computer located in the overhead console. 2. Start the vehicle. Driver Controls 96
  • 97. Driver Controls 3. Press and hold both trip computer controls. After approximately eight seconds, the trip computer will enter CAL mode. CAL mode is indicated when the MODE E/M display lights the “CAL” indicator. RESET 4. Release both controls. The display will return to normal, except that the CAL indicator will remain lit until the compass is sucessfully calibrated. 5. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle (less than 5 km/h [3 mph]) until the CAL indicator turns off. It may take up to five circles to complete calibration. 6. The compass is now calibrated. HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (IF EQUIPPED) The HomeLink Universal Transceiver, located on the driver’s visor, provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held transmitters with a single built-in device. This feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most current transmitters to operate garage doors, entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks, and home or office lighting. When programming your HomeLink Universal Transceiver to a garage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of the way to prevent potential harm or damage. Do not use the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515. Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink equipped vehicle purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed Homelink Universal Transceiver buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to Programming in this section. 97
  • 98. Driver Controls Programming Do not program the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with the vehicle parked in the garage. Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the ACC position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. 1. Press and hold the two outside buttons releasing only when the red light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not repeat step one to program additional hand-held transmitters to the remaining two HomeLink buttons. This will erase previously programmed hand-held transmitter signals into HomeLink. 2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 5–14 cm (1–3 inches) away from the HomeLink Universal Transceiver surface (located on your visor) while keeping the red light in view. 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter button. Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to replace step 3 with procedures noted in the “Gate Operator and Canadian Programming” section for Canadian residents. 4. The red light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Release both buttons when the red light flashes rapidly. (The rapid flashing light indicates acceptance of the hand-held transmitters’ radio frequency signals.) 5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button and observe the red light. If the light is a constant red, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released. Note: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with step 2 in the “Programming” section — do not repeat step 1. If the red light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a 98
  • 99. Driver Controls continuous red, proceed with steps 6 through 8 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device. 6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit). 7. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.) Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight. 8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the HomeLink button. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence again, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming. HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To program additional HomeLink buttons begin with step 2 in the “Programming” section. For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com. or 1–800–355–3515. Gate Operator Canadian Programming During programming, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting — not allowing enough time for HomeLink to accept the signal from the hand-held transmitter. After completing steps 1 and 2 outlined in the “Programming” section, replace step 3 with the following: Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent overheating. • Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button (note step 3 in the “Programming” section) while you press and release — every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has been accepted by the HomeLink. The red indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink accepts the radio frequency signal. • Proceed with step 4 in the “Programming” section. 99
  • 100. Driver Controls Operating the HomeLink Universal Transceiver To operate, simply press and release the appropriate HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained product (garage door, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, or home or office lighting etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still programming difficulties, contact Homelink at www.homelink.com.or 1–800–355–3515. Erasing HomeLink buttons To erase the three programmed buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased): • Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the red indicator light begins to flash-after 20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with step 2 in the “Programming” section. Reprogramming a single HomeLink button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do NOT release the button. 2. The red indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink button, follow step 2 in the “Programming” section. For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515. 100
  • 101. OVERDRIVE CONTROL Activating overdrive Driver Controls (Overdrive) is the normal drive position for the best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through all available gears. Deactivating overdrive Press the Transmission Control Switch (TCS) located on the end of the gearshift lever. The Transmission Control Indicator Light (TCIL) (the word OFF) will illuminate on the end of the gearshift lever. The transmission will operate in all gears except overdrive. To return to normal overdrive mode, press the Transmission Control Switch again. The TCIL (the word OFF) will no longer be illuminated. When you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the transmission will automatically return to normal (Overdrive) mode. For additional information about the gearshift lever and the transmission control switch operation refer to the Automatic Transmission Operation section of the Driving chapter. CENTER CONSOLE Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These include: • Utility compartment • Coin holder slots • Pen holder Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you in a collision. OVERDRIVE OVERDRIVE OFF 101
  • 102. • Driver Controls Utility compartment • Coin holder • Pen holder • Writing surface • Space for lap-top computer CARGO NET (IF EQUIPPED) The cargo net secures lightweight objects in the cargo area. Attach the net to the anchors provided. This net is not designed to restrain objects during a collision. TRIDOOR The TriDoor area is intended for cargo storage only, not for passengers. You can open and close the TriDoors from outside the vehicle only. You cannot open the liftgate or cargo doors from inside the vehicle. 102
  • 103. • To open the liftgate, unlock the liftgate (with the key, the key fob by pressing the UNLOCK button twice or power door locks) and pull up on the liftgate handle. • To open the cargo doors, open the liftgate, then open right cargo door first, using the handle on top of the door, then open the left cargo door using the handle on the side of the door. Driver Controls For wider loads, the cargo doors can be opened wider by unhooking the check straps from the door hinge. Make sure the check straps are reattached after loading and before closing the cargo doors.. • To close and lock the liftgate and cargo doors, close the left cargo door first, then the right cargo door, then pull down and close the liftgate. Lock the TriDoor with the key, key fob or the power door lock button. The cargo doors and liftgate should be closed before driving your vehicle. Leaving the liftgate and/or the cargo doors open could cause serious damage to the TriDoors and its components as well as allowing carbon monoxide to enter the vehicle. If you must drive with the cargo doors and liftgate window open, keep the vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle. LUGGAGE RACK Maximum load is 90 kg (200 lbs) on the roof rack structure, or 45 kg (100 lbs) on the roof panel slats, evenly distributed. If it is not possible to distribute the load, position it as far rearward as possible. Use adjustable tie down loops to secure the load. 103
  • 104. Driver Controls To adjust the cross-bar position: 1. Release the latch at both ends of the cross-bar (both cross-bars are adjustable). 2. Slide cross-bar to the desired location. 3. Tighten the latch at both ends of the cross-bar. To remove the cross-bar assembly from the roof rack side rails: 1. Loosen the latch at both ends of the cross-bar (both cross-bars are adjustable). 2. Slide cross-bar to the end of the rail. 3. Press down on the locking feature inside the side rail and slide the cross-bar over it. 4. Slide the assemblies off the end. To adjust the tie-downs: Use the adjustable tie downs to secure loads to the luggage carrier. 1. Completely loosen the slider knobs at each end of the cross rail. 2. Lift the cross-bar and re-set it at the desired position. Ensure that both sides of the cross rails are even. NOTE: Siding the cross-bar on the roof can cause damage to the roof paint. 3. Tighten the slider knobs at both ends of the cross-bar. 104
  • 105. Locks and Security KEYS The key operates all locks on your vehicle. In case of loss, replacement keys are available from your dealer. You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an emergency. Refer to SecuriLock Passive Anti-Theft System for more information. POWER DOOR LOCKS Press control to unlock all doors. Press control to lock all doors. Smart locks This feature prevents you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if your key is still in the ignition. When you open the driver’s door and you lock the vehicle with the power door locks, all the doors will lock, then the driver’s door will automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the ignition. The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, using the manual lock button on the door, locking the driver’s door with a key, or by using the lock button on the remote entry transmitter (if equipped). 105
  • 106. Locks and Security Childproof door locks When these locks are set, the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside. The rear doors can be opened from the outside when the doors are unlocked. The childproof locks are located on rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door. Setting the lock for one door will not automatically set the lock for both doors. Move lock control up to engage the childproof lock. Move control down to disengage childproof locks. REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM The remote entry system allows you to: • unlock all vehicle doors without a key • lock all vehicle doors without a key • activate the panic alarm The remote entry LOCK and UNLOCK operate with the ignition in the ON or OFF position and the transmission in P (Park). If there is any potential remote keyless entry problem with your vehicle, ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are brought to the dealership, to aid in troubleshooting. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 106
  • 107. Locks and Security Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Unlocking the doors Press this control to unlock the driver door. The interior lamps and running board lamps (if equipped) will illuminate. Press the control a second time within three seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. Locking the doors Press this control to lock all doors, liftgate or the driver’s door. If all doors are closed, the parking lamps will flash once. Press this control a second time within three seconds. The door(s) will lock again, the horn will chirp once and the parking lamps will flash once more. If any of the doors are ajar, the horn will make two quick chirps, reminding you to properly close all doors. Power door unlock disable feature (if equipped) This feature will help protect your vehicle from unauthorized entry. The UNLOCK function on the power door switch will not operate with the ignition OFF and twenty seconds after the doors are closed and electronically locked by the remote entry transmitter, key pad, or power door switch (if pressed while the door was open). 107
  • 108. Locks and Security The UNLOCK function will operate again after you unlock the vehicle using the remote entry transmitter or key pad, turn the ignition to ON, or open the door from inside of the vehicle. Power door unlock disable feature — activation/deactivation 1. Turn the ignition key to ON. 2. Press the UNLOCK button 3 times. 3. Turn the ignition key to OFF. 4. Press the UNLOCK button 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition key to ON. The horn will chirp. 6. Press the LOCK button 2 times. You should receive 2 horn chirps to indicate the system has been disabled, or 2 chirps followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled. Note: Pressing the power door LOCK button two times again will turn the feature ON if it was previously OFF, or OFF if it was previously ON. Every two consecutive presses of the LOCK button after successfully entering the configuration mode will change the enable/disable condition of the feature. 7. Turn ignition to OFF to exit programming. The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete. Sounding a panic alarm Press this control to activate the alarm. To deactivate the alarm, press the control again or turn the ignition to ACC or ON. Panic alarm will only operate with the ignition in the OFF position. Replacing the battery The remote transmitter is powered by one coin type three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent. Typical operating range will allow you to be up to 10 meters (33 feet) away from your vehicle. A decrease in operating range can be caused by the following factors: • Weather conditions 108
  • 109. • Nearby radio towers Locks and Security • Structures around the vehicle • Other vehicles parked next to the vehicle To replace the battery: 1. Twist a thin coin between the two halves of the transmitter near the key ring. DO NOT TAKE THE FRONT PART OF THE TRANSMITTER APART. 2. Place the positive (+) side of new battery in the same orientation. Refer to the diagram inside the transmitter unit. 3. Snap the two halves back together. Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter should operate normally after battery replacement. Replacing lost transmitters If a remote transmitter has been lost and you would like to remove it from the vehicle’s memory, or you would like to purchase additional remote transmitters and have them programmed to your vehicle: • Take all your vehicle’s transmitters to your dealer for programming, or • Perform the programming procedure yourself. Programming remote transmitters It is necessary to have all (maximum of four — original and/or new) of your remote transmitters available prior to beginning this procedure. To program the transmitters yourself: 109
  • 110. • Locks and Security Ensure the vehicle is unlocked. • Place the key in the ignition and turn from 2 (LOCK) to 3 (OFF) and cycle between 3 (OFF) and 4(ON) eight times in rapid succession (within 10 seconds) with the eighth turn ending in the 4 (ON) position. The doors will lock to confirm that programming mode has been entered. 3 2 1 5 4 • Within 20 seconds, program a remote transmitter by pressing any button on a transmitter. The doors will lock/unlock to confirm that the remote transmitter has been programmed. (If more than 20 seconds pass before pressing a remote transmitter button, the programming mode will exit and the procedure will have to be repeated.) • Repeat the previous step to program additional remote transmitters. The doors will lock/unlock to confirm that each remote transmitter has been programmed. • When you have completed programming the remote transmitters, turn the ignition to 3 (OFF) or wait 20 seconds. Again the doors will lock/unlock to confirm programming has been completed. Illuminated entry The illuminated entry system will turn on the interior lights when the remote transmitter unlock control is pressed. The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or if the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or after 25 seconds of illumination. The inside lights will not turn off if: • they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or • any door or liftgate is open. The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the OFF position, 10 minutes after if the dome lamp is off, and 30 minutes after if the dome lamp switch is left on. KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM With the keyless entry keypad, you can: • lock or unlock the vehicle doors without using the key. 110
  • 111. Locks and Security Your vehicle has a factory set 5 digit code that operates the keyless entry system. You can also program your own 5 digit personal entry code. The factory-set code is located: • on the owner’s wallet card in the glove compartment When pressing the controls on the keyless entry keypad, press the middle of the controls to ensure a good activation. Programming your own personal entry code To program your own code: 1. Enter factory set code (keypad will illuminate for five seconds when a key is pressed). 2. Press 1/2 control within five seconds of step 1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 3. Enter your personal 5 digit code. Enter each digit within five seconds of previous one. Do not set a code that includes five of the same number or presents them in sequential order. Thieves can easily figure out these types of codes. Your personal code does not replace the permanent code that the dealership gave you. You can use either code to unlock your vehicle. If a second personal code is entered, the module will erase it in favor of the new code. If you wish to erase your personal code, use the following instructions: 1. Enter factory set code. 2. Press 1/2 control within five seconds of step 1 and release. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 3. Within five seconds of step 2, press and hold the 1/2 control for two seconds. The system will now only respond to the factory set code. Unlocking the doors with the keyless entry system To unlock the driver’s door, enter either the factory-set code or personal code (each digit pressed within five seconds of the prior digit). The interior lamps will illuminate. 111
  • 112. Locks and Security To unlock all doors, enter the factory-set code or personal code (driver door unlocks) and press the 3/4 control within five seconds. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Locking the doors with the keyless entry system It is not necessary to first enter the factory or personal code prior to locking all doors. To lock all the doors: • Press the 7/8 and the 9/0 control at the same time. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Autolock This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the following conditions are met: • all doors are closed, and • the brake is pressed before reaching 8 km/h (5 mph), and • the ignition is in the RUN position and the vehicle is traveling more than 8 km/h (5 mph). Relock The autolock feature repeats when the following conditions are met: • any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the RUN position, and • the brake is pressed before reaching 8 km/h (5 mph), and • the vehicle is travleing more than 8 km/h (5 mph). Deactivating/activating autolock There are 3 methods to enable/disable this feature. One through your dealer, the second with a power door unlock/lock sequence and the third with the keypad. Before following the activation or deactivation procedures, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, ignition is off, and all vehicle doors, liftgate and cargo doors are closed. 112
  • 113. Locks and Security Keyless entry key pad procedure 1. Enter 5 digit entry code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 2. Press and hold 7/8 control 3. Press and release 3/4 control 4. Release 7/8 control. The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled. Power door unlock/lock procedure You must complete steps 1-7 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must wait 30 seconds. 1. Turn the ignition key to ON. 2. Press the power door unlock control three times. 3. Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. 4. Press the power door unlock control three times. 5. Turn the ignition back to ON. The horn will chirp. 6. Press the unlock control, then press the lock control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was activated. 7. Turn the ignition to OFF. The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete. Pressing the power door UNLOCK/LOCK button again will toggle the Autolock/Relock states. Turn ignition to OFF to exit programming. SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization system. This system is designed to prevent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection. 113
  • 114. Locks and Security THEFT INDICATOR The theft indicator is located on top of the instrument panel. • When the ignition is in the OFF position, the indicator will flash once every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning as a theft deterrent. • When the ignition is in the ON position, the indicator will glow for 3 seconds to indicate normal system functionality. If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system, the indicator will flash rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the ON position. If this occurs, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for service. Automatic arming The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position. The THEFT light in 3 the instrument cluster will flash every two seconds when the vehicle is armed. 2 1 5 4 Automatic disarming Switching the ignition to the 4 (ON) position with a coded key disarms the vehicle. The THEFT light will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. If the THEFT light stays on for an extended period of time or flashes rapidly, have the system serviced by your dealership or a qualified technician. Key information Your vehicle is supplied with two coded keys. Only a coded key will start your vehicle. Spare coded keys can be purchased from your dealership. Your dealership can program your key or you can “do it yourself.” Refer to Programming spare keys. Certain items may cause vehicle starting issues: Certain items may cause vehicle starting issues: • Large metallic objects 114
  • 115. • Locks and Security Electronic devices on the key chain that can be used to purchase gasoline or similar items • A second key on the same key ring as the coded key If any of these items are present, you need to keep these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These objects and devices cannot damage the coded key, but can cause a momentary “no start” condition if they are too close to the key during engine start. If a problem occurs, turn ignition OFF and restart the engine with all other objects on the key ring held away from the ignition key. Check to make sure the coded key is an approved Ford coded key. If your keys are lost or stolen you will need to do the following: • Use your spare key to start the vehicle, or • Have your vehicle towed to a dealership or a locksmith. The key codes will need to be erased from your vehicle and new key codes will need to be re-coded. Replacing coded keys can be very costly and you may want to store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to prevent an unforeseen inconvenience. The correct coded key must be used for your vehicle. The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no start” condition. If an unprogrammed key is used in the ignition it will cause a “no start” condition. Programming spare keys A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only SecuriLock keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure. If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must bring your vehicle to your dealership to have the spare coded key(s) programmed. Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin. 115
  • 116. 1. Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition from 1 4 (OFF) to 3 (ON) (maintain ignition 3 in 3 (ON) for at least one second, 5 but no more than ten seconds). 2 2. Turn ignition to 1 (OFF) then 2 (ACC) and remove the first coded key from the ignition. 1 3. Within ten seconds of removing the first coded key, insert the second previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition from 1 (OFF) to 3 (ON) (maintain ignition in 3 (ON) for at least one second but no more than ten seconds). 4. Turn the ignition to 1 (OFF) then 2 (ACC) and remove the second coded key from the ignition. 5. Within 10 seconds of removing the second coded key, insert the new unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition and turn the ignition from 1 (OFF) to 3 (ON) (maintain ignition in 3 (ON) for at least one second, but no more than ten seconds). This step will program your new key to a coded key. 6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this procedure from step 1. If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat steps 1 through 5. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your dealership to have the new spare key(s) programmed. Locks and Security 116
  • 117. SEATING Full bench seat (if equipped) • Lift the track release bar to move the seat forward or backward. Ensure that the seat is relatched into place. 60/40 split bench seat (if equipped) • Lift the release bar to move the seat forward or backward. Ensure the seat is relatched into place. • Pull the seatback handle up to recline the seat. Seating and Safety Restraints 117
  • 118. Seating and Safety Restraints Captain’s chair (if equipped) • Lift the track release bar to move the seat forward or rearward. Make sure that the seat is relatched into place. • Pull the seatback handle up to recline the seat. Memory seats and adjustable pedals (if equipped) This system allows automatic positioning of the driver seat and adjustable pedals to three programmable positions. The memory seat control is located on the driver door. • To program position one, move the driver seat to the desired position using the seat controls. Press the SET control. The SET control indicator light will briefly illuminate. While the light is illuminated, press control 1. • To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control 2. • To program position three, repeat the previous procedure but press controls 1 and 2 simultaneously. 118
  • 119. Seating and Safety Restraints A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in Park. A memory seat position may be programmed at any time. The memory seat positions are also recalled when you press your remote entry transmitter UNLOCK control. To program the memory seat to remote entry transmitter, refer to Remote entry system in the Controls and features chapter. Using the manual lumbar support Turn the lumbar support control toward the front of vehicle to move the lumbar support forward for more direct support. Turn the lumbar support control toward the rear of vehicle to move the lumbar support back for less direct support. Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped) Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving. Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring people in a collision or sudden stop. Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision. The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion. 119
  • 120. Seating and Safety Restraints Press to raise or lower the front portion of the seat cushion. Press to raise or lower the rear portion of the seat cushion. Press the control to move the seat forward, backward, up or down. Manual seat memory feature The manual adjust seat and seatback may lose their memory positions and not latch in the desired place. To reset the memory position, move the seat to the most forward position then push the seatback rearward until the seatback locks. This should ensure that the seatback is realigned to the desired rest position. 120
  • 121. Heated seats (if equipped) To operate the heated seats: • Push control to activate. • Push again to deactivate. Seating and Safety Restraints The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated. REAR SEATS Head restraints Your vehicle’s seats are equipped with head restraints which adjust up and down. The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head restraints, lift the head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close to that position as possible. Refer to the following to raise and lower the head restraints. Push or pull the head restraint to the desired position. 121
  • 122. Seating and Safety Restraints Rear folding seats (if equipped) Folding down rear seats into load floor Ensure that no objects such as books, purses or briefcases are on the floor in front of the second row seats before folding them down and insure the seat is fully latched rearward. For assistance, refer to the label located on the seat side shield. 1. Lift strap to release seat cushion. 2. Lift seat cushion up and rotate forward. 3. The headrest must be removed in order to fold the seatback down. Remove 2nd row seat headrest by pushing in both tabs while pulling up on headrest simultaneously. 122
  • 123. Seating and Safety Restraints 4. Stow headrest into the green caps found on the top of the seat cushion. 5. Lift the lower seat control and flip the seatback down. 123
  • 124. Seating and Safety Restraints 6. For bench seats only, lift up flap on seatback to release closeout panel. 7. For bench seats only, rotate panel to closeout the space between the seatback and the floor. Returning the seat to upright Insure the seat is pulled back to the locked position, whether the seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop. 1. For bench seats, rotate the closeout panel onto the seatback and secure with the retaining flap. 2. Lift the lower seat control. 3. Pull up on the seatback while lifting the handle to lift the seatback into the upright position. 124
  • 125. Seating and Safety Restraints 4. Remove headrest from storage position and return to 2nd row seatback. Push down headrest completely to secure. Reclining the second row seatback Locate the release handle located on the outboard side of the seat cushion and lift gently to allow the seatback to be adjusted to the desired location. Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision. Third row seat (if equipped) The third row seat is equipped with combination lap and shoulder belts in the outboard seating positions and a manual adjust tongue lap belt in the center seating position. For information on the proper operation of the safety restraints, refer to Safety Restraints in this chapter. The third row seat may be removed from the vehicle for additional cargo space. Accessing the third row seat Your vehicle is equipped with an easy entry second row seat feature which allows ready access to the third row seat. You may enter the third row seat through either rear side door. To reduce the risk of personal injury, the second row seat should not be left in the forward, E-Z entry position while the vehicle is in motion. Please ensure that the seat is in the upright, fully latched rearward position before putting the vehicle in motion. Refer to the warning label on the seat side shield. 125
  • 126. Seating and Safety Restraints 1. Rotate the upper seat control rearward while pushing the seatback toward the front of the vehicle. 2. Push the seatback toward the front of the vehicle. This releases the seat track and the seat will move forward. 3. After entering the 3rd row seat, pull back the 2nd row seatback until it latches at full rearward position. This will latch and lock the seatback and the seat track. Insure the seat is pulled back to the locked position, whether the seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop. Folding down the third row seat Pull the seat release lever located on the lower right side of the seatback while pushing the seatback down into the seat cushion. The seatback will latch into place. Pull the seat release lever to return the seatback into the upright seating position. Removing the third row seat From the rear of the vehicle, with the liftgate window and cargo doors open: 126
  • 127. Seating and Safety Restraints 1. Pull the seat release lever located on the lower right side of the seatback while pushing the seatback down onto the seat cushion. • The seatback will latch onto the cushion. 2. Lift the seat release bar located at the center of the seat near the floor to release the floor latches. 3. While pulling up on the release bar, lift the seat up and out of the floor tubs and roll seat rearward. 4. With assistance, lift the seat out of the vehicle. Installing the third row seat Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether the seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop. When reinstalling a rear seat in your vehicle it must be placed in its original position. Improper installation of the seat will prevent correct use of the safety belts and could increase the risk of injury. Refer to the warning label on the seat belt. For proper latching, ensure that the floor tubs are clear of debris. From the rear of the vehicle, with the liftgate open: 1. With assistance, lift the seat into the rear of the vehicle. Roll the seat forward and guide the front locators over the seat locator pins of the front floor tubs. • When the rear of the seat is 10–13 cm (4–5 in) above the rear pins, let the seat drop. This will ensure that the seat will properly latch into the floor. 2. Push up on the seat to verify that it is latched into the floor. 3. Verify that the safety belts can move freely on either side of the seat. 127
  • 128. Seating and Safety Restraints SAFETY RESTRAINTS Safety restraints precautions Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained. Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is provided. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt. Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person. Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints. 128
  • 129. Seating and Safety Restraints Combination lap and shoulder belts 1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. 2. To unfasten, push the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle. The front and rear outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. The front passenger and rear seat outboard safety belts have two types of locking modes described below: Vehicle sensitive mode The vehicle sensitive mode is the normal retractor mode, allowing free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers. The safety belt system can also be made to lock manually by quickly pulling on the shoulder belt. Automatic locking mode In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt. 129
  • 130. Seating and Safety Restraints When to use the automatic locking mode • Any time a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front or outboard rear seating position (if equipped). Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. Refer to Safety Restraints for Children or Safety Seats for Children later in this chapter. How to use the automatic locking mode • Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. • Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted. • Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode. 130
  • 131. Seating and Safety Restraints How to disengage the automatic locking mode Ford recommends that all safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware should be inspected by a qualified technician after any collision. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. After any vehicle collision, the seat belt system at all outboard seating positions (except driver, which has no “automatic locking retractor” feature) must be checked by a qualified technician to verify that the “automatic locking retractor” feature for child seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked for proper function. BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Energy Management Feature • This vehicle has a seat belt system with an energy management feature at the front outboard seating position to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision. • The front outboard seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest. 131
  • 132. Seating and Safety Restraints Safety belt replacement label The short plastic boot on the front safety belt at the passenger outboard anchor location covers a “Replace Belt” label on the safety belt. In the event of a collision, the colored label (REPLACE BELT) may become visible. If this occurs, the safety belt must be replaced. Whenever the yellow portion of the label is visible, the safety belt must be replaced. 132
  • 133. Seating and Safety Restraints Failure to follow these instructions will affect the performance of the safety belts and increase the risk of personal injury. Safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions. The Seat Integrated Restraints (SIR) seat is equipped with a buckle pretensioner. Do NOT place objects between the seats, this could interfere with the functioning of the pretensioner. The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate only during certain frontal or near-frontal collisions with sufficient longitudinal deceleration. A safety belt pretensioner is a device which tightens the webbing of the lap and shoulder belts in such a way that they fit more snugly against the body. The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt system (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in the activation of the safety belt pretensioners. Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter. Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision. Front and second row safety belt height adjustment Your vehicle has safety belt height adjustments for the driver, front passenger and second row outboard passengers. Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. To lower the shoulder belt height, push the button down and slide the height adjuster down. To raise the height of the shoulder belt, slide the height adjuster up. Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place. 133
  • 134. Seating and Safety Restraints Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision. Lap belts Adjusting the lap belt The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the hips, not across the waist. • 1st row and 3rd row (if equipped) center seating positions The lap belt does not adjust automatically. Insert the tongue into the correct buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from). To lengthen the belt, turn the tongue at a right angle to the belt and pull across your lap until it reaches the buckle. To tighten the belt, pull the loose end of the belt through the tongue until it fits snugly across the hips. Shorten and fasten the belt when not in use. • 2nd row center seating position (if equipped) 134
  • 135. Seating and Safety Restraints The lap belt will adjust automatically. To fasten, grasp the tongue, and with a continuous motion, pull out enough webbing to buckle the tongue into the correct buckle. If you did not pull out enough webbing to reach the buckle, allow the tongue to retract fully before trying to pull it out again. Safety belt warning light and indicator chime The seat belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts. Conditions of operation If... Then... The driver’s safety belt is not The safety belt warning light buckled before the ignition illuminates 1-2 minutes and the switch is turned to the ON warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds. position... The driver’s safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding... The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off. The driver’s safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position... The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off. BeltMinder The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster. 135
  • 136. Seating and Safety Restraints If... Then... The driver’s safety belt is not buckled before the vehicle has reached at least 5 km/h (3 mph) and 1-2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to ON... The BeltMinder feature is activated - the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds every 30 seconds, repeating for approximately 5 minutes or until safety belt is buckled. The driver’s safety belt is buckled while the safety belt indicator light is illuminated and the safety belt warning chime is sounding... The BeltMinder feature will not activate. The driver’s safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position... The BeltMinder feature will not activate. The purpose of the BeltMinder is to remind occasional wearers to wear safety belts all of the time. The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts: (All statistics based on U.S. data) Reasons given... Consider... “Crashes are rare events” 36 700 crashes occur every day. The more we drive, the more we are exposed to “rare” events, even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime. “I’m not going far” 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home. “Belts are uncomfortable” We design our safety belts to enhance comfort. If you are uncomfortable - try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible; this can improve comfort. 136
  • 137. Seating and Safety Restraints Reasons given... Consider... “I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident. BeltMinder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up. “Seat belts don’t work” Safety belts, when used properly, reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 45% in cars, and by 60% in light trucks. “Traffic is light” Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single-vehicle crashes, many when no other vehicles are around. “Belts wrinkle my clothes” Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are unbelted. “The people I’m with don’t wear belts” Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people. Children and younger brothers/sisters imitate behavior they see. “I have an air bag” Air bags offer greater protection when used with safety belts. Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers. “I’d rather be thrown clear” Not a good idea. People who are ejected are 40 times more likely to DIE. Safety belts help prevent ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR CRASH”. Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt Minder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the risk of injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt Minder feature please follow the directions stated below. One time disable Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an ignition ON cycle, BeltMinder will be disabled for that ignition cycle only. 137
  • 138. Seating and Safety Restraints Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature Read steps 1 - 9 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation/activation programming procedure. The BeltMinder feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure: Before following the procedure, make sure that: • The parking brake is set • The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission) • The ignition switch is in the OFF position • All vehicle doors are closed • The driver’s safety belt is unbuckled • The parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position (If vehicle is equipped with Autolamps, this will not affect the procedure.) To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT START THE ENGINE) 2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1–2 minutes) • Steps 3–5 must be completed within 60 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated. 3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the safety belt unbuckled. This can be done before or during BeltMinder warning activation. 4. Turn on the parklamps/headlamps, turn off the parklamps/headlamps. 5. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the safety belt unbuckled. • After step 5 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three seconds. 6. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt. • This will disable BeltMinder if it is currently enabled, or enable BeltMinder if it is currently disabled. 7. Confirmation of disabling BeltMinder is provided by flashing the safety belt warning light four times per second for three seconds. 138
  • 139. Seating and Safety Restraints 8. Confirmation of enabling BeltMinder is provided by flashing the safety belt warning light four times per second for three seconds, followed by three seconds with the safety belt warning light off, then followed by flashing the safety belt warning light four times per second for three seconds again. 9. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete. Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 20 cm (8 inch) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number 611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost. Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended. Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. Safety belt maintenance Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if equipped), LATCH child seat tether anchors and lower anchors (if equipped), and attaching hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision. Refer to Cleaning and maintaining the safety belts in the Cleaning chapter. 139
  • 140. Seating and Safety Restraints AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) FM1 STST O DOLBY B NR BASSTREB BAL FADE AUTO SCAN EJ SET TAPECD VOL - PUSH ON SEEK TUNE DISCS AM FM REW FF SIDE 1-2 COMP SHUFFLE 12 34 5 6 18 Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information about the air bag and sensor systems. In the event of a collision this module may save information related to the collision including information about the air bag system and impact severity. This information will assist Ford Motor Company in servicing the vehicle and in helping to better understand real world collisions and further improve the safety of future vehicles. Important supplemental restraint system (SRS) precautions The supplemental restraint system is designed to work with the safety belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries. Air bags DO NOT inflate slowly or gently and the risk of injury from a deploying air bag is greatest close to the trim covering the air bag module. All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is provided. Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints. P A/C MAX A/C OFF 40 30 20 H H 10 0 50 60 70 80 1 2 3 90 4 100 40 20 60 80 100 120 140 160 MPH DIESEL FUEL ONLY RPM x 1000 km/h F ON OFF RES SET ACCEL COAST 4X4 2WD HIGH 4X4 LOW OFF 140
  • 141. Seating and Safety Restraints National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag module. Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the air bag: • Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. • Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright position. Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing serious injury. Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. The front passenger air bag is not designed to offer protection to an occupant in the center front seating position. Modifications to the front end of the vehicle, including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the air bag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle. Additional equipment may affect the performance of the air bag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment. 141
  • 142. Seating and Safety Restraints Children and air bags For additional important safety information, read all information on safety restraints in this guide. Children must always be properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision. Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way back. How does the air bag supplemental restraint system work? The air bag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains longitudinal deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates air bag inflation. The fact that the air bags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Air bags are designed to inflate in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration. 142
  • 143. Seating and Safety Restraints The air bags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After air bag deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (e.g., baking soda) that result from the combustion process that inflates the air bag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic. While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, contact with a deploying air bag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because air bags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of air bag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the air bag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control. The SRS consists of: • driver and passenger air bag modules (which include the inflators and air bags) • one or more impact and safing sensors • a readiness light and tone • a diagnostic module • and the electrical wiring which connects the components The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the supplemental air bag electrical system warning (including the impact sensors), the system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the air bag back up power and the air bag ignitors. Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not touch them after inflation. 143
  • 144. Seating and Safety Restraints If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision. Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Air bag readiness section in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the air bag is not required. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: • The readiness light will either flash or stay lit. • The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on. • A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired. If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a collision. Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped vehicles (including pretensioners) For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, see your local dealership or qualified technician. Air bags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel. SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children. Also see Air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags. Important child restraint precautions You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S. and Canada. If small children ride in your vehicle (generally children who are four years old or younger and who weigh 18 kg [40 lbs] or less), you must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. 144
  • 145. Seating and Safety Restraints Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or child restraint you might use. When possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Children and safety belts If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts. Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle. If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit. Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in your vehicle. SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Child and infant or child safety seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the 145
  • 146. Seating and Safety Restraints safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. When installing a child safety seat: • Review and follow the information presented in the Air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) section in this chapter. • Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from). • Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. • Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling. • Place seat back in upright position. • Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating positions) (if equipped) section in this chapter. Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position which is capable of providing a tether anchorage. For more information on top tether straps, refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps. in this chapter. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. 146
  • 147. Seating and Safety Restraints Installing child safety seats in combination lap and shoulder belt seating positions Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way back. 1. Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt. Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. 2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together. 147
  • 148. Seating and Safety Restraints 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. 5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out and a click is heard. 6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode. 148
  • 149. Seating and Safety Restraints 7. Pull the lap belt portion across the child seat toward the buckle and pull up on the shoulder belt while pushing down with your knee on the child seat. 8. Allow the safety belt to retract to remove any slack in the belt. 9. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than one inch of movement for proper installation. 10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps two through nine. Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use. Attaching child safety seats with tether straps Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap. The second row seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below. The tether anchors in your vehicle are along the bottom of the seatback marked with the tether anchor symbol (shown with title). The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions (shown from top view): 149
  • 150. Seating and Safety Restraints Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor. 1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion. 2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat. For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback. 3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position. • Second row Note: In the right outboard passenger seating position, use only one tether anchor. Do not use both. 150
  • 151. • Third row Seating and Safety Restraints • The anchors are located under the seat frame. 4. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown. If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision. 5. Refer to the Installing child safety seats in combination lap and shoulder belt seating positions section of this chapter for further instructions to secure the child safety seat. 6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions. If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases. 151
  • 152. STARTING Positions of the ignition 1. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not running. 2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel, automatic transmission gearshift lever and allows key removal. 3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all accessories without locking the steering wheel. This position also allows the automatic transmission shift lever to be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal being depressed. In the OFF position, the automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted movement, always set the parking brake. 4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key position when driving. 5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine starts. Preparing to start your vehicle Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise. When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter. Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage. 3 1 2 5 4 Driving 152
  • 153. Driving Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. Important safety precautions A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute (RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle checked. Do not allow the vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes at high engine RPM. Before starting the vehicle: 1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating and safety restraints chapter. 2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off. 3. Make sure the parking brake is set. 4. Make sure the gearshift is in P (Park). 153
  • 154. 5. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without turning the key to 5 (START). 4 If there is difficulty in turning the 3 key, firmly rotate the steering wheel left and right until the key turns freely. This condition may occur 2 when: • front wheels are turned 1 • front wheel is against the curb • steering wheel is turned when getting in or out of the vehicle 5 Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced. • If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the light may not illuminate. Starting the engine Note: Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter. 1. Turn the key to 5 (START) without pressing the accelerator pedal and release as soon as the 4 engine starts. The key will return to 3 4 (ON). 5 2. If the temperature is above –12° 2 C (10° F) and the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait 10 1 seconds and try again. Driving 154
  • 155. Driving 3. If the temperature is below -12° C (10° F) and the engine does not start in 15 seconds on the first try, turn the key OFF and wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine does not start in two attempts, press the accelerator pedal all the way to floor and hold. Turn the key to START position. 4. When the engine starts, release the key, then release the accelerator pedal gradually as the engine speeds up. 5. After idling for a few seconds, apply the brake, shift into gear and drive. Using the engine block heater (if equipped) An engine block heater warms the engine coolant, which improves starting, warms up the engine faster and allows the heater-defroster system to respond quickly. Use of an engine block heater is strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach -23°C (-10°F) or below. For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours before starting the vehicle. Using the heater for longer than three hours will not harm the engine, so the heater can be plugged in the night before starting the vehicle. To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. Guarding against exhaust fumes Although odorless and colorless, carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects. If you ever smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect and fix your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. These fumes are harmful and could kill you. 155
  • 156. Driving Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checked whenever: • the vehicle is raised for service. • the sound of the exhaust system changes. • the vehicle has been damaged in a collision. WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped in an open area for long periods of time, open the windows at least 2.5 cm (one inch). Adjust the heating or air conditioning (if equipped) to bring in fresh air. Improve vehicle ventilation by keeping all air inlet vents clear of snow, leaves and other debris. BRAKES Your service brakes are self-adjusting. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for scheduled maintenance. Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate a performance concern with the vehicle’s brake system. In normal operation, automotive brake systems may emit occasional or intermittent squeal or groan noises when the brakes are applied. Such noises are usually heard during the first few brake applications in the morning; however, they may be heard at any time while braking and can be aggravated by environmental conditions such as cold, heat, moisture, road dust, salt or mud. If a “metal-to-metal,” “continuous grinding” or “continuous squeal” sound is present while braking, the brake linings may be worn-out and should be inspected by a qualified service technician. If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do not apply your brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less effective. 156
  • 157. Driving Anti-lock brake system (ABS) This vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). A noise from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may be observed during ABS braking events. Pedal pulsation coupled with noise while braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel, bumps, wet or snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle’s anti-lock brake system. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the vehicle should be inspected by a qualified service technician. The ABS operates by detecting the onset of wheel lockup during brake applications and compensates for this tendency. The wheels are prevented from locking even when the brakes are firmly applied. The accompanying illustration depicts the advantage of an ABS equipped vehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABS equipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with loss of front braking traction. Using ABS • In an emergency or when maximum efficiency from the four-wheel ABS is required, apply continuous force on the brake. The four wheel ABS will be activated immediately, thus allowing you to retain full steering control of your vehicle and, providing there is sufficient space, will enable you to avoid obstacles and bring the vehicle to a controlled stop. • The anti-lock system does not reduce stopping distance. Always leave enough room between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to stop. • We recommend that you familiarize yourself with this braking technique. However, avoid taking any unnecessary risks. ABS warning lamp ABS The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the light does not illuminate momentarily at start up, remains on or continues to flash, the ABS needs to be serviced. 157
  • 158. Driving With the ABS light on, the anti-lock brake system is disabled and normal braking is still effective unless the brake warning light also remains illuminated with parking brake released. (If your brake warning lamp illuminates, have your vehicle serviced immediately.) Parking brake Apply the parking brake whenever the vehicle is parked. To set the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops. The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates and remains illuminated (when the ignition is turned ON) until the parking brake is released. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission). The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle. However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected. 158
  • 159. Pull the release lever to release the brake. Driving with the parking brake on will cause the brakes to wear out quickly and reduce fuel economy. PULL Driving STEERING YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses energy from the engine to help steer the vehicle. Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left position for more than a few seconds when the engine is running. This action could damage the power steering pump. If the amount of effort needed to steer your vehicle changes at a constant vehicle speed, have the power steering system checked. If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort. After any severe impact such as striking large potholes, sliding into curbs on icy roads or a collision involving the front end, have the front suspension and steering checked for possible damage. TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED) This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. Extended use of other than the manufacturer’s specified size tires on a Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving and should not be noticeable to the driver. To reduce the risk of injury, never run the engine with one wheel off the ground, such as when changing a tire. 159
  • 160. Driving PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Your vehicle has special design and equipment features to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of circumstances. These special design features, such as larger tires and increased ground clearance, give the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car. Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling people and cargo may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle. Use extra caution while becoming familiar with your vehicle. Know the capabilities and limitations of both you as a driver and your vehicle. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION Brake-shift interlock This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is in the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed. If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in the ON position and the brake pedal depressed: 160
  • 161. Driving 1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the key. 2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the brake pedal and shift to N (Neutral). In the OFF position, the automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted movement, always set the parking brake. 3. Start the vehicle. If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever, it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside emergencies chapter. Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working. If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting from forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes. The transmission and tires may be damaged or the engine may overheat. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. See your dealer or a qualified service technician. Driving with a 4–speed automatic transmission Understanding gearshift positions To put your vehicle in gear, start the engine, depress the brake pedal, then move gearshift lever out of P (Park). 161
  • 162. Driving Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift lever from P (Park) to another position. If you do not hold the brake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone. P (Park) Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park). Make sure the gearshift lever is securely latched in P (Park). This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift lever is latched in P (Park). Turn off the ignition whenever you leave your vehicle. R (Reverse) With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward. Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R (Reverse). N (Neutral) With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this gear. (Overdrive) The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission operates in gears one through four. 162
  • 163. (Overdrive) can be deactivated Driving by pressing the transmission control OVERDRIVE OFF switch (TCS) on the end of the gearshift lever. The transmission control indicator light (TCIL) (the word OFF) on the end of the gearshift lever will illuminate. Drive – Not shown on the display. Activate by pressing the transmission control switch (TCS) on the end of the gearshift lever with the gearshift in the position. The TCIL (the word OFF) will illuminate on the gearshift lever. Transmission operates in gears one through three. (Drive) provides more engine braking than (Overdrive) and is useful when: • driving with a heavy load. • towing a trailer up or down steep hills. • additional engine downhill braking is desired. If towing a trailer, refer to Driving while you tow in the Trailer towing section. OVERDRIVE To return to (Overdrive) mode, press the transmission control switch (TCS). The TCIL (the word OFF) will no longer be illuminated. Each time the vehicle is started, the transmission will automatically return to normal overdrive mode. Every time the vehicle is shut off and restarted, you must press the transmission control switch to cancel overdrive operation if driving in overdrive is not desired. 2 (Second) Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional engine braking on downgrades. 1 (First) Use 1 (Low) to provide maximum engine braking on steep downgrades. Upshifts can be made by shifting to 2 (Second) or to 163
  • 164. Driving (Overdrive). Selecting 1 (Low) at higher speeds causes the transmission to shift to a lower gear, and will shift to 1 (Low) after vehicle decelerates to the proper speed. Forced Downshifts To gain acceleration in (Overdrive) or Drive (O/D OFF) when passing another vehicle, push the accelerator to the floor. The transmission will downshift to the appropriate gear: third, second or first gear. Shift strategy (4R100 automatic transmission) To account for customer driving habits and conditions, your 4R100 automatic transmission electronically controls the shift quality by using an adaptive learning strategy. The adaptive learning strategy is maintained by power from the battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. Optimal shifting will resume within a few hundred kilometers (miles) of operation. If the shift quality does not improve within a few hundred kilometers (miles) of operation, or if the downshifts and other throttle conditions do not function normally, see your dealer or a qualified service technician as soon as possible. REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when R (Reverse) is selected. The RSS will assist the driver in detecting certain objects while: • the vehicle is moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 5 km/h (3 mph) or less. • the vehicle is in R (Reverse) but not moving backward (the brake pedal is depressed or the parking brake is applied), and a moving object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of 5 km/h (3 mph) or less. • the vehicle is moving in reverse at a speed of less than 5 km/h (3 mph) and a moving object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of less than 5 km/h (3 mph) The RSS is not effective at speeds greater than 5 km/h (3 mph) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects. 164
  • 165. To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS; this may include reduced performance or a false activation. To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in R (Reverse) and when using the RSS. This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly those close to the ground. The RSS detects obstacles within approximately 1.8 meters (5.9 ft.) of the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer to the figures for approximate zone coverage areas). As you move closer to the obstacle, the rate of the tone increases. When the distance to the obstacle is less than 25.0 cm (10 in.), the tone will sound continuously. If the system detects a stationary or receding object further than 25.0 cm (10 in.) from the side of the vehicle, the tone will sound for only three seconds. Once the system detects an object approaching, the tone will sound again. Driving 165
  • 166. The RSS is automatically enabled when the gear selector is placed in R (Reverse) and the ignition is ON. The RSS control allows the driver to disable the RSS only when the ignition is ON, and the gear selector is in R (Reverse). The OFF indicator remains illuminated when the system is disabled. The system defaults to ON every time R (Reverse) is selected. Press the control to disable or enable the system. The indicator will remain illuminated to indicate a failure of the RSS. Always keep the sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free from dirt, snow and ice (do not clean the sensors with sharp objects). These elements may cause the system to operate inaccurately. If the vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms. FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter. When four–wheel drive (4WD) is engaged, power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case. 4WD can be selected when additional driving power is desired. 4WD operation is not recommended on dry pavement. Doing so could result in difficult disengagement of the transfer case, increased tire wear and decreased fuel economy. Electronic shift on the fly (ESOF) 4x4 system (if equipped) If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and 4WD Low is selected while the vehicle is moving, the 4WD system will not engage. This is normal and should be no reason for concern. Before 4WD Low can be engaged, the vehicle must be brought to a complete stop, the brake pedal depressed and the transmission placed in N (Neutral). The 4WD system: • provides 4x4 High engagement and disengagement while the vehicle is moving. OFF Driving 166
  • 167. • Driving is operated by a rotary control located on the instrument panel that allows you select 2WD, 4x4 High or 4x4 Low operation. • uses auto-manual hub locks that can be engaged and disengaged automatically based on the 4x4 mode selected. • auto-manual hub locks can be manually overridden by rotating the hub lock control from AUTO to LOCK if desired. • automatic operation of the hub locks is recommended, and will increase fuel economy • For proper operation, make sure that the arrow and the indicator dot on the hub are aligned, and that both hub locks are set the same (both set to AUTO or both set to LOCK). 4WD system indicator lights The 4WD system indicator lights illuminate only under the following conditions. If these lights illuminate when driving in 2WD, contact your Ford dealer as soon as possible. • 4x4- momentarily illuminates after the engine is started. Illuminates when 4H (4x4 High) or 4L (4x4 Low) is engaged. • LOW RANGE– momentarily 4x4 LOW RANGE illuminates when the ignition is turned to the ON position. Illuminates when 4L (4x4 Low) is engaged. Using the electronic shift 4WD system (if equipped) Positions of the electronic shift system To prevent damage, the electronic shift 4WD system is designed to allow up to 45 seconds before a shift command is performed. In the event that conflicting shift commands are selected, allow up to 45 seconds for the shift command to be performed prior to reporting any shift concerns to your dealer. 167
  • 168. Driving 2H (2WD High) – For general on-road driving. Sends power to the rear wheels only. 4H (4WD High) – For winter and off-road conditions. Sends power to front and rear wheels. 4L (4WD Low)– For low-speed off-road cond applications that require extra power such as steep grades, deep sand or pulling a boat out of the water. Sends power to front and rear wheels. Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4WD system shifts or engages. This is normal. Shifting from 2WD (2WD High) to 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) Rotate the 4WD control to the 4x4 HIGH position at speeds up to 88 4X4 km/h (55 mph). 4X4 2WD HIGH LOW • To prevent damage, the electronic shift 4WD system is designed to engage 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) when the vehicle is moving. If shifted to 4x4 HIGH (4WD HIGH) while at complete stop, 4x4 may not engage and the 4x4 indicator may not illuminate until the vehicle is driven above 8 km/h (5 mph). Do not shift into 4x4 HIGH with the rear wheels slipping. Shifting from 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) to 2WD (2WD High) Rotate the 4WD control to 2WD at any forward speed. Disengagement 4X4 HIGH 4X4 of the transfer case and front hubs 2WD LOW may be delayed due to torque bind which is caused by driving on dry hard surfaces or performing tight turns while using the 4WD system. • You do not need to operate the vehicle in R (Reverse) to disengage your front hubs, but it will eliminate any torque bind and allow the system to immediately disengage. 168
  • 169. Shifting from 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) to 4x4 LOW (4WD Low) 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. Depress the brake. 3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral). 4. Move the 4WD control to the 4x4 LOW position. 4X4 4X4 5. Hold the shift conditions until the 2WD HIGH LOW LOW RANGE indicator light illuminates. 6. If the LOW RANGE indicator light does not illuminate within 15 seconds, drive the vehicle above 8 km/h (5 mph), then repeat steps 1 through 5 before reporting any shift concerns to your dealer. Shifting from 4x4 LOW (4WD Low) to 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) or 2WD (2WD High) 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. Depress the brake. 3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral). 4. Move the 4WD control to the 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) or 2WD (2WD 4X4 High) position. 2WD HIGH 4X4 LOW 5. Hold the shift conditions until the LOW RANGE indicator light shuts off. 6. If the LOW RANGE indicator light does not shut off within 15 seconds, drive the vehicle above 8 km/h (5 mph), then repeat steps 1 through 5 before reporting any shift concerns to your dealer. Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles 4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road. Driving 169
  • 170. Driving How your vehicle differs from other vehicles Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components. The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car. Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain. Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes. Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps. You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning. Basic operating principles • Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components. 4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces. • Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle. • Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice. If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement • If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but avoid severe brake application, Ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface. • It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly. • It often may be less risky to strike small inanimate objects, such as highway reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern. 170
  • 171. Driving If your vehicle gets stuck If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. See your dealer or a qualified service technician. Do not spin the wheels at over 56 km/h (35 mph). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument cluster chapter for transmission fluid temperature information. Emergency maneuvers • In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e., turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control, not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking. Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel. • In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements. • If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again, avoid these abrupt inputs. 171
  • 172. Driving Parking On some 4WD vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral) position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle. 4WD Systems 4WD (when you select a 4WD mode), uses all four wheels to power the vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle can’t. Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case. On 4WD vehicles, the transfer case allows you to select 4WD when necessary. Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be found in the Driving chapter. Information on transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and specifications chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle. Normal characteristics On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4x4 while the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern. Sand When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels. If you must reduce the tire pressure for whatever reason in sand, make sure you re-inflate the tires as soon as possible. Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution. 172
  • 173. Driving Mud and water If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake capability may be limited. When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher than the bottom of the hubs (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall. Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle. If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water, their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary. Driving through deep water may damage the transmission. Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument cluster chapter for transmission fluid temperature information. If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should be replaced. After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components. “Tread Lightly” is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land-use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by “treading lightly.” Driving on hilly or sloping terrain Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up 173
  • 174. Driving or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer. When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling. If you do stall out, do not try to turn around because you might roll over. It is better to back down to a safe location. Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating. Do not descend in neutral, disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear. When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control. When you brake hard, the front wheels can’t turn and if they aren’t turning, you won’t be able to steer. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle. Rapid pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle and still maintain steering control. If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes. Driving on snow and ice 4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle. 174
  • 175. Driving Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control. Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop. Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not become overconfident as to road conditions. Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping as well as drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears. In emergency stopping situations, avoid locking of the wheels. Use a “squeeze” technique, push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing force which allows the wheels to brake yet continue to roll so that you may steer in the direction you want to travel. If you lock the wheels, release the brake pedal and repeat the squeeze technique. If your vehicle is equipped with a Four Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), apply the brake steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system. Never drive with chains on the front tires of 4WD vehicles without also putting them on the rear tires. This could cause the rear to slide and swing around during braking. Tires, Replacement Requirements Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel other than that originally provided by Ford Motor Company because it can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to loss of vehicle control or roll over and serious injury. Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the same size, type, tread design, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an authorized Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealer. If you nevertheless decide to equip your 4WD for off-road use with tires larger than what Ford Motor Company recommends, you should not use these tires for highway driving. If you use any tire/wheel combination not recommended by Ford Motor Company, it may adversely affect vehicle handling and could cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case failure. 175
  • 176. Driving Do not use”aftermarket lift kits” or other suspension modifications, whether or not they are used with larger tires and wheels. These “aftermarket lift kits” could adversely affect the vehicle’s handling characteristics, which could lead to loss of vehicle control or roll over and serious injury. Tires can be damaged during off-road use. For your safety, tires that are damaged should not be used for highway driving because they are more likely to blow out or fail. You should carefully observe the recommended tire inflation pressure found on the safety compliance certification label attached to the left front door lock facing or door latch post pillar. Failure to follow tire pressure recommendations can adversely affect the way your vehicle handles. Do not exceed the Ford Motor Company recommended pressure even if it is less than the maximum pressure allowed for the tire. Each day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires, and adjust if required. Check tire pressure with a tire gauge every few weeks (including spare). Safe operation requires tires that are neither underinflated nor overloaded. Periodically inspect the tire treads and remove stones, nails, glass or other objects that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from the tire and make necessary repairs. Inspect the tire side walls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. Maintenance and Modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide both reasonably safe, predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment. 176
  • 177. Driving Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control. Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box cover). Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to heavy off-road usage. DRIVING THROUGH WATER Do not drive quickly through standing water, especially if the depth is unknown. Traction or brake capability may be limited and if the ignition system gets wet, your engine may stall. Water may also enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine. If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very slowly. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) or the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars). Once through the water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage. Have the fluid checked and, if water is found, replace the fluid. VEHICLE LOADING Before loading a vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms: • Base Curb Weight: Weight of the vehicle including any standard equipment, fluids, lubricants, etc. It does not include occupants or aftermarket equipment. • Payload: Combined maximum allowable weight of cargo, occupants and optional equipment. The payload equals the gross vehicle weight rating minus base curb weight. • GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): Base curb weight plus payload weight. The GVW is not a limit or a specification. • GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): Maximum permissible total weight of the base vehicle, occupants, optional equipment and cargo. The GVWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the Safety Certification Label on the driver’s door pillar. 177
  • 178. Driving • GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): Carrying capacity for each axle system. The GAWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the Safety Certification Label on the driver’s door pillar. • GCW (Gross Combined Weight): The combined weight of the towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo) and the loaded trailer. • GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating): Maximum permissible combined weight of towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo) and the loaded trailer • Maximum Trailer Weight Rating: Maximum weight of a trailer the vehicle is permitted to tow. The maximum trailer weight rating is determined by subtracting the vehicle curb weight for each engine/transmission combination, any required option weight for trailer towing and the weight of the driver from the GCWR for the towing vehicle. • Maximum Trailer Weight: Maximum weight of a trailer the loaded vehicle (including occupants and cargo) is permitted to tow. It is determined by subtracting the weight of the loaded trailer towing vehicle from the GCWR for the towing vehicle. • Trailer Weight Range: Specified weight range that the trailer must fall within that ranges from zero to the maximum trailer weight rating. Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded trailer when figuring the total weight. Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label. Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations. The Safety Certification Label, found on the driver’s door pillar, lists several important vehicle weight rating limitations. Before adding any additional equipment, refer to these limitations. If you are adding weight to the front of your vehicle, (potentially including weight added to the cab), the weight added should not exceed the front axle reserve capacity (FARC). Additional frontal weight may be added to the front axle reserve capacity provided you limit your payload in other ways (i.e. restrict the number of occupants or amount of cargo carried). 178
  • 179. Driving Always ensure that the weight of occupants, cargo and equipment being carried is within the weight limitations that have been established for your vehicle including both gross vehicle weight and front and rear gross axle weight rating limits. Under no circumstance should these limitations be exceeded. Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury. Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and utility-type vehicles For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in this chapter. Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle. Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow 1. Use the appropriate maximum gross combined weight rating (GCWR) chart (in the Trailer Towing section) to find the maximum GCWR for your type engine and rear axle ratio. 2. Weigh your vehicle as you customarily operate the vehicle without cargo. To obtain correct weights, try taking your vehicle to a shipping company or an inspection station for trucks. 3. Subtract your loaded vehicle weight from the maximum GCWR on the following charts. This is the maximum trailer weight your vehicle can tow and must fall below the maximum shown under maximum trailer weight on the chart. 179
  • 180. Driving TRAILER TOWING Your vehicle may tow a Conventional/Class IV trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts. Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle. Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these components carefully after any towing operation. The following trailer towing charts apply to vehicles equipped with gasoline engines; for Diesel engines, refer to the 7.3 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Supplement. The hitch receiver was designed not to be removed. Any modification or removal of the hitch receiver compromises the safety benefit it was designed to provide. 4x2 w/automatic transmission Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum GCWR-kg (lbs.) Maximum trailer weight-kg (lbs.) 5.4L 3.73 5897 (13000) 2812 (6200) 5.4L 4.10 6350 (14500) 3266 (7200) 6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4536 (10000) 6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 4763 (10500) 180
  • 181. 4x4 w/automatic transmission Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum GCWR-kg (lbs.) Driving Maximum trailer weight-kg (lbs.) 5.4L 4.10 6350 (14500) 3266 (7200) 6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4354 (9600) 6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 4990 (11000) The frame mounted hitch receiver is non-removable. Towing a Class IV trailer (extra heavy duty) 2,268–4,536 kg (5,001–10,000 lbs.) trailer weight requires a weight-distributing or fifth-wheel hitch. Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label. Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight could result in engine damage, transmission/axle damage, structural damage, loss of control, and personal injury. Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer, and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance. Load equalizing hitch When hooking up a trailer using a load equalizing hitch, always use the following procedure: 1. Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and all doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level. 2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle. 3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within 0–13 mm (0.5 in) of the reference point. After proper adjustment, the rear bumper should be no higher than in Step 2. 181
  • 182. Driving Adjusting an equalizing hitch so the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it was unloaded will defeat the function of the load equalizing hitch and may cause unpredictable handling. Safety chains Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners. If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency gives to you. Do not attach safety chains to the bumper. Trailer brakes Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations. Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase. The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR. Trailer lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure your trailer lamps conform to local and Federal regulations. See your dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps. Using a step bumper (if equipped) The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a ball with a 25.4 mm (one inch) shank diameter. The bumper has a 2 270 kg (5 000 lb.) trailer weight and 227 kg (500 lb.) tongue weight capacity. If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position, a frame-mounted trailer hitch must be installed. 182
  • 183. Driving while you tow When towing a trailer: • Ensure that you turn off your speed control. The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades. • Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer. • To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to the Driving with a 4–speed automatic transmission section in this chapter. • Anticipate stops and brake gradually. • Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur. Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for more information. Trailer towing tips • Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles. • Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. • The trailer tongue weight should be no more than 10–15% of the loaded trailer weight. • After you have traveled 80 km (50 miles), thoroughly check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts. • To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or N (Neutral) (manual transmissions). • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels. Launching or retrieving a boat When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval, • Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. • Do not allow waves to break higher than 15 cm (6 inches) above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. Driving 183
  • 184. • Driving Disconnect the trailer tow electrical connector to prevent blown fuses caused by water entering into your trailer’s electrical wiring. Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter critical vehicle components, adversely affecting driveability, emissions and reliability. Replace front and rear axle lubricants any time the axles have been submerged in water. Axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked unless a leak is suspected. RECREATIONAL TOWING (ALL WHEELS ON THE GROUND) An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. Follow these guidelines if you have the need for recreational towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not damaged. 2WD vehicles (with automatic transmissions) • Place the transmission in N (Neutral) • Maximum speed is 56 km (35 mph) • Maximum distance is 80 km (50 miles) If a distance of 80 km (50 miles) or a speed of 56 km (35 mph) must be exceeded, the drive shaft will have to be removed before the vehicle is towed. Ford recommends the driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified technician. See your local dealer for driveshaft removal/installation. Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal transmission components. 4WD vehicles electronic shift transfer case (with automatic transmissions) 4x4 vehicles with electronic shift on the fly cannot be towed with any wheels on the ground. 184
  • 185. Roadside Emergencies GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available: • 24–hours, seven days a week • for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or 60,000 km (36,000 miles), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury vehicles, and four years or 80,000 km (50,000 miles) on Lincoln vehicles. Roadside assistance will cover: • changing a flat tire. • jump-starts. • lock-out assistance. • limited fuel delivery. • towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford Motor Company dealership, or your selling dealer if within 56.3 km (35 miles) of the nearest Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per disablement). Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in the mud or snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound towing or repossession). Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for information on: • Coverage period • Exact fuel amounts • Towing of your disabled vehicle • Emergency travel expense reimbursement • Travel planning benefits USING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment in Ford vehicles and is mailed to you if you own a Mercury or Lincoln. In Canada, the card is found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment. 185
  • 186. Roadside Emergencies U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance, call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140. Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 1–800–665–2006. If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call 1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140. Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call 1–800–665–2006. ROADSIDE COVERAGE BEYOND BASIC WARRANTY In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact 1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca. HAZARD FLASHER Use only in an emergency to warn traffic of vehicle breakdown, approaching danger, etc. The hazard flashers can be operated when the ignition is off. • The hazard lights control is located on top of the steering column. • Depress hazard lights control to activate all hazard flashers simultaneously. • Depress control again to turn the flashers off. FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH FUEL RESET The fuel pump shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the electric fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt. After a collision, if the engine cranks but does not start, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been activated. 186
  • 187. The fuel pump shut-off switch is located in the passenger’s foot well, by the kick panel. Roadside Emergencies Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut-off switch. 1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Check the fuel system for leaks. 3. If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the fuel pump shut-off switch by pushing in on the reset button. 4. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Pause for a few seconds and return the key to the OFF position. 5. Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system. FUSES AND RELAYS Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse. Check the appropriate 15 fuses before replacing any electrical components. 187
  • 188. Roadside Emergencies Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR Fuse rating Mini fuses Standard fuses Maxi fuses Cartridge maxi fuses Fuse link cartridge 2A Grey Grey — — — 3A Violet Violet — — — 4A Pink Pink — — — 5A Tan Tan — — — 7.5A Brown Brown — — — 10A Red Red — — — 15A Blue Blue — — — 20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue 25A Natural Natural — — — 30A Green Green Green Pink Pink 40A — — Orange Green Green 50A — — Red Red Red 60A — — Blue — Yellow 70A — — Tan — Brown 80A — — Natural — Black Passenger compartment fuse panel / power distribution box The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. 188
  • 189. To remove the fuse panel cover, turn the panel fasteners counterclockwise. To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel cover. The fuses are coded as follows. Roadside Emergencies 189
  • 190. Roadside Emergencies Fuse/Relay Location Fuse Amp Rating Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Description 1 15A* Adjustable pedals 2 20A* Power point - floor console 3 20A* Power point – 3rd row 4 20A* Power point - instrument panel 5 20A* Power point - right rear quarter 6 20A* Trailer tow turn/stop relay 7 30A* High beam headlamps / Flash to pass 8 — Not used 9 20A* Heated mirrors 10 10A* A/C clutch 11 20A* Radio (main) 12 20A* Cigar lighter / OBD II 13 5A* Power mirrors/switches 14 15A* Daytime running lamps 15 10A* Driver’s seat module memory 16 15A* Rear seat controller 17 15A* Exterior lamps 18 20A* Turn lamps/Brake on-off switch (high) 19 10A* Body security module/4x4 module 20 — Not used 21 25A* Rear wiper motor 22 20A* Engine control 23 20A* Engine control 24 15A* Air suspension 25 10A* 4-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (4WABS) module 26 10A* Airbags 27 15A* Ignition switch Run feed 28 10A* EATC module module/Front blower relay coil 29 10A* Customer access 190
  • 191. Fuse/Relay Location Fuse Amp Rating Roadside Emergencies Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Description 30 15A* Highbeam headlamps 31 15A* Clutch interlock switch 32 5A* Radio (start) 33 15A* Front wiper 34 10A* Brake on-off switch 35 10A* Instrument cluster 36 10A* PCM Keep-Alive 37 15A* Horn 38 20A* Trailer tow park lamps and backup lamps 39 — Not used 40 20A* Fuel pump 41 10A* Instrument cluster 42 15A* Delayed accessory 43 10A* Fog lamps 44 10A* PATS module, transceiver 45 10A* Ignition switch Run/ Start feed 46 10A* Left-hand lowbeam 47 10A* Right-hand lowbeam 48 10A* Rear wiper motor 101 30A** Trailer tow electric brake 102 30A** Door locks/Body security module 103 50A** Ignition switch 104 40A** Heated backlite 105 30A** Injector driver module 106 30A** Front wiper main 107 40A** Front blower motor 108 40A** Auxiliary blower motor 109 30A** Heated seats 110 50A** Ignition switch 111 30A** 4WD/Shift on the fly 112 30A** Left-hand power seats 191
  • 192. Roadside Emergencies Fuse/Relay Location Fuse Amp Rating Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Description 113 30A** Starter motor 114 30A** Right-hand power seats 115 20A** Trailer tow battery charge 116 30A** Ignition switch 601 30A CB Door window motors 602 60A** 4-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (4WABS) module 210 — Not used 211 — Not used 212 — Not used 301 — Front blower motor relay 302 — Powertrain (EEC) relay 303 — Injector driver module relay (Diesel only) 304 — Heated backlite relay 305 — Trailer tow battery charge relay 306 — Delayed accessory relay 307 — Starter relay * Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses CHANGING THE TIRES If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. The use of tire sealants is not recommended and may compromise the integrity of your tires. The use of tire sealants may also affect your tire pressure monitoring system (if equipped). Spare tire information Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire that can be used as either a spare or a regular tire. The spare tire is not equipped with wheel trim. The wheel trim from the original wheel/tire may be used on the spare. Your vehicle is equipped with 4WD, a spare tire of a different size than the road tires should not be used. Such a tire could result in damage to driveline components and make the vehicle difficult to control. 192
  • 193. Location of the spare tire and tools The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following locations: Tool Location Spare tire Mounted on the left rear quarter panel in the cargo area Jack In the right rear cargo area stowage bin. Jack handle and lug wrench On top of the radiator support in the engine compartment Tire change procedure To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured. 1. Park on a level surface, activate hazard flashers and set the parking brake. Roadside Emergencies 193
  • 194. Roadside Emergencies 2. Turn engine OFF and block the diagonally opposite wheel (block not provided). 3. Remove the jack, jack handle, lug wrench and spare tire from the stowage locations. 4. Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim. 5. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground. When one of the rear wheels is off the ground, the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack, even if the transmission is in P (Park) (automatic transmission). To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change the tire, be sure that the parking brake is set and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked. 6. Insert the hooked end of the jack handle into the jack and use the handle to slide the jack under the vehicle. 7. Position the jack according to the following guides: 194
  • 195. • Front (4x2) • Front passenger side (4x4) • Front driver side (4x4) Make sure the jack fits into the notched area on the differential housing. • Rear Roadside Emergencies 195
  • 196. Roadside Emergencies 8. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground and high enough to install the spare tire. To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only meant for changing the tire. • Never use the front or rear differential as a jacking point. 9. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench. 10. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered. 11. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 12. Remove the jack and fully 1 tighten the lug nuts in the order shown. 6 7 13. Stow the the flat tire, jack, jack handle and lug wrench. Make sure 4 3 the jack is securely fastened so it does not rattle when driving. 14. Unblock the wheels. 8 5 Retighten the lug nuts to the 2 specified torque at 800 km (500 miles) after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.). Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque* Nm Lb-ft M14 x 1.5 200-225 150-165 * Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners. 196
  • 197. On all two-piece flat wheel nuts, apply one drop of motor oil between the flat washer and the nut. Do not apply motor oil to the wheel nut threads or the wheel stud threads. When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the front disc brake hub and rotor that contacts the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control. JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Roadside Emergencies The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage. Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes, and clothing, if contacted. Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability; also, the catalytic converter may become damaged. Preparing your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation. 197
  • 198. Roadside Emergencies 1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle. 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle’s electrical system. 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts. 4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level. 5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical surges. Turn all other accessories off. Connecting the jumper cables + – + – 1. Connect the positive (+) booster cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery. + – + – 198
  • 199. Roadside Emergencies 2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the assisting battery. + – + – 3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the assisting battery. + – + – 4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker covers or the intake manifold as grounding points. Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery. 5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts. 199
  • 200. Roadside Emergencies Jump starting 1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed. 2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. 3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables. Removing the jumper cables + – + – Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected. 1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface. Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery. + – + – 2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the booster vehicle’s battery. 200
  • 201. Roadside Emergencies + – + – 3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle’s battery. + – + – 4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the disabled vehicle’s battery. After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions. 201
  • 202. Roadside Emergencies WRECKER TOWING If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing service or, if you are a member, your roadside assistance center. On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground and the rear wheels off the ground using a wheel lift or a slingbelt with T-hooks. On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground. However, a slingbelt with T-hooks and a wheel dolly can also be used if all four wheels are off the ground. 202
  • 203. Roadside Emergencies An alternative for towing a 4x4 vehicle is to: • put the transfer case in neutral. On manual 4WD systems, put the 4WD shift lever in N (Neutral); on electronic shift on the fly 4WD systems, press the 2WD portion of the 4WD control. • unlock the front hub locks (refer to Four wheel drive [4WD] Operation [if equipped] in the Driving chapter). • lift the rear wheels of the vehicle using a wheel lift or a sling belt with T-hooks. If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle damage may occur. Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle. 203
  • 204. Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED At home Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada have authorized dealerships to service your vehicle. It is preferred that you return to the Ford dealer where your vehicle was purchased when warranty repairs are needed. However, you may also take your vehicle to another Ford Motor Company or Ford of Canada dealership authorized for warranty repairs. Certain warranty repairs require special training though, so not all dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. That means that depending on the warranty repair needed, the vehicle may need to be taken to another dealer. If a particular dealership can not assist you, then contact the Customer Relationship Center. If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving, follow these steps: 1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling/servicing dealership. 2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales Manager or Service Manager at the dealership. 3. If the inquiry or concern cannot be resolved at the dealership level, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center. Away from home If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help you. In the United States: Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center 16800 Executive Plaza Drive P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, Michigan 48121 1-800-392-3673 (FORD) (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) www.ford.com In Canada: Customer Relationship Centre 204
  • 205. Customer Assistance Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited P.O. Box 2000 Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 1-800-565-3673 (FORD) www.ford.ca If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help you. In the United States: Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center 16800 Executive Plaza Drive P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, Michigan 48121 1-800-521-4140 (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) www.ford.com In Canada: Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited P.O. Box 2000 Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 1-800-565-3673 (FORD) www.ford.ca In order to help you service your Ford or Lincoln Mercury vehicle, please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center: • Your telephone number (home and business). • The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located. • The year and make of your vehicle. • The date of vehicle purchase. • The current odometer reading. • The vehicle identification number (VIN). If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.). In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states. 205
  • 206. Customer Assistance In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws. FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. Ford ESP is an optional service contract which is backed by Ford Motor Company or Ford Motor Service Company (in the U.S.) and Ford of Canada (in Canada). It provides the following: • Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain maintenance and wear items). • Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper Warranty expires. You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and rental coverage. When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of more than 5,000 participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of Canada dealers. If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Please contact your dealer for further information. Since this information is subject to change, please ask your dealer for complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or visit the Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com. THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY) The Dispute Settlement Board is: • an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes. • available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company vehicles. 206
  • 207. Customer Assistance The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without incurring obligations per applicable state law. What kinds of cases does the Board review? Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle warranty are eligible for review, except those involving: • a non-Ford product • a non-Ford dealership • sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s performance as designed • a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a service or product concern is being reviewed • items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including maintenance and wear items) • alleged personal injury/property damage claims • cases currently in litigation • vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes (except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to review commercial vehicles) • vehicles with non-U.S. warranties Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle. Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin purchasers/lessees. Board membership The Board consists of: • Three consumer representatives • A Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen 207
  • 208. Customer Assistance from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for their business leadership qualities. What the Board needs To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return receipt requested. Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you will receive an acknowledgment indicating: • The file number assigned to your application. • The toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator. Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be asked to submit statements. To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information: • Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders relevant to the case. • The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed on your vehicle ownership license. • The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s). • The current mileage. • The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle. • A brief description of your unresolved concern. • A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor Company. • The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the dealership(s). • A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern. You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not qualify for Board review. Oral presentations If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question 6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation may be requested by the Board as well. 208
  • 209. Customer Assistance Making a decision Board members review all available information related to each complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party. Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to consider some cases. After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to them under state or federal law. To request a DSB Brochure/Application For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call to the Board at the following address/phone number: Dispute Settlement Board P.O. Box 5120 Southfield, MI 48086–5120 1–800–428–3718 You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952 or by writing to the Center at the following address: Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center 16800 Executive Plaza Drive P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, Michigan 48121 UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY) In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). 209
  • 210. Customer Assistance The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings. In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrator’s award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada. CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685. GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel. If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or owner relations/customer relationship office. The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel. In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U.S. If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call: FORD MOTOR COMPANY WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3 Allen Park, Michigan 48101 U.S.A. Telephone: (313) 594-4857 FAX: (313) 390-0804 210
  • 211. Customer Assistance If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office. If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market Operations. ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at: HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07150 Detroit, Michigan 48207 Or call: For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356 Helm, incorporated can also be reached by their website: www.helminc.com. Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST (Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card holders only.) Obtaining a French owner’s guide French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box 1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3. IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY) California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle. 211
  • 212. Customer Assistance California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 29 000 km (18 000 miles), whichever occurs first: 1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR 3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time) In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address: Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE-B Dearborn, MI 48126 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA U.S. Department of Transportation Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. 212
  • 213. Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral Ph shampoo, such as Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is available from your dealer. • Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces. • Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to strong, direct sunlight. • Always use a clean sponge or carwash mitt with plenty of water for best results. • Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting. • It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle. • Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s paintwork and trim over time. • Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a car wash. • Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash off as soon as possible. WAXING Applying a polymer paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage. • Wash the vehicle first. • Do not use waxes that contain abrasives. • Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body (low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time. PAINT CHIPS Your dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your vehicle’s color. Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jam) to your dealer to ensure you get the correct color. 213
  • 214. • Cleaning Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips. • Always read the instructions before using the products. ALUMINUM WHEELS AND COVERS Aluminum wheel rims or covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish. In order to maintain their shine: • Clean with Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is available from your dealer. • Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers. • Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time. • Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent. • To remove tar and grease, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Removal (B7A-19520–AA), available from your dealer. ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing: • Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage. • Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components. • Spray Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. • Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine. 214
  • 215. • Cleaning Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the running engine may cause internal damage. PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are available from your dealer. • For routine cleaning, use Detail Wash (ZC-3–A). • If tar or grease spots are present, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Removal (B7A-19520–AA). CLEANING THE WINDSHIELD, WIPER BLADES AND REAR WINDOW If the wiper does not wipe properly, substances on the windshield, rear window or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree sap, or other organic contamination. Do not clean the windshield or rear window glass with abrasives, as they may cause scratches. Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean the windshield, rear window or the wiper blades as damage may occur. Clean the outside of the windshield or rear window with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (E4AZ-19C507–AA), available from your authorized Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer. If after cleaning the glass surface, the water sheets from the glass (e.g., does not bead), then the window is clean. The windshield, rear window and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly. 215
  • 216. Cleaning WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windshield, rear window and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wiper does not wipe properly, substances on the windshield, rear window or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree sap, or other organic contamination. To clean these items, please follow these tips: • The windshield or rear window may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your dealer. • Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches. • Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts. • Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth. • Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection. Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the air bag system. • Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the painted surfaces. WOOD-TONE TRIM • Clean the area with a damp cloth, then dry by wiping with a dry, soft, clean cloth. • Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish. INTERIOR For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts: • Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. • Remove light stains and soil with Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (E8AZ-19523–AA). • If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). 216
  • 217. • Never saturate the seat covers with cleaning solution. Cleaning • Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials. LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED) Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the leather. • To clean, use a soft cloth with Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-11–A). Dry the area with a soft cloth. • To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Deluxe Leather Care Kit (ZC-11–D), available from your authorized dealer. • Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of the clear, protective coating. UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt. FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following or products of equivalent quality: Ford Custom Clearcoat Polish* Ford Custom Silicone Gloss Polish Ford Custom Vinyl Protectant* (not available in Canada) Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) Ford Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada) Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Remover* (not available in Canada) Ford Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada) Ford Custom Bright Metal Cleaner 217
  • 218. Cleaning Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only) Ford Spot and Stain Remover* Ford Super Premium Tire and Trim Dressing Ford Triple Clean Ford Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada) Ford Engine Shampoo and Degreaser * May be sold with the Motorcraft name FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following or products of equivalent quality: Ford Custom Clearcoat Polish* Ford Custom Silicone Gloss Polish Ford Custom Vinyl Protectant* (not available in Canada) Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) Ford Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada) Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Remover* (not available in Canada) Ford Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada) Ford Custom Bright Metal Cleaner Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only) Ford Spot and Stain Remover* Ford Super Premium Tire and Trim Dressing Ford Triple Clean Ford Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada) Ford Engine Shampoo and Degreaser * May be sold with the Motorcraft name 218
  • 219. Maintenance and Specifications SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle: • We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy location. • We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which makes tracking routine service easy. If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide to find out which parts and services are covered. Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle. PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle. • Do not work on a hot engine. • When the engine is running, keep loose clothing, jewelry or long hair away from moving parts. • Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. • Keep all lit cigarettes, open flames and other lit material away from the battery and all fuel related parts. If you disconnect the battery, the engine must “relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle will drive properly, as explained in the Battery section in this chapter. Working with the engine off 1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). 2. Turn off the engine and remove the key. 3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. 219
  • 220. Working with the engine on 1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). 2. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly. Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. OPENING THE HOOD 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release handle located under the bottom left corner of the instrument panel. 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch located under the right center of the hood. Slide the handle to release the auxiliary latch. 3. Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open. HOOD Maintenance and Specifications 220
  • 221. Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5.4L V8/6.8L V10 gasoline engines Refer to the 7.3 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for diesel engine component locations. 1. Battery 2. Engine oil filler cap 3. Transmission fluid dipstick 4. Engine oil dipstick 5. Brake fluid reservoir 6. Power steering fluid reservoir 7. Air filter assembly 8. Engine coolant reservoir 9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 221
  • 222. Maintenance and Specifications WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID Washer fluid Check the washer fluid whenever you stop for fuel. The reservoir is highlighted with a symbol. If the level is low, add enough fluid to fill the reservoir. In very cold weather, do not fill the reservoir all the way. Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification ESR-M17P5–A. Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter. State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system. Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system components. Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate Washer fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the same reservoir as the windshield. ENGINE OIL Checking the engine oil Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil. 1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. 2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan. 3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). 4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat. 222
  • 223. Maintenance and Specifications 5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick). 6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it again. • If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks, the oil level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL. • If the oil level is below the MIN mark, add enough oil to raise the level within the MIN-MAX range. • Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by a service technician. 7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated. Adding engine oil 1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter. 2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening. 223
  • 224. Maintenance and Specifications 3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the MAX mark on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick). 4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated. 5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated. To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed. Engine oil and filter recommendations Look for this certification trademark. SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended. Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Use Motorcraft or an equivalent oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153–H. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions, lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty. Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance guide. Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up engine noises or knock may be experienced. It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application. 224
  • 225. Maintenance and Specifications BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance-free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service. However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the battery electrolyte level. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the service interval schedules. Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”. Do not overfill the battery cells. If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the charging system checked. If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals. If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the transmission must learn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel. Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper ventilation. 225
  • 226. Maintenance and Specifications When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners. Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. For information on transmission operation after the battery has been disconnected see “Shift strategy” in the driving section. Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance. To begin this process: 1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake. 2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the engine. 3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process. • The vehicle may need to be driven 16 km (10 miles) or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy. • If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned. 226
  • 227. Maintenance and Specifications If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, the clock must be reset once the battery is reconnected. • Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner. Follow your local authorized standards for disposal. Call your local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries. ENGINE COOLANT LEAD RETURN RECYCLE Checking engine coolant The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the mileage intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance guide. The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and water, which equates to a freeze point of -36° C (-34° F). Coolant concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolant should be maintained at the “cold full” of “cold fill range” level in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section. Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above 60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A 50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following: • Freeze protection down to -36° C (-34° F). • Boiling protection up to 129° C (265° F). • Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion. • Enables calibrated gauges to work properly. 227
  • 228. Maintenance and Specifications When the engine is cold, check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir. MAX COLD FILL RANGE MIN • The engine coolant should be at the “cold fill level” or within the “cold fill range” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon application). • Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for service interval schedules. • Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your vehicle in this chapter. If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval, the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter. Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location. Adding engine coolant When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained. Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. 228
  • 229. Maintenance and Specifications Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield. The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with either green-colored Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant meeting Ford specification ESE-M97B44–A or yellow-colored Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant meeting Ford Specification WSS-M97B51–A1. To determine your vehicle’s coolant type (color), check your coolant reservoir. • Add Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored), VC-4–A (U.S.) or CXC-10 (Canada) or Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored), VC-7–A (VC-7–B in Oregon), depending on the type of coolant originally equipped in your vehicle. If you are unsure which type of coolant your vehicle requires, check your coolant reservoir or contact your local dealer. Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, darkens the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from yellow to golden tan. • Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such as Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44–D with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product with your factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection. • A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone (without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing. • Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing. • Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant. • Do not mix with recycled coolant unless from a Ford-approved recycling process (see Use of Recycled engine coolant section). 229
  • 230. Maintenance and Specifications For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the “cold full” level. For all other vehicles, which have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant. To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly. 1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool. 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (an opaque plastic bottle). Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release. 3. Step back while the pressure releases. 4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap. 5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see above), to within the “cold fill range” or the “cold full” level on the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full. 6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss.) After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration see Checking Engine Coolant section). If the concentration is not 50/50 (protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50 coolant concentration. Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level. If you have to add more than 1.0 liter (1.0 quart) of engine coolant per month, have your dealer check the engine cooling system. Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage. 230
  • 231. Maintenance and Specifications Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a recycled engine coolant produced by Ford-approved processes in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored). However, not all coolant recycling processes produce coolant that meets Ford specification ESE-M97B44–A. Use of such coolant may harm the engine and cooling system components. Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available. Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids. Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer to Refill capacities in this chapter. Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this chapter. Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –36° C [–34° F]): • It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50%. • NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%. • Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. • Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months. If you drive in extremely hot climates: • It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40%. • NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%. 231
  • 232. Maintenance and Specifications • Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. • Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. • Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive. Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection. What you should know about fail-safe cooling (if equipped) If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred. The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load and terrain. How fail-safe cooling works If the engine begins to overheat: • The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot) area. • The and symbol will illuminate. • The Service Engine Soon indicator light will illuminate. H C If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine. When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However: • The engine power will be limited. • The air conditioning system will be disabled. Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to increase. Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine damage. 232
  • 233. Maintenance and Specifications When fail-safe mode is activated You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage, therefore: 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine. 2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility. 3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool. 4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low. Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. 5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility. Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible. WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS Important safety precautions Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others. If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury. Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled. 233
  • 234. Maintenance and Specifications Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent. Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel: • Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before fueling your vehicle. • Always turn off the vehicle before fueling. • Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours. • Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury. • Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury. • Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation. • Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction. When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes. 234
  • 235. Maintenance and Specifications The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container. Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an ungrounded fuel container: • Place approved fuel container on the ground. • DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the cargo area). • Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling. • DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position. Fuel Filler Cap Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/8 turn on/off feature. When fueling your vehicle: 1. Turn the engine off. 2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops. 3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe. 4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the filler pipe. 5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops. If the “Service Engine Soon/Check Engine” indicator comes on and stays on after you start the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. Turn off the engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it. If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others. 235
  • 236. If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury. Choosing the right fuel Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system components. Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds, including manganese-based compounds containing MMT. Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was not designed may not be covered by your warranty. Octane recommendations Your vehicle is designed to use “Regular” unleaded gasoline with pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. We do not recommend the use of (R+M)/2 87 METHOD gasolines labeled as “Regular” that are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas. Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified service technician to prevent any engine damage. Fuel quality If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability problems during a cold start, try a different brand of “Regular” unleaded gasoline. “Premium” unleaded gasoline is not recommended (particularly in the United States) because it may cause these problems to become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your dealer or a qualified service technician. It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty. Maintenance and Specifications 236
  • 237. Maintenance and Specifications Many of the world’s automakers issued the World-wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle. Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter. In Canada, look for fuels that display the Auto Makers’ Choice logo. Cleaner air Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to improve air quality. Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse affect on powertrain components. If you have run out of fuel: • You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. • Your “Service Engine Soon” indicator may come on. For more information on the “Service Engine Soon” indicator, refer to the Instrument cluster chapter. Fuel Filter For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service technician. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals for changing the fuel filter. Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used. 237
  • 238. Maintenance and Specifications ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 600 km (1 000 miles) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate measurement after 3 000 km–5 000 km (2 000 miles-3 000 miles). Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities section of this chapter. The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty. The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank. For consistent results when filling the fuel tank: • Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling, an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running. • Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time the tank is filled. • Allow no more than 2 automatic click-offs when filling. • Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating. • Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand. • Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the same direction each time you fill up. • Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time. Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent. 238
  • 239. Maintenance and Specifications Calculating fuel economy 1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading (in kilometers or miles). 2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in liters or gallons). 3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading. 4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading. 5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total kilometers traveled. Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used. Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy. Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy. Habits • Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel. • Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy. • Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste fuel. • Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop. • Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy. • Slow down gradually. • Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 88 km/h [55 mph] uses 15% less fuel than traveling at 105 km/h [65 mph]). • Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy. • Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy. 239
  • 240. • Maintenance and Specifications You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs. Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy. • Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy. • Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy. • Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving. Maintenance • Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size. • Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy. • Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter. • Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in your vehicle scheduled maintenance guide. Conditions • Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed. • Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately 0.4 km/L [1 mpg] is lost for every 180 kg [400 lb] of weight carried). • Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may reduce fuel economy. • Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy. • Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 12–16 km (8–10 miles) of driving. • Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain. • Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal. • Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than two-wheel-drive operation. • Close windows for high speed driving. 240
  • 241. Maintenance and Specifications EPA window sticker Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles. It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window sticker. These numbers represent the Range of L/100 km (MPG) expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly: • Use only the specified fuel listed. • Avoid running out of fuel. • Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds. • Have the items listed in your scheduled maintenance guide performed according to the specified schedule. The scheduled maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance guide are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system. If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. 241
  • 242. Maintenance and Specifications Illumination of the “Service Engine Soon” light, charging system warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly. Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up specifications. Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty information. Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of the on-board diagnostics system. If your “Check Engine/Service Engine Soon” light is on, refer to the description in the Warning lights and chimes section of the Instrument cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test with the “Check Engine/Service Engine Soon” light on. If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced, the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test” condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as described below: • First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway. • Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with at least four idle periods. Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started, do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. 242
  • 243. Maintenance and Specifications CHECKING AND ADDING POWER STEERING FLUID Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the service interval schedules. If adding fluid is necessary, use only MERCON ATF. Check the fluid level when it is at ambient temperature, 20° – 80° F (-7° – 25° C): 1. Check the fluid level on the dipstick. It should be between the arrows in the FULL COLD range. Do not add fluid if the level is within this range. 2. If the fluid level is low, start the engine. 3. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several times. 4. Turn the engine off. 5. Recheck the fluid level on the dipstick. Do not add fluid if the level is between the arrows in the FULL COLD range. 6. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking the level until it reaches the FULL COLD range. Be sure to put the dipstick back in the reservoir. 243
  • 244. Maintenance and Specifications BRAKE FLUID Checking and adding brake fluid Brake fluid should be checked and refilled as needed. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the service interval schedules. 1. Clean the reservoir cap before removal to prevent dirt or water from entering the reservoir. 2. Visually inspect the fluid level. 3. If necessary, add brake fluid from a clean un-opened container until the level reaches MAX. Do not fill above this line. 4. Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid certified to meet Ford specification ESA-M6C25–A. Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter. MAX Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will cause permanent damage to your brakes. Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run dry. This may cause the brakes to fail. 244
  • 245. Maintenance and Specifications TRANSMISSION FLUID Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped) Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage. Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating temperature (approximately 30 km [20 miles]). If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking. 1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until it reaches normal operating temperature. 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake. 3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal, start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage. 4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running. 5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment in this chapter for the location of the dipstick. 6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube. 7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient temperature. Low fluid level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is at the bottom of the dipstick and the ambient temperature is ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD above 10°C (50°F). DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK 245
  • 246. Correct fluid level The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 66°C-77°C (150°F-170°F) on a level surface. The normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 30 km (20 miles) of driving. You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is above 10°C (50°F). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating temperature. The transmission fluid should be in this range if at normal operating temperature (66°C-77°C [150°F-170°F]). The transmission fluid should be in this range if at ambient temperature (10°C-35°C [50°F-95°F]). High fluid level Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure. An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns and/or possible damage. High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition. ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK Maintenance and Specifications 246
  • 247. Maintenance and Specifications Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the Lubricant specifications section in this chapter. Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transmission component damage. If necessary, add fluid in 250 ml (1/2 pint) increments through the filler tube until the level is correct. If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified technician. ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK concerns and/or possible damage. Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components. Checking and adding transfer case fluid (if equipped) 1. Clean the filler plug. 2. Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level. 247
  • 248. Maintenance and Specifications 3. Add only enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening. Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant Specifications in this chapter. AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element. When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter element listed. Refer to Motorcraft Part Numbers. Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. Changing the air filter element (gasoline engines only) 1. Loosen the clamp that secures the air filter element in place. 248
  • 249. Maintenance and Specifications 2. Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing. 3. Remove the air filter element from the open end of the air filter housing. 4. Install a new air filter element, ensuring the arrow on the top half of the air filter housing lines up with the notch on the bottom half of air filter housing. Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing. This could cause filter damage and allow unmetered air to enter the engine if not properly seated. 5. Replace the two halves of the air filter housing and secure the clamp. INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING New vehicles are fitted with tires that have a rating on them called Tire Quality Grades. The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: • Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set. Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2). 249
  • 250. Maintenance and Specifications U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA A B C The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 250
  • 251. Maintenance and Specifications SERVICING YOUR TIRES Checking the tire pressure • Use an accurate tire pressure gauge. • Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle has been parked for at least one hour or has been driven less than 5 km (3 miles). • Adjust tire pressure to recommended specifications found on the Certification Label. Tire pressure information can also be found on the Tire Information label located on the inside of the fuel filler door. Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle control. Tire rotation Because your vehicle’s tires perform different jobs, they often wear differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly and last longer, rotate them as indicated in the scheduled maintenance guide. If you notice that the tires wear unevenly, have them checked. • Four tire rotation 251
  • 252. • Maintenance and Specifications Five tire rotation Replacing the tires Replace the tires when the wear band is visible through the tire treads. When replacing full size tires, never mix radial bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes that are listed on the Certification Label. Make sure that all tires are the same size, speed rating, and load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire combinations recommended on the label. If you do not follow these precautions, your vehicle may not drive properly and safely. Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size, type, load-carrying capacity and tread design (e.g., “All Terrain”, “Touring”, etc.), as originally offered by Ford. 252
  • 253. Maintenance and Specifications Do not replace your tires with “high performance” tires or larger size tires. Failure to follow these precautions may adversely affect the handling of the vehicle and make it easier for the driver to lose control and roll over. Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tires may also affect the accuracy of your speedometer. SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you currently have on your vehicle. The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used as chains may chip aluminum wheels. Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains: • Use only SAE Class S chains. • Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any wiring, brake lines or fuel lines. • Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle. • If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle. • Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use tire chains on dry roads. • The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains. 253
  • 254. MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS Component* 5.4L V8 engine 6.8L V10 engine Air filter element FA-1634 FA-1634 Fuel filter FG-986B FG-986B Oil filter FL-820-S FL-820-S PCV valve EV-233 EV-233 Battery BXT-65-750 BXT-65-750 Spark plugs-platinum** AGSF-22W AGSF-22W *Refer to the 7.3 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for Motorcraft diesel engine service part numbers. **Refer to Vehicle Emissions Control Information (VECI) decal for spark plug gap information. REFILL CAPACITIES Fluid Ford Part Name Application Capacity Front axle Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Premium 4x4 Front Axle Lubricant 4X4 vehicles 1.8L (3.8 pints) Rear axle 1 Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant All 3.3L (6.9 pints) 2 Brake fluid High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid All Fill to line on reservoir Maintenance and Specifications 254
  • 255. Maintenance and Specifications Fluid Ford Part Name Application Capacity Engine coolant- Gasoline engines 3 Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored) or Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored) 5.4L V8 engine 25L (26.4 quarts) 4 6.8L V10 engine 27.0L (28.5 quarts) 4 Engine coolant-Diesel engine Refer to your 7.3L Diesel Supplement Engine oil (includes filter change)-Gasoline engines Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil All 5.7L (6.0 quarts) Engine oil (includes filter change)-Diesel engine Refer to your 7.3L Diesel Supplement Fuel tank N/A All 166.6L (44.0 gallons) Power steering fluid Motorcraft MERCON ATF All Fill to line on dipstick Transfer case fluid (if equipped) Motorcraft MERCON ATF 4x4 vehicles 1.9L (2.0 quarts) Transmission fluid 5 Motorcraft MERCON ATF 4x2 vehicles 16.1L (17.1 quarts) 6 4x4 vehicles 16.7L (17.7 quarts) 6 Windshield washer fluid Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate All 4.2L (1.1 gallons) 255
  • 256. Maintenance and Specifications 1Your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic lubricant. Axle lubricant quantities should not need to be checked unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the axle assembly has been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be changed any time the rear axle has been submerged in water. 2Add 236 ml (8 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier C8AZ-19B546-A or equivalent meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of Traction-Lok axles. Service refill capacities are determined by filling the rear axle to the bottom of the filler hole with the specified lubricant. 3Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. 4If equipped with auxiliary rear heater, add an additional 1.4 L (1.5 quarts). 5Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being added is of the correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide to determine the correct service interval. Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as MERCON and MERCON V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCON type fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that require the MERCON V type fluid. MERCON and MERCON V type fluids are not interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCON and MERCON V. Use of a transmission fluid that indicates dual usage (MERCON and MERCON V) in an automatic transmission application requiring MERCON may cause transmission damage. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage. 6Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range. 256
  • 257. Maintenance and Specifications LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS Item Ford part name or equivalent Ford part number Ford specification Spindle bearing High Temperature 4X4 Front Axle and Wheel Bearing Grease E8TZ-19590–A ESA-M1C198–A Front axle Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Premium 4x4 Front Axle Lubricant XY-75W90-TQL WSP-M2C201-A Rear axle1 Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 High Performance Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant XY-75W140–QL WSL-M2C192-A Brake fluid Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-1 ESA-M6C25-A and DOT 3 Engine coolant-Gasoline engines Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored) VC-4–A (in Canada, Motorcraft CXC-10 ) ESE-M97B44-A Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored) VC-7–A WSS-M97B51-A1 Engine coolant-Diesel engine Refer to your 7.3L Diesel Supplement Engine oil-Gasoline engines Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W20-QSP WSS-M2C153-H and API Certification Mark 257
  • 258. Maintenance and Specifications Item Ford part name or equivalent Ford part number Ford specification Engine oil-Diesel engine Refer to your 7.3L Diesel Supplement Hinges, latches, striker plates, fuel filler door hinge and seat tracks Multi-Purpose Grease XG-4or F5AZ-19G209-AA ESR-M1C159-A Transmission /steering/parking brake linkages and pivots, brake pedal shaft Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-C or XG-1-K ESA-M1C75-B Power steering fluid and transfer case fluid (if equipped) Motorcraft MERCON ATF XT-2-QDX MERCON Automatic transmission 2 Motorcraft MERCON ATF XT-2-QDX MERCON Windshield washer fluid Ultra-clear Windshield Washer Concentrate C9AZ-19550-AC ESR-M17P5-A 1 Add 236 ml (8 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier C8AZ-19B546-A or equivalent meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of Traction-Lok axles. Ford design rear axles contain a synthetic lubricant that does not require changing unless the axle has been submerged in water. 258
  • 259. Maintenance and Specifications 2Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being added is of the correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide to determine the correct service interval. Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as MERCON and MERCON V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCON type fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that require the MERCON V type fluid. MERCON and MERCON V type fluids are not interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCON and MERCON V. Use of a transmission fluid that indicates dual usage (MERCON and MERCON V) in an automatic transmission application requiring MERCON may cause transmission damage. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage. ENGINE DATA Engine* 5.4L V8 engine 6.8L V10 engine Cubic inches 330 415 Required fuel 87 octane 87 octane Firing order 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 1-6-5-10-2-7-3-8-4-9 Spark plug gap 1.3-1.4 mm (0.052-0.056 inch) 1.3-1.4 mm (0.052-0.056 inch) Ignition system Coil on plug Coil on plug Compression ratio 9.0:1 9.0:1 *Refer to the 7.3 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for diesel engine information. 259
  • 260. Maintenance and Specifications VEHICLE DIMENSIONS EXCURSION Dimension 4x2 mm (in) 4x4 mm (in) (1) Overall length 5 759 (226.7) 5 759 (226.7) (2) Overall width 2 031 (79.9) 2 031 (79.9) (3) Overall height 1 967 (77.4) 2 043 (80.4) (4) Wheelbase 3 480 (137.0) 3 480 (137.0) (5) Track (Front / 1 738 (68.4)/ 1 738 (68.4)/ Rear) 1 729 (68.1) 1 729 (68.1) 4 1 260
  • 261. IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Certification label The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Certification label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Certification label may be located. The Certification label is located on the front door latch pillar on the driver’s side. 5 2 3 Maintenance and Specifications 261
  • 262. Maintenance and Specifications Vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number is attached to a metal tag and is located on the driver side instrument panel. (Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number.) XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 1. World manufacturer identifier 2. Brake type and gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) 3. Vehicle line, series, body type 4. Engine type 5. Check digit 6. Model year 7. Assembly plant 8. Production sequence number Engine number The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification number) is stamped on the engine block, transmission, frame and transfer case (if equipped). 262
  • 263. Accessories FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE A wide selection of genuine Ford accessories are available for your vehicle through your local authorized Ford, Lincoln, Mercury or Ford of Canada dealer. These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Ford accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective accessory. The accessory will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit: • 12 months or 20 000 km (12 000 miles) (whichever occurs first), or • the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty. This means that genuine Ford accessories purchased along with your new vehicle and installed by the dealer are covered for the full length of your New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty — 3 years or 60 000 km (36 000 miles) (whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty. Not all accessories are available for all models. Vehicle Security Styled wheel protector locks Vehicle security systems Underbody Lighting Comfort and convenience Cargo organizers Cargo shades Cargo trays Cell phone holder Dash trim Engine block heaters Battery warmer/blanket Cellar phone holder Rear door storage bins Tire step 263
  • 264. Accessories Travel equipment Adjustable Towing Systems Auto headlamp system with DRL (Daytime Running Lights) Battery Warmer Box Aluminum Rack cargo storage systems Daytime running lights Factory luggage rack adaptors Fog lights Framed luggage covers Hard and soft sided roof box Highway safety and first aid kit Multi sport track rider cross bars Multi sport track rider adaptors Spare tire soft storage cover Seat back pack storage Soft luggage cover Trailgate tables Towing mirrors Trailer hitch mounted bike carrier Trailer hitch bars and balls Trailer hitch swivel Tubular running bars TV/video system Protection and appearance equipment Air bag anti-theft locks Carpeted cargo mat Door edge guards Truck covers Cargo liners, interior Carpet floor mats Cleaners, waxes and polishes Flat splash guards Front end covers (full) Grill guards/brush guards 264
  • 265. Hood deflectors Locking gas cap Lubricants and oils Molded splash guards Molded vinyl floor mats Rear air deflectors Side window air deflectors Stainless grill insert Step bumpers Sun roof deflector Touch-up paint Universal floor mats — carpeted For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle: • When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety compliance certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight information. • The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile communications systems - such as two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician. • Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use or are not properly installed. When operated, such systems may cause the engine to stumble or stall or cause the transmission to be damaged or operate improperly. In addition, such systems may be damaged or their performance may be affected by operating your vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers and other transmitters with outputs of five watts or less will not ordinarily affect your vehicle’s operation.) • Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage that may result from the use of such equipment. Accessories 265
  • 266. A ABS (see Brakes) .....................157 Accessory delay ..........................86 Air bag supplemental restraint system ........................................140 and child safety seats ............142 description ..............................140 disposal ....................................144 driver air bag ..........................142 indicator light ...................12, 144 operation .................................142 passenger air bag ...................142 Air cleaner filter ...............248, 254 Air conditioning ..........................60 auxiliary heater and air conditioner ................................68 manual heating and air conditioning system .................57 Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) .....................................227 Anti-lock brake system (see Brakes) ..............................157 Anti-theft system warning light .............................14 Audio system (see Radio) ...19, 27 Automatic transmission driving an automatic overdrive .................................161 fluid, adding ............................245 fluid, checking ........................245 fluid, refill capacities ..............254 fluid, specification ..................259 Auxiliary power point .................83 Axle lubricant specifications ..257, 259 refill capacities ........................254 traction lok ..............................159 B Battery .......................................225 acid, treating emergencies .....225 charging system warning light ............................................12 jumping a disabled battery ....197 maintenance-free ....................225 replacement, specifications ...254 servicing ..................................225 BeltMinder .................................135 Brakes ........................................156 anti-lock ...................................157 anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light .....................12, 157 brake warning light ..................11 fluid, checking and adding ....244 fluid, refill capacities ..............254 fluid, specifications .........257, 259 lubricant specifications ..257, 259 parking ....................................158 pedals (see Power adjustable foot pedals) ...............................89 shift interlock ..........................160 Break-in period .............................5 Bulbs ............................................75 C Capacities for refilling fluids ....254 Cargo net ...................................102 CD-6 disc .....................................27 CD-single premium .....................19 Certification Label ....................261 Changing a tire .........................192 Child safety restraints ..............145 child safety belts ....................145 Child safety seats ......................145 Index 266
  • 267. attaching with tether straps ..149 in front seat ............................147 in rear seat ..............................147 Cleaning your vehicle engine compartment ..............214 exterior ....................................217 instrument panel ....................216 interior .....................................216 plastic parts ............................215 washing ....................................213 waxing .....................................213 wheels ......................................214 wiper blades ....................215–216 woodtone trim ........................216 Climate control (see Air conditioning or Heating) ......57, 60 Clock ......................................23, 32 Compass, electronic ..............86, 95 calibration .................................96 set zone adjustment .................96 Console ......................................101 overhead ..............................82–83 Controls power seat ...............................119 steering column ........................93 Coolant checking and adding ..............227 refill capacities ................231, 254 specifications ..................257, 259 Cruise control (see Speed control) ........................................89 Customer Assistance ................185 Ford accessories for your vehicle .............................217–218 Ford Extended Service Plan ..........................................206 Getting assistance outside the U.S. and Canada .....................210 Getting roadside assistance ...185 Index Getting the service you need .........................................204 Ordering additional owner’s literature .................................211 The Dispute Settlement Board .......................................206 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program ...................................209 D Daytime running lamps (see Lamps) ................................72 Defrost rear window ..............................70 Dipstick automatic transmission fluid ..........................................245 engine oil .................................222 Doors door ajar warning .....................14 lubricant specifications ..........257 Driving under special conditions ..........................171, 173 sand .........................................172 snow and ice ...........................174 through water .................173, 177 E Emergencies, roadside jump-starting ..........................197 Emission control system ..........241 Engine ................................259–260 check engine/service engine soon light ..................................10 cleaning ...................................214 coolant .....................................227 diesel ...........................................7 267
  • 268. fail-safe coolant ......................232 idle speed control ...................225 lubrication specifications ..................257, 259 refill capacities ........................254 service points ..........................221 starting after a collision .........186 Engine block heater .................155 Engine oil ..................................222 checking and adding ..............222 dipstick ....................................222 filter, specifications ........224, 254 recommendations ...................224 refill capacities ........................254 specifications ..................257, 259 Exhaust fumes ..........................155 F Fail safe cooling ........................232 Fluid capacities .........................254 Foglamps .....................................72 Four-Wheel Drive vehicles ................................14, 166 description ..............................167 driving off road .......................169 electronic shift ................166–167 indicator light ...................14, 167 preparing to drive your vehicle .....................................160 Fuel ............................................233 calculating fuel economy .......238 cap .....................................11, 235 capacity ...................................254 choosing the right fuel ...........236 comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates .................241 detergent in fuel .....................237 filling your vehicle with fuel ...........................233, 235, 238 filter, specifications ........237, 254 fuel pump shut-off switch .....186 gauge .........................................17 improving fuel economy ........238 low fuel warning light ..............13 octane rating ...........236, 259–260 quality ......................................236 running out of fuel .................237 safety information relating to automotive fuels .....................233 Fuses ..................................187–188 G Garage door opener ..............83, 97 Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ......11, 235 Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) ...................................238 Gauges .........................................15 engine coolant temperature gauge .........................................15 engine oil pressure gauge ........16 fuel gauge ..................................17 odometer ...................................18 speedometer .............................18 tachometer ................................18 trip odometer ............................18 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .......................................177 calculating ...............................179 definition .................................177 driving with a heavy load ......177 location ....................................177 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) .......................................177 calculating .......................177, 179 definition .................................177 driving with a heavy load ......177 location ....................................177 H Hazard flashers .........................186 Index 268
  • 269. Head restraints .........................121 Headlamps ...................................71 aiming ........................................73 autolamp system .......................71 bulb specifications ....................75 daytime running lights .............72 flash to pass ..............................72 high beam ...........................13, 72 replacing bulbs .........................76 turning on and off ....................71 warning chime ..........................14 Heating heating and air conditioning system .................................57, 60 HomeLink universal transceiver (see Garage door opener) .................97–98, 100 Hood ..........................................220 I Ignition .......................152, 259–260 Infant seats (see Safety seats) .....................145 Inspection/maintenance (I/M) testing ........................................242 Instrument panel cleaning ...................................216 cluster ........................................10 lighting up panel and interior .......................................73 J Jack ............................................192 positioning ...............................192 storage .....................................192 Jump-starting your vehicle ......197 Index K Keyless entry system autolock ...................................112 locking and unlocking doors ................................111–112 programming entry code .......111 Keys ...................................113–115 key in ignition chime ...............15 positions of the ignition .........152 L Lamps autolamp system .................71, 75 bulb replacement specifications chart ..................75 cargo lamps ...............................73 daytime running light ...............72 fog lamps ...................................72 headlamps .................................71 headlamps, flash to pass ..........72 instrument panel, dimming .....73 interior lamps ...............73–74, 76 replacing bulbs ...................75–79 Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) .................................73 Liftgate ......................................102 Lights, warning and indicator ....10 air bag ........................................12 anti-lock brakes (ABS) ....12, 157 anti-theft ...................................14 brake ..........................................11 charging system ........................12 check coolant ............................11 cruise indicator .........................13 door ajar ....................................14 fuel cap light .............................11 high beam .................................13 low fuel ......................................13 safety belt .................................12 269
  • 270. service engine soon ..................10 speed control ............................93 turn signal indicator .................13 Limited slip axle (see Traction Loc) ............................................159 Load limits .................................177 GAWR ......................................177 GVWR ......................................177 trailer towing ..........................177 Loading instructions .................179 Locks autolock ...................................112 childproof ................................106 doors ........................................105 Lubricant specifications ...257, 259 Lumbar support, seats .............119 M Manual transmission fluid capacities ........................254 lubricant specifications ..........259 Message center ...........................93 english/metric button ...............94 menu button .............................94 Mirrors .........................................82 automatic dimming rearview mirror ........................................86 fold away ...................................88 heated ........................................88 side view mirrors (power) .......87 Motorcraft parts ................237, 254 O Octane rating ............................236 Odometer .....................................18 Oil (see Engine oil) ..................222 Overdrive ...................................101 P Panic alarm feature, remote entry system ..............................108 Parking brake ............................158 Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....254 Pedals (see Power adjustable foot pedals) .................................89 Power adjustable foot pedals ...118 Power distribution box (see Fuses) ...............................188 Power door locks ..............105, 112 Power mirrors .............................87 Power point .................................83 Power steering ..........................159 fluid, checking and adding ....243 fluid, refill capacity ................254 fluid, specifications .........257, 259 Power Windows ...........................85 Preparing to drive your vehicle ........................................160 R Radio ......................................19, 27 Radio reception ...........................56 Rear window defroster ...............70 Relays ........................................187 Remote entry system .......106, 108 illuminated entry ....................110 locking/unlocking doors ................................105, 107 panic alarm .............................108 replacement/additional transmitters .............................109 Index 270
  • 271. replacing the batteries ...........108 Reverse sensing system ...........164 Roadside assistance ..................185 Roof rack ...................................103 S Safety belts (see Safety restraints) ............14, 128–131, 133 Safety defects, reporting ..........212 Safety restraints ........128–131, 133 belt minder .............................135 cleaning the safety belts ........139 extension assembly ................139 for adults .........................129–131 for children .....................144–145 lap belt ....................................134 warning light and chime ...........................12, 14, 135 Safety seats for children ..........145 Seat belts (see Safety restraints) ..................................128 Seats ..........................................117 child safety seats ....................145 memory seat ...........................118 SecuriLock passive anti-theft system ................................113–115 Servicing your vehicle ..............219 Snowplowing .................................7 Spare tire (see Changing the Tire) ...........................................192 Spark plugs, specifications .............254, 259–260 Special notice diesel-powered vehicles .............7 utility-type vehicles ....................7 Index Specification chart, lubricants ...........................257, 259 Speed control ..............................89 Speedometer ...............................18 Starting your vehicle ........152–154 jump starting ..........................197 Steering .....................................159 Steering wheel controls ..........................82, 89, 93 tilting .........................................82 T Tachometer .................................18 Tires ...........................192, 249–251 changing ..........................192–193 checking the pressure ............251 replacing ..................................252 rotating ....................................251 snow tires and chains ............253 tire grades ...............................250 treadwear ................................250 Towing .......................................180 recreational towing .................184 trailer towing ..........................180 wrecker ....................................202 Traction-lok rear axle ...............159 Transfer case fluid checking .........................247 Transmission .............................160 fluid, checking and adding (automatic) .............................245 fluid, refill capacities ..............254 lubricant specifications ..................257, 259 Transmission control indicator light ..............................................13 Trip odometer .............................18 271
  • 272. Turn signal ............................13, 73 V Vehicle dimensions ...................260 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ..........................................262 Vehicle loading ..........................177 Ventilating your vehicle ...........156 W Warning chimes .....................14–15 Warning lights (see Lights) .......10 Washer fluid ..............................222 Water, Driving through .............177 Windows power .........................................85 rear wiper/washer .....................80 Windshield washer fluid and wipers checking and adding fluid .....222 checking and cleaning ..............81 liftgate reservoir .....................222 operation ...................................80 replacing wiper blades .............81 Wrecker towing .........................202 Index 272